Home

Installing the WRIA

Contents

1. 1828 1829 1830 To view a water user s data click the icon for the desired water user In the figure 1831 above user 285 has been selected in the list on the left of the Water Management form 1832 1833 To add a new water management item click the J button The Create Water 1834 Management Item form will be displayed WRIA 1 DSS User s Manual 1835 1836 1837 1838 1839 1840 1841 1842 1843 1844 1845 1846 1847 1848 1849 1850 1851 1852 1853 1854 1855 1856 1857 75 Create Water Management Item Eg Select a Water Management Item To Be Created k E Source Reservoir Water Retur Monthly Right Flow Demand teas Select the water management item desired and then click the Create button The Edit Data form will be displayed for the water management item created allowing the DSS user to edit the data values for the new item To edit an existing Water Management item click the P button The Edit Water Management Item form will then be displayed Edit Water Management Item Eg Select a Water Management ltem to Edit hk Source Reservoir Wi aber Return Monthly Right Flor Demand Eeten Select the water management item desired and then click the _ Edtitem button The Edit Data form will be displayed for the water management item selected allowing the DSS user to edit the data values
2. 1 smpe W A coceecc csc oes A tece cesses T E m m E o o 0 January February March April May une uly August September October Novembemecember 3771 mamo RT e ont AT ue PTEN ato Esun ae NOM Mert 37712 3773 3 Histogram 4 Monthly Box Whisker 3774 12203550 WHATCOM CREEK AT BELLINGHAM da hn aa de tee eli i 7 200004 is Gee ae ee ee unter Spring Summer Fall 5 5 3 5 5 3 7 7 5 Season Year 3776 5 Seasonal Box Whisker 6 Annual Box Whisker 3777 12203550 WHATCOM CREEK AT BELLINGHAM 5 a 3 f 7 8 Year 3779 7 Overall Box Whisker 3780 WRIA 1 DSS User s Manual 3781 3782 3783 3784 3785 3786 3787 3788 3789 3790 379 3792 3793 3794 3795 3796 3797 3798 3799 3800 3801 3802 3803 3804 3805 3806 3807 3808 3809 3810 3811 3812 3813 3814 3815 3816 171 Selecting Stations and Water Quality Parameters Users can select from the list of available water quality stations by using the Station pull down box located in the Data Selection box at the bottom of the window The Station pull down box will have a list of all stations selected from the map or 1f the Time Series Analyst was launched from the toolbar the Station pull down box will have a list of all stations in the water quality database To change from one station to the next users can simply click on a new location in the Station pull down box Data Selection Plot Parameter CO
3. cccccccccssssseeeecceeeeeeaeeeseeeeeeeeeeeaeeensees 251 Wale MS TA Da e E E 231 SED DUON EIO oea E R 238 Macroinvertebrate Density Plots cessssseeccccccceeeeeseeecceeeeeaaeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeesees 239 Viewme Sea OST OT AVA secre serosceswaueaeesceenecceeceescancmemsectneneec usenesadeeanencenseosntous 240 Well Log Data Viewer PING asescassescaissadenccssevesessassecsassussaissadencsssevesesssssaessessasseiesadenss 241 ACW well rapis eeso E EE 241 Selecting Well Graph Points from the Map eeeeeeesssssssssssssssssserereeesesssssssssssssessees 242 Viewing Well Graphs via the Well Log Data Viewer Toolbar Button 00000 242 W ell Graph viewing OPUS esros ere e EEE EOE 242 Viewing a Single Well Graph seseeeeeeeessssssssssssssseeereeresessssssssssssseeererereeeessessss 243 Viewme Multiple Well Graphs sricussecesiui sE E 243 Expor aS GTa ts e E ene teal Peete er Ceenntn cater earns cel crete eee 244 View ine Well Report DOCUIMCIS ni sestdsesernsoasavrcieuesevancachbombaniebarsnaveetdaseneneaddopmeeoueeas 245 Selecting Well Report Document Points from the Map cccccesseeseeeeeeeeeeees 245 Viewing Well Report Documents via the Well Log Data Viewer Toolbar Button 246 Well Report Document Viewing Options ccccccssssesseeececeeceaaeesseeeceeeeeeseaeeseeeeeees 246 Viewing Entire Well Report Document Image ce eecceecececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaes 246 Viewing Enlarged Image of Well Report Do
4. Plot Parameter Correlation Analysis Stations used in the analysis are selected using the pull down boxes labeled X axis and Y axis at the bottom left of the form In addition users must select a water quality parameter for each selected station to be used in the correlation analysis In this manner users can correlate the same parameter at different stations different parameters at the same station or different parameters at different stations depending on their selections and provided that paired water quality observations observations taken on the same day and time exist A scatter plot of paired data for the selected water quality parameters from the selected stations 1s produced with the station and parameter selected in the Y axis pull down box plotted on the Y axis and the station and parameter selected in the X axis pull down box plotted on the X axis A linear best fit line is generated and drawn on the plot Descriptive statistics of the regression are shown at the top right of the form and include the slope intercept R and the number of data pairs that are included in the analysis In addition there is an option for viewing the correlation plot on a log scale WRIA 1I DSS User s Manual 4044 4045 4046 4047 4048 4049 4050 4051 4052 4053 4054 4055 4056 4057 4058 4059 4060 4061 185 An option at the right of the form allows the user to control the way data pairs are selected for analysi
5. Layer Tools Within the MapWindow WIS you can add layers to and remove layers from your project using the Layer Tools button To add or remove a layer click on the menu arrow located on the right portion of the Layer Tools button A list of options will become available yi Odd Layer a Remove Layer XY Clear Layers If you select Add Layer the Add Map Layer window will open Add Map Layer My Recent Documents Desktop Mu D ocuments My Computer hee Places Files of type All supported formats Cancel With this window you can navigate to and select a new layer to add to your project If you select Remove Layer the layer that is currently selected will be removed from your project If you select Clear Layers all layers will be removed from your project MapWindow Watershed Information System 607 608 609 610 611 612 613 614 615 616 617 618 619 620 621 622 623 18 Customizing the MapWindow WIS Interface You can customize the MapWindow WIS interface to meet your preferences by moving and or resizing the Legend and the Preview Map To move a frame click on the title bar make sure the pointer changes to crossbars and drag the frame to a new location i File Edt Phug ins Shapefile Editor Help OSB S BHiO TA QA Q i a ia ww ee rs O aio loea Fy 2 Sampling Locations a Photo Locations amp E Streamflow Gages Z Water Quality Stations Zh O Permit Compliance Sys
6. Outputs Output Habitat TimeSernes Database PhabT imeSenes Select Habitat Time Series Output Database The default output database for the Habitat Time Series Model is the PhabTimeSeries database To select a different database click the browse button 5 to the right of the database name as shown below Outputs Output Habitat TimeSernes Database Phabl imeS eres This will bring up the Database Configuration form Database Configuration Please select the Output Database for the Habitat Time Series Model Microsoft SOL Server C Use SOL Server to find the database Database Name Server Address Server User ID Server Password Microsoft Access C Use Access to find the database Please specify the full path to the mdb file containing the database Database Path Ga Test Connection Save Changes The user has the option of selecting a Microsoft SQL Server database by selecting the Use SQL Server to find the database option The user must then enter the database information in the following boxes WRIA I DSS User s Manual 3202 3203 3204 3205 3206 3207 3208 3209 3210 3211 3212 3213 3214 5215 3216 3217 3218 3219 3220 3221 3222 3223 3224 3223 3226 3227 141 Micrasatt SQL Server f Use SOL Server to find the database tabase Name Server Address local Server User ID r Use Trusted Server Password Connection To use a Micr
7. Server Address Server User ID P E Use Trusted Serer Password Connection Microsoft Access f Use Access to find the database Please specify the full path to the MOB file containing the database Database Path C Program FilesS WRIA 1_DSSS055_Data g Test Connectionis Save Changes WRIA Wide Water Quality Model Interface 2593 2594 2595 2596 2597 2598 2599 2600 2601 2602 2603 2604 2605 2606 2607 2608 2609 2610 2611 2612 2613 2614 2615 2616 2617 2618 2619 2620 2621 2622 2623 2624 112 To browse to a Microsoft Access Land Cover Summary database click the button An open file dialog will be displayed The default location for the Land Cover Summary Database is C Program Files WRIA 1_DSS DSS_Data Model Manager Databases LandCoverSummary mdb To save the selected database location click the ____SaveChanges__ button Select Water Quantity Output Directory The Select Directory form allows the DSS user to select a directory containing the Water Quantity Model output To access this form select the button to the right of Water Quantity Output Directory on Input tab of the Water Quality Model Inputs form This will bring up the Select Water Quantity Model Output Directory form as shown below The default location for the Water Quantity Model output is C Program Files WRIA 1_DSS Water Quantity TopNet Files Existing HE Select Water Q
8. 1112 2007 8 39 48 PM Test User 177990 12 31 1999 3 1 78 79 37030 1 0 2267 22250 Microsoft Windows AP Professional 5 1 2600 1023 MB Intel A Pentium R 4 CPU 3 40GHz Computer ame NOORTEST SystemT ypessGb based PL HHHHHHHHHHHHH Running Scenario New Scenario HHARHAAEHEAHH Author Last Modified 11 12 2007 8 39 47 PM Notes Description The scenario run log may be exported which 1s useful for archiving scenario results wt Export to File Close Exporting Scenario Run Log Exporting the log may be done by clicking the Export to File button in the scenario log viewer above You will be asked where to save the file Temperature and Dissolved Oxygen Flags Model Interface 3595 3596 3597 3598 3599 3600 3601 3602 3603 3604 3605 3606 3607 3608 3609 3610 3611 3612 3613 3614 3615 3616 3617 3618 3619 3620 3621 3622 162 Save In C Temperature and DO Flags Model d eS My Recent Documents My Computer My Network File name Places nave az type Text File tet Cancel A The output file will be textual ASCII text and will contain exactly what the scenario log viewer shows WRIA 1 DSS User s Manual 3623 3624 3625 3626 3627 3628 3629 3630 3631 3632 3633 3634 3635 3636 3637 3638 3639 3640 3641 3642 3643 3644 3645 3646 3647 3648 3649 163 Time Series Data Analyst Plug in The Time Series Data Ana
9. 2043 2044 2045 2046 2047 84 Run Water Quantity Model The DSS Scenario Builder allows the DSS user to run the Water Quantity Model g DSS Scenario Builder i loj x E Fie Elements View Run 0DEHS gt _ iojo1j1965 100571990 Elements Water Quantity Model Models Fiters Data Editors Other WR IA Wide Water Quality Model Lake Whatcom Water Quality Model Start Location Firgeh Location Waker Quantity Model iG Water Quantity ode Before the Water Quantity Model can be run the start and end dates need to be specified in the Scenario Builder To change the start and end dates click frojorjis6s froyosjise0 gt The start date is the date listed to the left and the end date is the date listed on the right To run the scenario click the button If you would like to abort the scenario run click the button to cancel the scenario run When the scenario has completed the DSS user will be asked if they would like to view the scenario run log a text file containing messages output by the elements contained in the scenario that has just been run Ci x The scenario run has completed wer Would you like to view the log For this scenario run To view the log for the scenario run click the J button To decline viewing the scenario log at this time click the button WRIA 1 DSS User s Manual 2048 2049 2050 2051 2052 2053 2054 20
10. 3843 3844 3845 3846 3847 3848 3849 3850 3851 3852 3853 3854 173 The Data Sources tab shown below allows users to turn on or off data collected by different agencies This is useful in situations where multiple agencies collect data at a single location By selecting the check boxes next to each agency the user can control which data is shown in the plot window If a particular agency is turned off the data for that agency are no longer shown in the plot window and are no longer included in the statistical summary in the Summary tab In this manner a user can examine data collected by a single agency or compare data collected by different agencies at the same location This tab also provides the number of observations made by each agency The width of the data fields may be altered by clicking on the line between two field labels and dragging the mouse until the field is the desired width m Options Summar Plot Options Flot Enhancements Data Sources Notes Agency Code Descr OF Obseryat 23 The Plot Options tab shown below allows users to modify the appearance of the plot in the plot window Users can easily switch between log and linear scale for the Y axis by using the check box at the top of the tab The other options are for specific plot types These options include control over how the time series plot is drawn using a line points or both adding user control lines 1 e showing water quality numeric
11. Choose Source Site from the List Figure 11 Example of the source site list Extrapolation SouthFork Lower SouthFork Upper Cancel The Target Site Has MAF 3597 6 cfs The Source Site Has MAF 1108 7 cfs Continue Mo Figure 12 Message showing flow magnitudes of the source and target sites See the Map Option If the user chooses to see the map Figure 8 the next window will display the map with hydrologically similar groups Figure 13 Appendix C Extrapolation Program User Manual 6180 6181 6182 6183 6184 6185 6186 6187 6188 6189 6190 6191 6192 6193 6194 290 E Hydrogroups Click the Button on the Bottom Corresponding to the Area Where the Target Node is Located Back Cancel Figure 13 Nooksack watershed Hydrogroups When the user clicks on one of the 6 buttons on the bottom thus choosing the area where the target node is located the next window will display that area with study sites and nodes belonging to that hydro group Subclusters within each hydro group are shown in different colors Figure 14 The user is encouraged to choose the source and target sites belonging to the same subcluster but will be allowed to choose any source target site combination provided both sites belong to the same hydro group The user is prompted to enter the node number The user can also choose to see a larger image by clicking View Larger Image button Pressing Enter
12. FD_FileType For all Fish Distribution layers enter the value Fish Distribution as that is the type of layer that it 1s FD_Filename The location filename of the Fish Distribution layer that you are working on relative to the database 1 e if the database is located in c 2D Data database mdb and the Fish Distribution layer that you are working on is located in c 2D Data Fish Distribution Distribution Layers ayerfilename shp then the entry Fish Distribution Distribution Layers layerfilename shp Input the 2D Data that is Station specific Do each of these kinds of data for each Station Background Images must be of type bmp gif or png Copy the Background Image for the mesh into the Background Image folder see folder structure above Input the Background Image information into the database Make an entry in the tblBackgroundImageFiles table The data to be entered for the database fields are Station_ID The value from the Station_ID field in tblStations that corresponds with the station that you are currently working with Image_Filename The location filename of the Background Image relative to the database i e If the database is located in c 2D Data database mdb and the Background Image is located in c 2D Data StationFolderName Background Image imagefilename then the entry StationFolderName Background Image imagefilename WRIA 1 DSS User s Manual 5726 3 21 5728 5729 5730 5731 5732
13. OR C A single node Cancel Figure 6 Extrapolation choices 300 nodes or 1 node WRIA 1 DSS User s Manual 6103 6104 6105 6106 6107 6108 6109 6110 6111 6112 6113 6114 6115 6116 6117 6118 6119 6120 6121 6122 6123 6124 6125 6126 6127 6128 6129 6130 6131 6132 287 Extrapolate to All 300 Nodes Extrapolation of the IFRs If the user chooses the first option All 300 nodes then the extrapolated IFRs will be saved into separate comma delimited files for each node in the ExtrapolatedIFR_output directory in the same directory where the executable program is located If such folder already exists the user will be asked to replace it or to enter a new folder name Extrapolation of the WUA curves The user will be given an option to save extrapolated WUA values in the individual comma delimited files or in the tbl WUA MethodB table of the Habitat database Figure 7 The detailed description of the table and the database is given in the Technical Documentation The Habitat Time Series Model HabitatTimeSeriesInput mdb database is provided with the program If the user chooses the first option csv files the extrapolated WUA will be saved into separate comma delimited files for each node in the ExtrapolatedWUA_output directory in the same folder where the executable program is located If such folder already exists the user will be asked to replace it or to enter
14. Sampling Data T Streamflow Sampling Locations g Temperature Probes 4 k Water Quality Sampling Sites 24 Legend After you have activated a layer click the Feature Identifier button el The Feature Identifier window will open This window contains a table with two columns Field Name and Field Value The items listed in Field Name correspond with the field names in the active layer s underlying attribute table For the example above the Feature Identifier table would look like the following MapWindow Watershed Information System 642 643 644 645 646 647 648 649 650 651 652 653 654 655 656 657 658 659 20 1 Feature Identifier Water Qu Sele Field Hame Field Value STATION DATABASE STATION _ HA AGENCY LOCATION STATE The values in the Field Value column will remain blank until you click on a feature within the selected layer Note When the MapWindow WIS is in the Feature Identify mode the cursor will 66599 1 appear as an 1 with cross bars in the upper left corner 1 After you have clicked the Feature Identifier button you can select a feature by either 1 clicking on a point line polygon etc after positioning the crossbars of the cursor directly over the feature or 2 clicking and drawing a box surrounding the feature or surrounding part of the feature s The selected feature will change color The Feature Identifier table will become populated wi
15. Water Quantity Model Settings Input Output Output Working Directon C Program Files AlAa 1_ OS S Model Runs Simulation Streamflow Database Wi aberl uantityS trearmF low OK Cancel Select Water Quantity Output Directory To select an output directory for the Water Quantity Model click the button to the right of GutputWorkingDuectoy The Select Directory form will then be displayed The Select Input Directory form allows the DSS user to select a directory that will contain the output folder for the Water Quantity Model The default location for the TopNet Input Directory is C Program Files WRIA 1_DSS ModelRuns When the Water Quantity Model is run in the DSS Scenario Builder a directory will be created in the directory selected If the scenario id were 99 the output directory path could be C Program Files WRIA 1_DSS ModelRuns WaterQuantityModel_Scenario99 Select Input Directory Sele C Program Files WALA 1_ DS S4Model Runs WRIA I DSS User s Manual 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005 2006 2007 2008 2009 2010 2011 2012 2013 2014 2015 2016 2017 2018 2019 2020 2021 2022 2023 2024 2025 83 To move up a directory level click the button To change the drive to browse for folders click the 17 button To select a folder as the desired directory click on the folder s name To open a folder double click the folder s name To save the selected directory click th
16. When the scenario has completed the DSS user will be asked if they would like to view the scenario run log a text file containing messages output by the elements contained in the scenario that has just been run View Log The scenario run has completed Would you like to view the log For this scenario run lt a S To view the log for the scenario run click the button To decline viewing the scenario log at this time click the button WRIA 1 DSS User s Manual 1560 1561 1562 1563 1564 1565 1566 1567 1568 1569 1570 1571 1572 1573 1574 1575 1576 1577 1578 1579 1580 1581 1582 1583 1584 1585 1586 1587 1588 1589 1590 1591 1592 1593 1594 1595 1596 1597 1598 1599 1600 1601 1602 6l Water Quantity Model Interface The Water Quantity Model Interface allows the DSS user to specify the input for the water quality model for the WRIA 1 Drainages The water quantity model requires the following input information Drainages Shapefile TopNet Input Directory Land Cover Summary Database Water Management Database The drainage shapefile used should be bsnwrial_v7 shp Only the drainage identifier BSNWRIAIA and drainage name DRAIN _NAME are used from this shapefile Other inputs have been created using the drainage identifiers in this shapefile Use of another shapefile would result in incorrect names being associated with drainage identifiers The TopNet input directory is t
17. s or cubic meters per second Flow_cfs This is the flow value in ft s or cubic feet per second AVI frame This is the corresponding frame number for the flow value in the AVI files for the given station o Species info into tblSpecies do one row for each species Station_ID The value from the Station_ID field in tblStations that corresponds with the station that you are currently working with Species_Name The name of the fish species Import Mesh Data See the following section titled Using the 2D Importer for screen shots and further detail on performing these steps Using the Importer import the following kinds of data e Habitat e Flow e Species Input the 2D Data that is for All Stations These steps have been completed for existing data to add new data that uses different HSC Curve data and or fish distribution data a new database must be used WRIA 1 DSS User s Manual 5642 5643 5644 5645 5646 5647 5648 5649 5650 5651 5652 5653 5654 5655 5656 5657 5658 5659 5660 5661 5662 5663 5664 5665 5666 5667 5668 5669 5670 5671 5672 5673 5674 5675 5676 5677 5678 5679 5680 568 5682 5683 5684 5685 267 HSC Curves data Copy the HSC Master Curves file into the HSC Folder see folder structure above Input the HSC Curves data into the database Make an entry in the tbIMediaFiles table The data to be entered for the database fields are Station_ID input the
18. 122 723 724 725 23 In the Shapefile Layers list select the layer for which you would like to add labels The Label by Field menu will become populated with the layer s corresponding attributes After you select an attribute by which the layer will be layered for example station name ID number or constituent type you can customize the label s appearance by changing the text font color and alignment using the Label Properties fields To apply your labels to the Map view click Apply The labels will appear in the Map view whenever the corresponding layer is displayed To remove a layer s labels click the Shape Labeler button select the corresponding layer in the Shapefile Labeler list and select None in the Label by Field list The Label Zoom Extents option allows you to set a map zoom level at which the labels will turn on This is useful when labels on the map become too cluttered to read You can set the label extents such that the labels do not turn on until you zoom in to a certain level on the map To do this click the Enable Label Extents check box This will activate the label zoom extents option Next using the Zoom Tools zoom the Map View to the desired zoom level at which you wish your labels to appear and then click on the Set Current Map Extents as Label Extents button Press Apply once the desired zoom level has been set This option can be disabled by simply un checking on the Enable La
19. 1717 1718 1719 1720 1721 1722 1723 1724 68 To save the selected directory click the button Select Land Cover Database To select the Land Cover Summary Database click the button to the right of Land Cover Database Database Configuration Please select a Land Cower Summar database Microsoft SQL Server C Use SOL Server to find the database Server Address Server User ID PO Use Trusted Server Password Connection Microsoft Access f Use Access to find the database Please specify the full path to the MOB file containing the database Database Path CAProgram Files WRI4 1 DSS405S Data g Test Connection s Save Changes To browse to a Microsoft Access Land Cover Summary Database click the button An open file dialog will be displayed The default location for the Land Cover Summary Database is C Program Files WRIA 1I_DSS DSS_Data Model Manager Databases LandCoverSummary mdb To save the selected database location click the __SaveChanges_ _ button Select Land Cover Scenario To select the scenario ID for the land cover summary to be used by the Water Quantity Model click the button to the right of Land Cover Scenario Selection The Select Land Cover Summary Scenario form will then be displayed WRIA 1I DSS User s Manual 1725 1726 1727 1728 1729 1730 1731 1732 1733 1734 1735 1736 1737 1738 1739 1740 1741 1742 1743 1744 69 Sele
20. 275 5917 Importing Flow Data 5918 To import Flow data click the Browse button next to the Source Meshpoints 5919 Filename to select the appropriate source shapefile This is the same shapefile used for 5920 the Source Meshpoints Filename when importing Habitat data When this is done the 5921 File list and Add Remove File buttons will be enabled The source mesh file is shown 5922 already selected in the screen below 5923 2D Mesh Data Importer Site Name Site 1 Habitat Information Source Meshpoints Filename Cell 4rea Fieldname c Habitat Fieldrname Kesh Filename Bed Value Fieldname Substrate veg Code Fieldname Substrate Weg Desc Fieldname Importing Habitat Done 0 Flow Information Source Meshpoints Filename H 420 DataQ5 20 Data New Datat Whatcom MeshsS ource Filet whatcom_mes Flow Source Filename New Flow Filename Importing Flow Done 04 File UO Species Information source Meshpoints Filename Importing Species Done UX File OU 5924 5925 5926 5927 Adding Flow Source Plotfiles 5928 To add the Flow Source Plotfiles click the Plus icon on the right of the File list The 5929 Select your Source Flow and Plotfile screen will appear as below Choose the Appendix B Importing 1D and 2D data from PHABWin_2002 5930 5931 5932 5933 5934 5935 5936 5937 5938 5939 5940 5941 276 appropriate flow
21. 2D Habitat viewer h Best Management Practices Tool LAs Edit Plug ins This will add the 2D Habitat Viewer button to the toolbar When the toolbar button 1s clicked the following form will appear In the figure below the different parts of the form are labeled for reference The subsequent sections describe each part of the viewer WRIA 1 DSS User s Manual 4818 4819 4820 4821 4822 4823 4824 4825 4826 4827 4828 4829 4830 4831 4832 4833 4834 4835 225 Bele Phabsim 2D Intensive Site Viewer Units US Customary Unit Selector Species Lifestage E F A Mien Fish Observation Overlay os C Metric Site Selector ewer sis Flow ft s T gt d Graph Window Scale in Feet Parts of the 2D Habitat Viewer Plug In Site Selector The Site Selector option allows the user to select which of the Intensive Sites to view To choose a site click on the arrow button on the right edge This will open a list of the sites available for viewing as shown below Intensive Site Mame 01 WihabtcomCreek O2 B ertrandCreek O3 FishtrapCreek Comput 94 7 entileCreek Flow ft 3s 05 SFNooksack_ Upper Physical wUA HE Map View O6 AndersonCreek_Upper O7 MF Nooksack 08 NFAooksack This option is only available for Viewer Tabs where individual site data is available Tabs containing data related to all sites will not allow this option Unit Selector The Units S
22. 4109 4110 4111 4112 4113 4114 4115 189 control line using the Add Remove Control Line button as discussed in Statistical Summary Data Sources Plot Options Plot Enhancements and Notes in section for Plot Options tab The Use Averaging Period option is available in the Multiple Time Series tool and is implemented in the manner discussed in the Plot Options tab section in the Time Series Analyst Options section above Options C Point C Line Both Add Remove Control Line Use Averaging Period a fe ie ie The Date Range fields at the bottom of the window can be used to modify the range of data shown in the plot as discussed in the Restricting Data Range section in the Time Series Analyst Options section above Parameter Summary Analysis The Parameter Summary Plots tool provides the user with plots of the number of observations for each parameter at each Water Quality station and the date distribution for each parameter at each station This tool is accessed by clicking on the Parameter Summary Plots toolbar buttonE The following figure shows the Number Distribution plot generated by the Parameter Summary Plots tool Time Series Data Analyst Plug in 190 4 Parameter Gages al S Q a Number Distribution Time Distribution 12203550 WHATCOM CREEK AT BELLINGHAM ae of irl i COLIFORM TOT MEMBRANE FILTER IMMED M ENDO MED 35C COLOR PLATINUM COBALT UNITS NITRATE NITROGEN
23. 4408 4409 4410 4411 4412 4413 4414 4415 4416 4417 4418 4419 4420 4421 204 Photos Available Photographs 3 Cornell Creek looking downstream form bit Bak View Comments Add Photo Photograph Attributes The attributes of the current photograph are shown on the Photo Viewer form Attributes include the date the photograph was taken the direction the camera was facing when taking the photograph and any brief notes accompanying the photograph Attributes of Current Photograph Notes Mone Date Oe 2002 Direction Downstream Copy Photograph to Clipboard Click on to copy the photograph that is currently in the photograph view window to the clipboard so it can be pasted into a report or other document for printing purposes For best results deselect uncheck M iew the entire photograph without scroll bars to view the photograph at its original resolution before copying to the clipboard The photo size will be the same when copied from the clipboard into a document whether the box is checked or not Add Location To add a new location to the Photo Viewer database click on in the Locations section of the Photo Viewer form The form shown below will appear WRIA 1 DSS User s Manual 4422 4423 4424 4425 4426 4427 4428 4429 4430 4431 4432 4433 4434 4435 4436 4437 4438 4439 4440 4441 4442 4443 4444 4445 4446 4447 4448 4449 4450 205 vet PhotoViewe
24. 6245 6246 6247 6248 6249 6250 6251 6252 6253 6254 6255 6256 6257 6258 6259 6260 6261 6262 6263 6264 293 The user is asked to open a comma delimited file with 7 columns Node ID Drainage ID MAF cfs Drainage Area sq m 10 exceedence flow cfs 90 exceedence flow cfs and Site Type The file should have 338 rows 337 nodes and a header Flow_Area_10and90exceedences csv file is provided with the program Figure 2 shows an example of the file Node Drainid MAF_cfs AreaTotal_sam LOXExceed_cfs 9O Exceed_cfs 5ite_Type 1 113 3664 8 2 116 09 6263 81894 1453 951 797 Drainage out let 2 113 2652 2 2 066409 6225 322422 1450 5375975 Intensive site 3 46 3645 9 2 046 09 6213 88047 1447 845185 Drainage outlet 4 46 3645 7 2 04E 09 6213 831029 144 7 832119 water withdrawal 5 46 3645 6 2 04E 09 6213 792183 1447 820465 Intensive site 6 46 3645 5 2 04E 09 6213 767463 1447 814462 water withdrawal 7 46 3645 4 2 04E 09 6213 753337 1447 810577 Streamflow Gage 8 46 3619 1 1 956 09 6179 861851 1441 978007 Drainage outlet 9 46 35609 9 1 93E 09 6167 981997 1439 540588 Drainage outlet 10 46 3609 9 1 93E 09 6167 918431 1439 538116 water withdrawal 11 46 3609 8 1 93E 09 6167 748921 1439 409571 water withdrawal 12 46 3597 6 1 90E 09 6142 774388 1435 555328 Drainage outlet 13 46 3531 1 1 79E 09 6032 444306 1419 086333 Drainage out let 14 46 3475 9 1 69E 09
25. C Program Files WRIA 1_DSS DSS_Data Model Manager Databases W QScenario xml Edit Scenario XML File To edit the Impervious and Agricultural Drainage values for the scenario XML file click the El button to the ri ght of EditScenarioXMLFie Jf Adjust Scenario Imperious Fraction is selected in the drop down menu the Impervious Areas form will be displayed If Adust Scenario Agricultural Drainage Values Zl is selected in the drop down menu the Agricultural Drainage form will be displayed Edit Scenario XML File Impervious Areas Values The Impervious Areas form allows the DSS user to edit the Impervious values for a WRIA 1 Drainage These values are then stored in the scenario XML file Impervious Areas Impervious Areas Drainage 120 Academy hi Imperious Fraction Low Intensity Residential High Intensity Residential Commercial lndustial Transportation 6300 Transitional 14400 Shrubland 46600 Orchardsvinevards Pasture Hay Row Crops Small Grains Fallow Urban Recreational Grasses Dairy Double click a row to edit the row s values To select a WRIA 1 Drainage click the drop down menu to the right of Pranas To edit an impervious fraction for a land cover type double click on the row in the land cover list The Edit Table Values form will then be displayed Water Quantity Model Interface 12 Edit Table Yalues Edit Impervious Area Drainage 120 Academy LULC Description Are
26. Cancel Help Export Maximize The tab titled Points allows the user to choose which data points to display as well as allows the user to choose how the point labels are oriented using automatic vertical horizontal or slanted options WRIA 1I DSS User s Manual 3991 3992 3993 3994 3995 3996 3997 3998 3999 4000 4001 4002 4003 4004 181 014050 NOOKSACK RIVER AT BRENNAN Customization General Plot Subsets Points Avie Font Color Style Points to Graph Point Label Orientation f Selected fe Suto C Vertical C Horizontal C Slanted OK Cancel Help Export Maximize The tab titled Axis allows the user to change to Y and X axes from linear to log scale This tab also allows the user to choose the range of data displayed on each axis Auto uses the default data range Min allows the user to input the desired minimum value to plot Max allows the user to input the desired maximum value to plot and Min Max allows the user to input both a minimum and maximum value to plot WWU95 DH 3 Drayton Harbor Customization General Plot Subsets AXIS Font Color Style e Auto l Min l Mas C Minhas ABS Linear C Log Min mea OK Cancel Help Export Maximize The tab titled Font allows the user to select a font type for the main title sub title and subset point axis labels This tab also allows the user to bold italic and or underl
27. From file Add To view i Drainage ID Field ESNWBIATA Drainage Hame Field DRAIN_NAME To select a shapefile loaded in MapWindow s view click the Fram leadedlaes radio button then select the name of the shapefile layer in the layer list To select a shapefile from the DSS base data click the FemBas Data radio button then click the l button A base data form will be displayed with Drainages shown Click the button To select a shapefile from file click the radio button then click the button An open file dialog will be displayed Browse to a polygon shapefile and click open To select the shapefile field to be used for the id choose a field listed in the dropdown list to the right of Panas l Feld To select the shapefile field to be used for the name shoose a field listed in the dropdown list to the right of 99 Name Field To save the polygon shapefile that has been selected click the button To Cancel discard the polygon shapefile that has been selected click the button WRIA Wide Water Quality Model Interface 2490 2491 2492 2493 2494 2495 2496 2497 2498 2499 2500 2501 2502 2503 2504 2505 2506 2507 2508 2509 2510 2511 2512 2513 2514 2515 2516 2517 2518 2519 2520 2521 108 Select Drainage To select a drainage contained in the Watershed Layer choose a drainage in the drop down list to the right of Panase in the Best Management Practices Too
28. It is tied to the tblMediaTypes table for values Media_Filename The location filename of the PDF that you are working on relative to the database 1 e if the database is located in c 2D Data database mdb and the PDF that you are working on is located in c 2D Data StationFolder NameWiscellaneous PDF pdffilename pdf then the entry StationFolderName Miscellaneous PDF pdffilename pdf Comments Put any comments about the PDF document you are working on that you want a user to know here This value WRIA 1I DSS User s Manual 5813 5814 5815 5816 5817 5818 5819 5820 5821 5822 5823 5824 5825 5826 5827 5828 5829 5830 5831 5832 5833 5834 5835 5836 5837 5838 5839 5840 5841 5842 5843 5844 5845 5846 5847 5848 5849 5850 5851 5852 5853 5854 5855 271 will be displayed when this PDF document is being viewed If this field is left blank then the value None will be displayed instead Photos e Copy the Photographs into the Photos folder in the Miscellaneous folder see folder structure above e Input the Photographs information into the database Make an entry for each Photograph in the tbIMediaFiles table The data to be entered for the database fields are Station ID The value from the Station_ID field in tbIStations that corresponds with the station that you are currently working with MediaType_ID Select the value Photograph from the drop down combo box in that field
29. Nodes shapefile press Temperature and Dissolved Oxygen Flags Model Interface 3398 3399 3400 3401 3402 3403 3404 3405 3406 3407 3408 3409 3410 3411 3412 3413 3414 3415 3416 152 The user must specify which field in the selected Model Nodes shapefile is to be used using the Node ID FieldName box as shown below HodelD FieldName e STATION STATION_NA UTH UTH SITE_TPE If more than one Field Name exists in the selected Model Nodes shapefile it can be selected from the list by pressing the down arrow lto the right of the Node ID Field Name box as shown above Select Nodes To select the Nodes to be modeled in the Temperature and DO Flags Model press the velect Nodes button as shown below Select Nodes Selected Nodes Default All Nodes Note that if this button is not pushed the model will use the default of all nodes Pressing the __ SelectNodes button brings up the following form WRIA 1 DSS User s Manual 3417 3418 3419 3420 3421 3422 3423 3424 3425 3426 3427 3428 3429 3430 3431 3432 3433 3434 3435 3436 3437 3438 3439 3440 153 Select the Nodes to Model Available Modes Selected Nodes Node 18 Remove All Select Modes From Map UE Cancel The nodes labeled using Node correspond to the water quantity nodes one node for each drainage and have the same numbering Nodes labeled as Mixing Nodes are nodes
30. The first left most column displays the names of the species and lifestages This example shows Spring Chinook and its six lifestages The second column shows the distribution data for each species and lifestage There are three distributions Current Know Current Presumed and Presumed Historic Potential The third and right most column displays the bi monthly periodicity data for each species and lifestage Notice that there are two boxes beneath each month The first box represents the first half of that month and the second is the second half A key for the periodicity data is shown near the right hand corner of the Periodicity Viewer Editor form as shown below WRIA 1 DSS User s Manual 2845 2846 2847 2848 2849 2850 2851 2852 2853 2854 2855 2856 2857 2858 2859 2860 2861 2862 2863 2864 2865 2866 2867 2868 2869 2870 2871 123 Penodicity Rey Present Absent Peak Green represents Present white represents Absent and Red represents Peak Periodicity data is given for 43 species and lifestages To view the data use the scroll bar located along the right side of the Periodicity Viewer Editor form Editing Distribution Data To edit the Distribution Data for a given species and lifestage at the selected Node double click on the box representing the desired lifestage and distribution This will bring up the Change Fish Distribution form as shown below The example below shows the form for Coho S
31. This saves the BMP s displayed in the BMP list for the Water Quality Model in the current scenario layout Edit Best Management Practices To edit the BMP selected in the BMP list click the vA button The Edit BMP Values form will then be shown for the BMP selected in the BMP list FE Edit BMP Yalues O x Watershed Layer bsnwrial_v shp Drainage dustin B eavel Best Management Practice Riparian Buffer BMP Parameters BMP Parameters Land Cover Types Affected BMP Application Parameter Total Nitrogen MH3 NH4 A NO2 NO3 N Total Phosphorus BOD Fecal Coliform Bacteria Information regarding the default list of BMPs and their associated load reductions can be found in the technical documentation for the surface water quality models Reset Values BMP Parameters To change a value for the BMP click on the ltab To change a particular value for the BMP enter a number between 0 and 100 into the text box to the right of the value you wish to edit To change whether a land cover type is affected by the BMP click on the Land Cover Types Affected tab To change whether a particular land cover type is affected by the BMP check or uncheck the tI box to the left of the land cover type WRIA Wide Water Quality Model Interface 2543 2544 2545 2546 2547 2548 2549 2550 2551 2552 2599 2554 25393 2556 2557 2558 2559 2560 2561 2562 2563 2564 2565 2566 2567 2568 1
32. bletric Physical WUA HSC Fish Distribution Miscellaneous Data Map View Computational Cell Surface Area ft 2 an Flow t 3s Species Litestage l ca i Wiew Background Image Wiew Fish Observation Overlay 0 1292 0 1507 0 1722 0 1938 0 2153 0 2368 0 2583 m 0 2563 0 2799 0 2799 0 3014 0 3014 0 3229 150 r5 225 Scale in Feet 4858 4859 4860 By selecting the pan button Ez the user may pan around the image displayed in the 4861 graph window The user may also zoom in al and zoom out E or zoom to the full 4862 extent of the image 4863 4864 Using the Map View selector the user may choose what information is displayed in the 4865 Graph Window 4866 Computational Cell Surface Area fr Computational Cell Surface Area ft Habitat Types Substrate vegetation Bed Protile 7 Yalue ft Water Surface Elevation Ft Depth ft Melocity gt Magnitude fts 4867 Depth Suitability Index gt l 4868 4869 The units for each option are displayed in parenthesis after the option name Once the 4870 map view option is selected the graph window will be updated to display that 4871 information A legend is displayed on the left side of the graph window 2D Habitat Viewer Plug in 4872 4873 4874 4875 4876 4877 4878 4879 4880 4881 4882 4883 4884 4885 4886 4887 4888 4889 4890 4891 4892 4893 4894 4895 228 The user ma
33. where two or more drainages meet and have a combined node Again the default is to model all the nodes Since by default all the nodes are selected they are listed in numerical order on the right hand side of the form in the Selected Nodes window To remove a node from the Selected Nodes window click on the node number with the mouse to highlight that node then press the remove button lt This will remove the selected node from the Selected Nodes window This node will now be available and will be listed in the Available Nodes window on the left hand side of the form To remove all the nodes in the Selected Nodes window press the Remove Al button This will remove all the nodes from the Selected Nodes window and they will be displayed in the Available Nodes window To select a node from the Available Nodes click on the node number with the mouse to highlight that node then press the add button gt to move the selected node to the Selected Node window Multiple nodes can be selected for addition or removal by holding down the Ctrl key while using the mouse to select the desired nodes Temperature and Dissolved Oxygen Flags Model Interface 3441 3442 3443 3444 3445 3446 3447 3448 3449 3450 3451 3452 3453 3454 3455 3456 3457 3458 3459 3460 3461 3462 154 The user may also select specific nodes from the map by pressing the select Nodes From Mar button This will minimize all other windows
34. 0 45 73 50 O 40 73 90 O 48 74 50 O lt f5 74 90 0 55 75 50 0 75 S 10000 75 90 0 55 76 50 0 75 76 90 0 553 77 90 0 50 78 50 0 25 78 90 0 00 S 10 00 99 90 O 00100 00 0 00 Figure 9 First few records of the Master_WRIAHSC txt Next the user is asked to open a text file txt containing habitat values Figure 3 Master_WRIA1HSC txt is provided with the program If the user chooses to predict habitat at a number of nodes the program will ask for a comma delimited csv file containing a list of nodes later in the run Figure 5 The file provided with the program Nodes csv contains a list of 253 nodes To avoid selecting nodes with MAF higher than 130 cfs any subset of the target nodes should be chosen from this file If however there are some nodes in the file the user opens with MAF Appendix C Extrapolation Program User Manual 6265 6266 6267 6268 6269 6270 6271 6272 6273 6274 6275 6276 6277 6278 6279 6280 6281 6282 6283 6284 6285 6286 6287 6288 6289 6290 6291 6292 6293 6294 294 higher than 130 cfs the user will get a message with an option to either skip the nodes with high MAF or quit the program Figure 6 The user is given a choice to output predicted habitat values into individual comma delimited file s or the tb WUA_MethodC table in the database used as an input in the Habitat Time Series Model within DSS Figure 4 Detailed description of the table and the database in given in the Technica
35. 1341 1411 m 1451 The Thalweg is the brown line and the Stage at Zero Flow szf is the magenta line as shown in the example above and indicated in the Legend at the top of the plot The Observed data are the blue lines There is a line for each of the Calibration data sets collected To view the Observed Data the checkbox marked View Observed Data must be checked To view the Predicted Data the checkbox marked View Predicted Data must be checked If the Predicted Data is checked then to have the line drawn for a certain Predicted Flow the checkbox for it must be checked To turn off the line simply uncheck the checkbox in the Discharge Selector window The default is for all of the checkboxes both in the Data to View section and for each of the Predicted Flows to be checked This means that a line for each of the Predicted Flows and all of the Observed 1D Habitat Viewer Plug in 4665 4666 4667 4668 4669 4670 4671 4672 4673 4674 4675 4676 4677 4678 4679 4680 4681 4682 4683 4684 4685 4686 4687 218 Data will be drawn The plot is automatically updated when a checkbox is checked or unchecked Note that since this is a Longitudinal Profile it is done across all of the cross sections so the Cross Section selector option is not available HSC The HSC tab displays the Habitat Suitability Criteria used to model each species and lifestage The Plot Type selector allows the user to sele
36. 15 Aun Date 1112 2007 6 39 48 PM Username Test User Start Date 17171950 End Date q273171999 bl apwiindow Wersior 3 1 1879 37030 DSS Version 1 0 2267 22250 05 Name amp Version Microsoft Windows lt P Professional 5 1 2600 Sistem AAM 1023 MB System Speed IntelA Pentiumn A 4 CPU 3 40GHz System Other Computer ame NOOKTEST SystemT ypessG6 based PL Scenario Run Log HHHHHHHHHHHHH Running Scenario New Scenario HAHHHHHHHHHHH Author Last Modified 17 12 2007 6 39 47 PM Motes Description kd Export to File Close 979 980 981 Exporting Scenario Run Lo 982 983 The scenario run log may be exported which is useful for archiving scenario results 984 Exporting the log is done by clicking the Export to File button in the scenario log 985 viewer above A Save As dialog box will appear as shown below allowing the user to 986 select the output location and provide a file name for the log 987 WRIA 1I DSS User s Manual 988 989 990 991 992 993 994 995 996 997 998 999 1000 1001 1002 1003 1004 1005 1006 1007 1008 1009 1010 1011 1012 1013 1014 1015 1016 1017 35 My Recent Documents Desktop Mu Network File name z Places Save as type Text File txt r Cancel The output file will be textual ASCII text and will contain exactly what the scenario log viewer shows Importing and Exporting Scenarios Entire scenarios can be imported
37. 167 Oyster Cree E 166 Wanlick E 165 Edfro ay 164 Heart Lake E 163 Anderson E 162 Saxon E 161 Fragrance E 159 Lower Sko E 157 Portage Isli Bell South Bay g Pra ara mE B 1821 1822 1823 The Water Management form allows the DSS user to manage water users for the WRIA 1824 1 DSS The water users are grouped by drainage in the list on the left side of the Water 1825 Management form To view the water users located with a WRIA 1 Drainage click on 1826 the icon to expand the drainage folder in the list 1827 gt Water Management File Edit Help Users a M Edit View Data E 0 No Drainage User ID 285 A 180 Deer Roari E User Name User285 F User406 S 179 Blanchard User Type 5 Non PWS Municipal and Ind 7 178 Whitehall al 177 Colony Location of Use Drainage Deer Roaring amp Plumbago 3 176 Upper Sout S 175 Upper Sout In Year Demand Type MonthiyD emand1 Edit E 174 Eliza Island ql 173 Larrabee Demand Variable fo yl 172 Howard 4 171 Cavanaugt Demand Rate 0 3785 E 170 Brannian E 169 Fir Return Flow RetumFlow Edit E 168 Dye EA 167 Oyster Cree Number of Sources i 166 Wanlick 165 Edfro A 164 Heart Lake Source244 None E 163 Anderson E 162 Saxon amp 161 Fragrance E 159 Lower Skot Edit Source Edit Right South Bay gt Edit User Sources and Rights
38. 205 206 207 208 209 210 211 212 213 214 215 216 217 218 Viewing Photographs via the Photo Viewer Toolbar Button sseeeseeeeeessssessss 202 PROON EET OO e a A een E E ET E EEE 202 Photograph View W 10 OW wirsscencneas cnx ccsamincncausaes cstasanodeat salen ssnupvaneqtsees osuasencdestsaleusiaues 202 Location CC OM essere E E EE EE E 203 PaO erpa Sele E A eee 203 Phororo A O S ara E EE S E E 204 Copy Photograph to Clipboard eneessseoeennssssssseeeresssssssscerrsssssssseeersssssssseerrssssss 204 AEO CIO E E E E 204 POG T OO e E E E E E E E 205 VIWE 0 MAS I e E E E EEE E E EE 206 ID Habitat Viewer Phi iiis S 208 Parts of the 1D Habitat Viewer PIUS Ifi eecnurcnnneniirannnnnrana 210 CADA N LON eneee E T E E E E 210 Pont DUOT enoe E E E E R A E AEA E E A EE EEES 210 PoC BONON aa EEE 210 Database Connechon BOO tyssnes heute ssssanncedenpidasussawene lense sissawncedbondaswssawseneeusesises 211 Habitat STACI MSC OR si sa sere ronshoeasegerate nena nveete sm suneteadbopaseqammba EAE 212 Result Data SCL SCLC Cl OM eere O 213 OSS BC CIO IM SOIC COE ceases E E E E T AE 213 omer alors aN kc eee nent Corre ner etary ee errr eres rene anne erste TT Ornette rent Seer reeset eer 213 PHabSim 1D Data Visualization Tool Graphs 20 0 0 ceeecceecccecceeeeeeesseeeeeeeeeeeaaeeeees 214 PANY SUC OU as accantce cs aasutiateay E E E sesaulnosd E E S 214 DE SC NM aor ert ee eters net erste ates E E 215 Lonac nat rO ee E 217 y Ee A ee
39. 3042 3043 3044 3045 3046 3047 3048 3049 3050 3051 3052 133 Database Configuration Please select the Daily Flow Database for the Habitat Time Series Model Microsoft SQL Server Use SOL Server to find the database Database Name Water Wanitity S team lows Server Address local Server User I0 Use Trusted Server Password W Connection Microsott Access f Use Access to find the database Please specify the full path to the mdb file containing the database Database Fath Test Connection Save Changes The user has the option of selecting a Microsoft SQL Server database by selecting the Use SQL Server to find the database option The user must then enter the database information in the following boxes Micrasatt SQL Server f Use SOL Server to find the database tabase Name Server Address local Server User ID i Use Trusted Server Password Connection To use a Microsoft Access database as the input Daily Flow Database the user can select the Use Access to find the database option Micrasolt Access f Use Access to find the database Please specify the full path to the mdb file containing the database Database Path C Program Files WWAIG 1 DSS4055 Data Model The user must then enter the complete pathname in the box to the right of Database Path or use the browse button we to navigate to the desired database Habitat Time Series M
40. 4493 4494 4495 4496 4497 4498 4499 4500 4501 4502 4503 4504 4505 4506 4507 4508 4509 208 1D Habitat Viewer Plug in The 1D Habitat Viewer plug in allows you to view and query information on the effects to fish habitat of different stream flow regimes It supports both PHABSIM 1D modeling and Rapid Assessment modeling output This plug in is launched by clicking on the Phabsim 1 D Visualization button on the toolbar Eb If this button is not available on the toolbar click on the Plug ins menu on the menu bar and select 1D Habitat Viewer from the list as shown below File Edit D55 Plug ins Time Series Reports Help O E Watershed Characterization Report eegend eererereree Well Log Data Viewer J Sampling Dat Land Cover Summarizer Water Guar Grid Wizard j Z a ii J Scenario Builder D55 Well Graphs Table Editor Well Report Feature Identifier Shapefile Labeler Vater Right O CO Photos Weather Stz Lake Whatcom Water Quality Model Macroinvertebrate Data viewer Streamflow Habitat Time Series Model Temperaturi Time Series Data Analyst v Water Qual Change Land Cover Fl Political Feature Water Quantity Model County Bou A Major Road et State Shapefile Editor AC Roads Photo viewer Municipal Be 10 Habitat Viewer Airports 2D Habitat viewer WRIG Wide Water Quality Model wf Drainage f Best Management Practices Tool C Comprehen E a Edit Plug ins This will add the 1
41. 5 1 0 1 5 2 0 Flow cms m Chinook Spaw n Stream Chinook Fry e Chinook Holding Chinook Juvenile 2 5 3 0 a WUA curves calculated using habitat model Bertrand Creek Chinook Salmon Predicted Percent of Maximum Habitat 0 0 0 5 1 0 1 5 2 0 2 5 Flow cms m Chinook Spaw n Stream Chinook Fry e Chinook Holding Chinook Juvenile 3 0 b WUA curves predicted using velocity and depth frequency distribution equations frequency based approach Appendix C Extrapolation Program User Manual 6391 6392 6393 6394 6395 6396 6397 6398 6399 6400 6401 6402 6403 6404 6405 6406 6407 6408 6409 6410 6411 6412 6413 6414 6415 6416 6417 6418 6419 6420 6421 6422 6423 6424 6425 6426 6427 6428 6429 6430 6431 6432 6433 6434 6435 6436 300 Figure C1l 1 Comparison of habitat vs discharge relationships for chinook salmon Bertrand Creek These results show that when substrate and or cover represent an important component of habitat availability greater caution and expert judgment should be exercised when interpreting the frequency derived estimates of available habitat Figure C1 3 shows the RMSEs calculated by comparison of the two dimensional habitat model and frequency based results for all small study sites for spawning fry juvenile and adult life stages of selected fish species Spawning and adult habitat relation
42. 5733 5734 5735 5736 5737 5738 5739 5740 5741 5742 5743 5744 5745 5746 5747 5748 5749 5750 5751 5752 5753 5754 5755 5756 5757 5758 5759 5760 5761 5762 5763 5764 5765 5766 5767 5768 269 Fish Observation Overlays e Copy each of the Fish Observation Overlay shapefiles into the FishObs Overlays folder see folder structure above e Input the Fish Observation Overlay layers information into the database Make an entry for each Fish Observation Overlay layer in the tblFishObsFiles table The data to be entered for the database fields are Station_ID The value from the Station_ID field in tblStations that corresponds with the station that you are currently working with FishObs_Filename The location filename of the Fish Observation Overlay layer that you are working on relative to the database i e if the database is located in c 2D Data database mdb and the Fish Observation Overlay layer that you are working on is located in c 2D Data StationFolderName FishObs Overlays overlayfilename shp then the entry StationFolderName FishObsOverlays overlayfilename shp Miscellaneous data For each of the following Miscellaneous Data Types that you have fill in the data Aerial View Copy the Aerial View image s into the Aerial View folder in the Miscellaneous folder see folder structure above Input the Aerial View information into the database Make an entry for each Aerial View Image in the t
43. 59024 678069 1409 137132 Drainage out let 15 46 3475 7 1 69E 09 5924 46265 1409 103583 Mi xingNode Figure 8 Example of the input file Exported Fish Curyes H Loooo 8 9 GZ Q Chinook Spawn Stream wo DToo00 0 00 0 00 0 50 0 00 1 00 0 90 1 75 1 00 2 25 1 00 4 00 QgO 00 Yo Too0oo0 4 00 0 00 100 00 O 00 D 1Too0dOo O lt 00 O 00 50 OO AG Ge sb ESOU ae Gee ee Geri D Too0o 4 50 0 07 45 00 0 00 100 00 O 00 S 10000 0 00 0 00 G0 170 1 00 4 20 1 00 0 30 1 00 0 40 1 00 0 50 1 00 5s 10000 0 50 O lt 00 GO 70 O lt 00 75 O lt 00 O 80 O 00 0 65 O 00 0 90 O 00 5s Loo0do 11 90 O 00 31 70 O lt 00 31 80 O 24 31 90 27 32 50 O 00 32 70 0 00 S 10000 327 80 O 274 32 90 O 2f 33 90 0 30 34 50 0 65 34 90 0 37 35 50 0 65 S 10000 35 90 O 3 36 50 0 65 36 90 37 37 50 O lt 40 37 90 0 32 38 50 0 00 5S 1 00 41 70 0 00 41 80 0 80 41 90 O 90 42 50 O 00 42 70 O 00 42 40 0 80 Ss 10000 42 90 0 90 43 50 0 65 43 90 0 95 44 90 1 00 46 90 1 00 47 50 0 75 S 10000 47 90 0 95 48 50 0 00 51 70 O lt 00 51 80 O lt 80 51 90 0 90 52 50 0 00 S 10000 52 70 0 00 52 80 0 80 52 90 0 90 53 50 0 65 53 90 0 93 54 50 1 00 5S 20000 56 90 1 00 57 50 0 75 57 90 0 95 58 50 O 00 61 70 O 00 61 40 0 80 Se TOGU 61 90 0 90 62 50 O 00 62 70 O 00 62 860 O 80 62 90 0 90 65 50 0 65 S 10000 63 90 0 93 64 50 1 00 66 90 1 00 67 50 0 75 67 90 0 95 68 50 0 00 S 10 000 71 70 O lt 00 71 80 O lt 40 71 90 O 445 72 50 O lt 00 72 70 O 00 72 860 0 40 5 10 00 72 90
44. 7 5C Also 25 5 of the observations did not meet the criteria were below 7 5C Evaluate Criteria akela Primary Criterion F5 Hof observations meeting the Criteria C secondary Criterion NONE O H of observations not meeting the Criteria MB Critenon Type Abowe of observations not meeting the Criteria BG Data Selection Date Range i Include Month Range arameter TEMPERATURE WATEA DEGREES CENTIGRAl Shark E 979 Januay Station 12203550 WHATCOM CREEK AT BELLINGHAM 12203550 WHATCOM CREEK AT BELLINGHAM End 977 December wo Station Grouping The Station Grouping option is activated by clicking on the Station Grouping toolbar E oo button Z This option allows the user to group data from multiple water quality stations for analysis This is particularly useful when two or more water quality stations are located in the same vicinity The data collected at these stations can be combined for the purposes of generating plots and statistical analyses An example would be creating plots and summaries for all data within a subwatershed or on a particular stream reach All stations within the subwatershed or on the stream reach can be grouped so that plots and summaries generated would represent all available data within that watershed or stream reach Clicking on the Station Grouping toolbar button activates the Station Grouping option and adds an additional tab called Station Grouping to the Options window on
45. A A A 218 PANG AG EE EE E E E E E E E E E A 219 Rea i NUN e E A E seer waousanosnaeievases 220 PEE CO T O E E E I ERN 221 MVS At OS Compari Olssen A E EE eiesaaies 222 Sa O EIO E E E E T E AE E E 222 2D Habitat y iewer PING HUN oiscscicecavericssoascevcsiesnectarnsavicsberechousasunusiesneatoveusaviesbosachausatiniss 224 Parts of the 2D Habitat Viewer Plug In ccc cccccccsssssseeecceeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeees 225 S CON ia caeaectte E E E E 225 NSAI CCCI ON see caecrss cineca wed E E E E 225 VC WCE A 8 cpr E E A E E E E E EA 226 CPA VINON en E E T EEE S 226 20 Data Viewer Graph VAS sed sssreseccstetosecessaadancecatoveatesetcotocena lt ansaetan sara gsoreanaseccstoduroses 226 PP SC ire eee nase arate sash aie eee nessa sae eae soos eat causes ane eae seuss sel anaes enssoes 226 Va aires E acess sae A 230 IFS Co E AT E A AEA ET 231 PORDE Ct DUON corn EE 232 Mi OC ANIC OLS Dalta denedesessauneaaMetpaniseuuncedemiemueeauseoatnpeeises 234 WRIA 1I DSS User s Manual 219 220 221 222 223 224 225 226 ZZ 228 229 230 231 292 233 234 235 236 237 238 239 240 241 242 243 244 245 246 247 248 249 250 251 252 253 254 255 256 257 258 259 260 261 202 263 Macroinvertebrate Data Viewer sssssssssessssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssss 236 Viewing Macroinvertebrate Data cccccccccccnnsnsseseesessseseecececeeeeeeeeeesaeaeeeaeeeeeeeeees 236 Macroinvertebrate Data Viewing Options
46. Calculations are finished WRIA 1I DSS User s Manual 6328 6329 6330 6331 6332 6333 w Western Part of the Watershed Enter the node number Met gt Cancel Figure 15 Maps of the node locations w Min and Max Flows Would you like to use 90 and 10 Exceedance flows as the Min and Max flows for computing habitat Enter Min ang Mee flows Min G cts Max CI cfs men Appendix C Extrapolation Program User Manual 6334 6335 6336 6337 6338 6339 6340 6341 6342 6343 6344 6345 6346 6347 6348 6349 6350 6351 6352 6353 6354 6355 6356 6357 6358 6359 6360 6361 6362 6363 6364 6365 6366 6367 6368 6369 6370 6371 6372 6373 6374 6375 6376 298 Figure 16 Entering min and max flows for the habitat calculation Appendix C 1 Limitations of the Approach The relationships between available habitat and discharge using the frequency based approach were compared to the WUA curves calculated using the two dimensional habitat model Results indicated that in most cases the two sets of habitat availability curves were very similar in shape Figure C1 1 but differences were noted depending on the specific life stage being compared and attributed to the fundamental differences between frequency based approach versus using the two dimensional habitat model that incorporated substrate and cover for fry and juvenile life stages Available habitat for fry and ju
47. Cover Types form will be displayed as shown below The user can then select new land cover types for the old land cover types by clicking on the desired row in the land cover list and selecting the new land cover type desired ESOU Open Water Open Water Perennial lce Snow Perennial lce Snow Low Intensity Residential 21 Low Intensity Residential High Intensity Residential 22 High Intensity Residential Commercial Industrial Tran 23 Commercial Industrial T ransp Bare Rock Sand Clay 31 Bare Rock Sand Clay 32 Quarries Strip Mines Grave 32 0 5 z Transitional 11 Open Water Deciduous Forest ii 12 Perennial Ice Snow Evergreen Forest gt i Low Intensity Residential Mixed Forest i High Intensity Residential Shrubland Commercial Industrial Transportation Bare Rock Sand Clay Right click or Double click on a Land Cover ri Quarries Strip Mines Gravel Pits choose the new Land Cover type for the polyc Transitional View Only Land Cover Deciduous Forest Inside Polygon Evergreen Forest Mixed Forest Shrubland Orchards Vineyards Grasslands Herbaceous Pasture Hay Row Crops Small Grains Fallow Urban Recreational Grasses Dairy Woody Wetlands Emergent Herbaceous Wetlands m When the new land cover types have been selected the user clicks the button and is returned to the Change Land Cover form which lists all of the polygons added to th
48. Data Selection Parameter TEMPERATURE WATER DEGREES CENTIGRAL 12203550 WHATCOM CREEK AT BELLINGHAM Include Month Range Start 1972 January End 1977 December Edit Criteria Close For any given parameter at any station a user may find the number of observations that meet and do not meet specified criteria In addition the percentage of observations that do not meet the criteria is also supplied Station Select a station or group if Station Group is activated from the Station pull down box and the parameter of interest from the Parameter pull down box The user may restrict the data range by changing the dates in the Date Range pull down boxes Select _ EdtCrtsis on the Evaluate Criteria form to set the criteria for evaluation of the specified parameter A blank Criteria List window will appear Criteria List DER ParameterCode Parameter Name Primary Criteria Secondary Criteria Evaluation Type Click on Add to access the Add Edit Criteria form Time Series Data Analyst Plug in 4229 4230 4231 4232 4233 4234 4235 4236 4237 196 Add Edit Criteria DoR Parameter TEMPERATURE WATER DEGREES CENTIGRAl Input Data Primary Criterion 7 5 Secondary Critenorr Criterion Type Parameter pull down box will be populated by the selection made in the initial Evaluate Criteria window Enter Primary Criterion and Secondary Criterion optional inthe appropri
49. E E 40 x x A j e e ee j A 60 A 60 aa 80 0 0 0 3 0 5 0 9 1 8 3 3 6 1 11 0 Q Qmaf o Chinook Spawning a Fall Chum Spawning x Coho Spawning x Pink Spawning e Sockeye Spawning Rainbow Spawning Steelhead Spawning Cutthroat Spawning Native Char Spawning a Kokanee Spawning a Prediction errors for the Spawning life stage of the select fish species 80 Modeled Predicted 80 0 9 1 8 Q Qmaf o Chinook Fry a Coho Fry x Steelhead Fry 3 3 6 1 11 0 b Prediction errors for the Fry life stage of the select fish species Figure C1 5 Prediction errors between habitat vs discharge relationships derived using the habitat model and calculated using the frequency based approach cont Appendix C Extrapolation Program User Manual 6536 6537 6538 6539 6540 6541 6542 6543 6544 308 80 A 60 A A A m 4 Ag L 40 Oo X A X a 2 20 i x ot a o g yo ee ALEEX 3 0 s a arig a y i eee a Mo foo ob ope eA ee nu eh amp She es PE p Dey MN Ay ne MEE ESS xa OF F oy ES BEAT EP Ey EU ar ag aa D OAT a X RAR a p r uF i ax a x 3 R at AER me exo x x amp oy Fa X x A AA xX xX xX Ae e a y x A X 40 g eg e Fa A i A o x x Xx o 60 a o j 80 2 l l l l l l 0 0 0 3 0 5 0 9 1 8 3 3 6 1 11 0 Q Qmaf a Chinook Juvenile a Coho Juvenile x Rainbow Juvenile x Steelhead Juvenil
50. Habitat TimeSernes Database C Program Files WRl4 1 0554055 Data TempOO0D ata emperature OO mdb Temperature Flags and Warnings 5 hk LoFrogran Filesi H hA 1 0554055 Data GlS Data Shapetiles T emp OO Nodes Temp _Flags_Warmings sh i DO Flags and arnings Shapeti C Program Files AlA 1 D5S54055 Data GlS DataShapetiles Temp DO Nodes 00 Flags Warnings shp Select Output Temperature and DO Database The Output Temperature and DO Database named Temperature_DO mdb is the database where the output data for the selected nodes will be written Use the browse button to the right of the database name to navigate to this database This will bring up the Database Configuration form Temperature and Dissolved Oxygen Flags Model Interface 3483 3484 3485 3486 3487 3488 3489 3490 349 3492 3493 3494 3495 3496 3497 3498 3499 3500 3501 3502 3503 3504 3505 3506 3507 3508 3509 156 Database Configuration Please select the Output Database for the Habitat Time Seres Model Microsott Access f Use Access to find the database Please specify the full path to the mdb file containing the database Database Path C Program Files 4V AlS 1_ DSSSMSDEDATSBASE SST e Test Connection Save Changes This database is used for all the Temperature DO Flags model runs This database is an Access database and the same database or one with identical formatting must be used When t
51. ID Field Database Penodicity Database z Build Connection Test Connection OF Cancel Connection String Before the Periodicity Viewer Editor will run properly the shapefile and database connections must be made Selecting the Model Output Nodes Point Shapefile Fist the path for the model output nodes point shapefile must be selected This is done using the Shapefile section of the Data Connection form as shown below Shapetile Path for the Model Output Nodes Point Shapetile CAProgram Files WRIA 1_OSSS055_DatasGiS_Data Shapetiles ga Node ID Field Node_ID The default location for this shapefile is C Program Files WRIA 1_DSS DSS_Data GIS_Data Shapefiles ModelNodes Periodicity Nodes shp If this data was not installed in the default location or you would like to use a different shapefile click on the browse button to the right of the shapefile box The following form will appear allowing the user to select the data layer from the loaded layers or from file Periodicity Viewer Editor Plug In 2728 2129 2730 2731 2132 2133 2734 2135 2736 2137 2738 2739 2740 2741 2742 2743 2744 2745 2746 118 E Select PhabSim 2D Intensive x Select Data Laver From loaded layers Weather Stations Photos Water Rights POW Well Report Documents Well Graphs 2D Habitat Sites 1D Habitat Sites Water Quantity Control Nodes Penodicity odes C From f
52. ILE OFF ARCO ILE OFF MOBIL DY POINT MOBIL OIL COMPANY DOCK CH BAY INE MAN S BAY INTALCO DOCK ATI AMTICO AICHPIF D CA DOCE Station ID Station Mame me Remove Cancel The Station Grouping tab now shows the newly created group and the stations that have been added to it Stations can easily be removed from a group by selecting them in the Station Grouping tab and clicking on the Remove button emoe at the bottom of the Station Grouping tab Stations can be added or removed from any existing station group by simply using the Add Station and Remove Station buttons at the bottom of the Station Grouping tab Station groups may be deleted by selecting the group name in the Station Grouping tab and clicking on the me button With the Station Grouping enabled the user may now perform any of the analyses already discussed for single stations Clicking on the Station Grouping toolbar button again will disable the Station Grouping option and switch the Time Series Analyst back to single station mode The Undo Zoom button w can be used with any of the graphing options to return the plot window to the full extent Time Series Data Analyst Plug in 200 4311 4312 Photo Viewer Plug in 4313 4314 The Photo Viewer Plug in to the DSS allows users to view digital photographs taken at 4315 locations throughout the watershed A database of digital photographs and their 4316 descriptions 1 e location date photo descr
53. Loca _ Temperature Probes _ Water Quality Sampling Sit OM Political Features F County Boundaries EC Major Roads mO State Physical Stage Breckenridge Creek Data to Viey Canyon Lake Creek M View Ob Chuckanut Creek Coal Creek Blue L Deer Creek AC Roads N N o N Discharge cfs Municipal Boundaries g 0 o Hendrick Creek Kenny Creek U Airports 7 Drainages AC Comprehensive Plan Zonin GA Water Features Water Bodies 0 Culverts _ Beaches and Lakes Y Streams mm es GGG Observed Data 2 Cress Section Geometry 8 amp th Channel Index a 8 amp k 8 O p uogeaag EEHEEHE EEEEEEDE 552389 221m Y 5426825 639m lin 4 206 mi Result Data Set Selector The data set selector is used to select specific data sets at each habitat station Often there is only one data set for each station However 1f more than one data set is available at the station they will all appear in the data set selector Cross Section Selector The cross section selector is used to select specific cross sections that are part of a data set at a particular habitat station Cross section data are collected at one or more cross sections at the habitat station Available cross sections can be selected using this selector The physical cross section geometry for the selected cross section is shown on the first graph tab titled Physical Each of the graph t
54. OOOO cls Minimum Enviroment Release OO cls Loss Rate OO cls OF Cancel To edit the reservoir name edit the text in the text box to the right of esevorNeme To edit the drainage select a WRIA 1 Drainage from the drop down list to the right of P ainage To edit the reservoir type select a type from the drop down menu to the right of Reservar Tee To edit the water right select a right from the drop down menu to the right of Water Fight To edit the maximum storage edit the text in the text box to the right of Maximum storage To edit the initial storage edit the text in the text box to the right of intial Storage To edit the minimum storage edit the text in the text box to the right of Minimum storage To edit the maximum in flow edit the text in the text box to the right of MaamuminFlow To edit the maximum withdrawal edit the text in the text box to the right of Maximum Withdrawal TO edit the minimum environment release edit the text in the text box to the right of Minimum Enviroment Release To edit the loss rate edit the text in the text box to the right of Loss Rate To use the changed reservoir values click the button To discard the changed Cancel reservoir values click the button WRIA 1 DSS User s Manual 1924 1925 1926 1927 1928 1929 1930 1931 1932 1933 1934 1935 1936 1937 1938 1939 1940 1941 1942 1943 1944 1945 79 Manage Water Rights When the DSS user creates a n
55. Oct Nov Dec Jan Feb Har Apr Hay Jun Jul aug Sep Df 53S 8611528 32 1188845 18S 78 275 9457 85 F588 35 65905 58 7896 31 Foo 68 5826 A obs 87 S988 La 16 5486 15 4623 20 3907 25 343 30 3048 35 2725 48 2411 45 2117 20 1942 5g 1738 66 1568 65 1422 78 1262 75 1149 80 1074 22 9028 56 9179 89 6322 4 F822 86 O288 5 fee 69 6057 36 6536 46 5146 62 38514 2992 F oo P9812 16 7985 3 258s 16 69S age 93 5310 27 5938 31 6085 79 46506 59 2788 13 258 6 61 47228 76 6989 _ 76 6599 82 6869 oF 4895 863 50 13 46 5573 24 578 6 49 4160 54 2513 63 27238 82 16 6548 87 6308 62 oo Fe oe oe ie 4488 7 4719 43 5344 09 5468 49 9895 56 2546 92 2828 8s 68 O94 7 39 5824 86 5464 99 4896 29 4209 061 45995 5116 65 5227 54 5686 89 2218 7 1846 57 1 as 81 861 oS 5851 96 4464 67 3944 68 4279 28 4874 02 4944 08 3389 33 2110 82 1748 9 62 5 045 177 55 068 18 4695 3 4121 19 3760 58 4103 2 4 68 7 468 3 3182 1 2032 54 1645 03 68 4689 AF eno 7a AAS 86 38483525 56 3948 37 Aa OD 4472 16 5819 03 1923 07 1552 86 Teo 53 4423 7 93970 5 3577 868 3374 18 3783 97 4271 68 4274 83 2871 33 184 33 14 61 17 32 392 0 42 413968 88 S727 25 9998 49 3267 68 3648 44 4194 65 4084 32 276 07 17 68 9 1374 65 29 5615 08 3870 46 3521 99 3128 88 3686 12 3510 52 4017 66 3911 2658 2 1699 53 1382 53 41 9969 417 3586 18 So7 7 92 2958 2961 81 009 ose 99 686 22 2568 91 1629 2 122s Le 98 3862 218 3519 37 5869 75 281 1
56. Species list on the left hand side of the window the user can view the plots normalized as a percent of the maximum habitat value This option is useful when comparing several species which can be done by checking and unchecking the boxes next to the species and lifestages listed in the Species window The example below shows the Normalized Curves for four species lifestages The legend to the right of the plot lists which species are selected WRIA 1I DSS User s Manual 4931 4932 4933 4934 4935 4936 4937 4938 4939 4940 4941 4942 4943 4944 4945 4946 4947 4948 4949 Phabsim 2D Intensive Site Viewer Intensive Site Name IERIE Tiere Physical WUA HSC Fish Distribution Miscellaneous Data I Normalized Curves Species C Chinook Spawn River C Chinook Spawn LargeRiv C Chinook Holding Chinook Juvenile C Chinook Fry C Fall Chum Spawning C Coho Spawning Coho Juvenile C Coho Fry C Pink Spawning CO Sockeye Spawning O Rainbow Spawning O Rainbow JuvAditt Rainbow JuvAdlt2 O Rainbow Winter C Trout steelhead Fry O Steelhead Spawning J Steelhead Juvenile C Cutthroat Spawning C Cutthroat Juv dlt1 C Cutthroat JuvAdl2 C Native char Spawnin C Native char JuvAdit C Native char JuvAdlt2 C Kokanee Spawning C Mountain whitefish Juvenile C Mountain whitefish Adult _ Oo o gt gpa D N w D zZ oO D _ T 2 P oO w D pa D i z As man
57. Surface Plot Species CHINOOK HOLDING Adult Ettective Habitat Surface Plot CHINOQOE HOLDING Adult Bell Creek Cross Section 1 Effective Habitat gt Starting Discharge cfs Hilt 2 a eer is 5 TS L D 3 i LL oO Ending Discharge cfs x i we 1D Habitat Viewer Plug in 4804 4805 4806 4807 4808 4809 4810 4811 4812 4813 4814 4815 4816 4817 224 2D Habitat Viewer Plug in The 2D Habitat Viewer plug in allows you to view and query information on the effects to fish habitat of different stream flow regimes It supports 2D modeling output at all 2D intensive sites This plug in is launched by clicking on the Phabsim 2 D Intensive Viewer button on the toolbar amp If this button is not available on the toolbar click on the Plug ins menu on the menu bar and select 2D Habitat Viewer from the list as shown below Plug ins Time Series Reports Shapetile E B Watershed Characterization Report s Well Log Data Viewer I Land Cower Summarizer Grid Wizard l Scenario Builder O55 Table Editor Feature Identifier Shapefile Labeler Lake Whatcom Water Quality Model Macroinvertebrate Data viewer Habitat Time Series Model Time Series Data Analyst _ Water Quantity Model oT EN KSES CS ESS KS ESICSKSESIKSIESIKS Change Land Cover WRIG Wide Water Quality Model Shapefile Editor Photo viewer 1D Habitat viewer
58. X e O Qa ok O nm mx Q x 10 ae Be Ro pace Pte PRR el xX Qkx hows i eee n t e 0 e o Aa o 7 amp ly A A ly Op Wispy Uo Ua Sh Oy Ish Me Yop ON O 7 YU fh 1 of hat le h le Cun Du Py W Aso Q Cop Site e Spawning m Fry x Juvenile o Adult Figure C1 3 RMSEs for WUA curves habitat model and HV curves frequency equations for small study sites Substrate within Squalicum Creek included some cobble good quality cover at low flow and as the flow increased to about the 10 exceedence flow almost all of the additional wetted area represented high quality substrate cover for spawning fry and juvenile In this instance the frequency based approach gave a good approximation of available habitat for fry at flows below 0 7 m s Figure CA2 where no significant WRIA 1 DSS User s Manual 6462 6463 6464 6465 6466 6467 6468 6469 6470 6471 6472 6473 6474 6475 6476 6477 6478 6479 303 changes in substrate cover conditions occurred and misrepresented available habitat at higher flows where significantly more favorable conditions for fry substrate and cover became available The most sensitive life stages to preferred substrate and cover availability used in our analyses are listed in Table C1 1 RMSE higher than 10 Another factor affecting the results is the shape of suitability curves As a rule life stages that are characterized by very narrow ranges o
59. below lal Water Quality Model Inputs 0 x Input Output Best Management Prachces BMPs Selected ie Land Cover Grid lulc_ cal bgd ne Lake Whatcom Grids Input Directon C Program Files tw AIA 1 D55055 Data GlS DatasGriderw aterki Water Quantity Output Director C Program Files RIA 1 D55055 Data ater Quantity Toot et Water Quality Parameters Database C Program Filestw RIA 1 D55055 Data Model Manager Databa rea ab Edit WRIA Wide Water Quality Model Settings The WRIA Wide Water Quality Inputs form allows the user to edit view the settings for the model To edit view the input settings click the tab To edit view the output settings click the 5 tab Edit WRIA Wide Water Quality Model Inputs The input tab allows the user to view edit the input settings for the WRIA Wide Water Quality Model To change the settings for a particular input select the button to the right of the input setting WRIA Wide Water Quality Model Interface 2451 2452 2453 2454 2455 2456 2457 2458 2459 2460 2461 2462 2463 2464 2465 106 Hi Water Quality Model Inputs d j O xX Input Output Best Management Practices BMPs Selected Land Cover Summary Scenario z Land Cover Database Path C Program Filesww A lA 1 0554055 Cata Model Manager Databa Water Quantity Output Director C Program Files RIA 1 D55055 Datatwater Quantity Took et Wate
60. button as seen below f PHABWin 2002 Whatcom mdb Whatcom_Extended Sele File Edit ESP Wizards View Window Help Export Point Export Sec Export Ft Hydraulic Parameters Thahweg Average Distance Left Bank Dist Right Bank Dist Lett Bank Yveight Right Bank Weight 0 5 Lat th Da baa Appendix B Importing 1D and 2D data from PHABWin_2002 5540 5541 5542 5543 5544 5545 5546 5547 5548 5549 5550 5551 5532 5553 5554 5555 5556 5557 5558 5559 264 Click on the Export to DSS option on the drop down menu and the following screen will appear Export Model Results To DSS Database Step 1 Select the PhabOSS database where the results are to be exported Step e Choose the station these results should be associated with Step 3 Fress the Export button to store the results Database C Stations Description Export Delete Set Export Status Exit First select the database to which the model results will be saved by clicking on the Browse button and navigating to the appropriate DSS database location Next choose the station with which these results should be associated by highlighting the appropriate path given in the window Once the required path has been highlighted under the stations window click on the button A new window will appear asking the user to Enter a new name for this result set Give the data set a name and pr
61. changes to the settings click the __ Cancel button Select Water Quality Output Directory The Select Directory form allows the DSS user to select a directory for the Water Quality Model output To access this form select the Output tab in the Water Quality Model Inputs form Press the button to the right of Water Quality Output Directory on the Output tab of the Water Quality Model Inputs form The default location for the Water Quality Model output is C Program Files WRIA 1_DSS Model Runs HE Select Water Quality Output Di loj x Ic Program Files WAI4 1_ OS S4 Model Runs MSDEDATABASES User Documentation Water Quantity TopNet Files Lake Whatcom Water Quality Model Interface 2330 2331 2332 2333 2334 2335 2336 2337 2338 2339 2340 2341 2342 2343 2344 2345 2346 2347 2348 2349 2350 2351 2332 100 To move up a directory level click the button To change the drive to browse for folders click the 1 button To select a folder as the desired directory click on the folder s name To open a folder double click the folder s name To save the selected directory click the button Run Lake Whatcom Water Quality Model The DSS Scenario Builder allows the DSS user to run the Water Quality Model DSS Scenario Builder 2 x gt Fie Elements view Run OE p _ftoyo1 1965 1070571990 Elements Water Quality Scenario Models Filters D
62. check are that all required values keys etc are supplied ensure that all fields even blank fields are present ie for value3 to be blank valuel value2 value4 Also check that data types are correct for example don t try to use Hello there as a sample value if sample value is a numeric field I If an error does occur NO data will be imported the entire process will be aborted Data is only written to the database upon successful completion of the entire file J An example of an error during import appears below In this case no data was imported to the database because an error occurred To cause this error I placed an X where there was a 30 trying to place data of type text into a field of type float WRIA 1 DSS User s Manual 5519 5520 Jd 5522 5523 5524 5525 5526 532 7 5528 3529 5530 5531 5932 5533 5534 5535 5536 5537 5538 5539 263 Appendix B Importing 1D and 2D data from PHABWin_2002 Appendix B 1 Importing 1D data from PHABWin_ 2002 To obtain data to import into the WIRA 1_DSS 1D importer you must first run the USU PHABWin_2002 program This includes running the following programs within PHABWin_2002 to enable the Export to DSS option 1 Both Water Surface Level WSL and the Velocity model 2 The Habtae and Habef Habitat Models Once these modules have been run in PHABWin_2002 the Export to DSS option becomes available under the Data drop down menu
63. criteria on plots whether the probability plot shows the best fit line or user control lines and whether the mean or median values are connected in the box whisker plots The Box Plot Description button provides an explanation of the various parts of the box whisker plots The sections of the Plot Options tab can be expanded or collapsed by clicking on the arrow next to the name of the section 1 e Time Series Plot Probability Plot Box Whisker Plot Time Series Data Analyst Plug in 3855 3856 3857 3858 3859 3860 3861 3862 3863 3805 3866 3867 3868 3869 3870 3871 3872 3873 3874 174 ti Options Plot Enhancements Data Sources Notes Summary Y Asis in Log Scale aii Time Series Plot C Line Point Both Show Control lines eseuoe Dorast Lias Use Averaging Period Normalize Show Data Gaps ile Probability Plot W Show Best Fit Line Show Control lines as Bow hisker Plots C Connect Means Connect Medians Box Plot Description The Plot Options tab allows the user to display information in the plot window by averaging over different time periods This is particularly useful when viewing the high frequency temperature data in the temperature probe database Users can plot the raw data or use any of the averaging periods available to plot the averages rather than the raw data To use this function check the box next to Use Averaging Period then select
64. down 4171 box and the date range for analysis can be controlled using the Date Range pull down 4172 boxes Conditions can also be set using the Condition fields to include only parameters WRIA 1I DSS User s Manual 4173 4174 4175 4176 4177 4178 4179 4180 4181 4182 4183 4184 4185 4186 4187 4188 4189 4190 4191 4192 4193 4194 4195 4196 193 for which a desired number of observations exist The Update Summary button applies the changes made to the Station Data Range and Condition fields Similar to the Parameter Summary Analysis discussed previously the user can choose Alpi the Select Parameters button to specify a subset of water quality parameters to include in the table Censored data may also be included in the calculation of the descriptive statistics by clicking on the Use Censored Data check box The rows in the statistical summary table can be selected and copied for pasting into reports or other documents Selecting records is done by clicking on records in the table Once selected rows can be copied by clicking on the copy button i The copied records can then be pasted into a report or other document The print button automatically generates an HTML format report of all of the information shown in the table that can be sent directly to a printer or posted on a web page This report can be previewed in a web browser by clicking on the Preview Report button Time Series
65. down list to the right of In ear Demand Tyee To edit the demand variable edit the text in the text box to the right of Demand Variable To edit the demand rate edit the text in the text box to the right of Demand Rate To edit the return flow select a return flow from the drop down list to the right of fetunFlow The number of sources is listed to the right of Number ot Sources To edit the source selected in the sources list click the button To edit the right selected in the sources list click the Edt Right button To edit the user source rights edit Lissy d Right information click the _Edit User Sources and Fights button WRIA 1 DSS User s Manual 1880 1881 1882 1883 1884 1885 1886 1887 1888 1889 1890 1891 1892 1893 1894 1895 1896 1897 1898 1899 1900 1901 T1 To use the changed water user values click the button To discard the changed Cancel water user values click the button Manage Water Sources When the DSS user creates a new water source or edits an existing water source the Edit View Water Source Control is displayed This allows the DSS user to edit the values for the water source Edit Source Bf Source Edit Iker Sources Sourced Source Sources Dounce Type 2 Ground ater Sourceb Source Source Location ID Whatcom Sourceg Sourced cuice i Physical Daily Mas 3 53147E 21 cubic feet day Source 1 Sourcel Physical Annual Max 3 637
66. eee Ls oer oe i 19 oe Pe 6 1564 111 Fo 21 48 2800 97 SA4 99 2821 89 2668 64 2669 81 3196 81 3681 48 3387 98 2312 6 1495 24 112d 28 32495 36 2778 96 2585 82 2462 78 2561 88 2969 59 Saas 2 21 219 218 8 99 7425 84 1065 11 85 985 25 2184 68 2448 7 2312 45 228 43 2307 49 28 06 8S 3298 19 S88 oF Ba LB 158 15 O87 51 96 981 46 7796 24 2744 87 284 87 211128 2186 88 2589 31 8b 75 2889 611928 78 1264 82 O84 od Oo AF 1481 66 7854 065 1654 61 1781 7 1840 95 2281 51 282 6 09 2577 79 178 6 61 1150 71 793 49 Figure 2 Exceedence file for node 1 WUAinput Folder The WUAinput folder contains 37 comma delimited files with WUA data for each of the study sites The files should have flows and WUAs for 28 fish species and life stages in the same format as in the deliverable WUA excel files for each site Example of the file is shown in figure 3 The first line indicates the number of modeled flows Note that the names of the files e g AndersonCreek csv AustinCreek csv should be exactly the same as in the Source_Site column of the Source Target file Figure 1 The folder is provided with the program WRIA 1 DSS User s Manual 6069 6070 6071 6072 6073 6074 6075 6076 6077 6078 6079 6080 608 6082 6083 6084 6085 6086 285 16 Chinook Spawn Stream Chinook Spawn River Chinook Spawn Large River Chinook Holding 2 609 165 77 272 89 86 15 27 89 88 48 2 8S eos 8 6 212d 2 8 Po
67. file dialog will be displayed Browse to a polygon shapefile and click open To select the shapefile field to be used for the id choose a field listed in the dropdown list to the right of Panag l Feld To select the shapefile field to be used for the name choose a field listed in the dropdown list to the right of 5 339 Mame Field To save the polygon shapefile that has been selected click the button To cancel button discard the polygon shapefile that has been selected click the The drainage shapefile used should always be bsnwrial_v7 shp in the folder C program files WRIA 1_DSS DSS_Data GIS_Data Shapefiles Watershed or equivalent location depending on your install location Only the drainage identifier BSNWRIAIA and drainage name DRAIN_NAME are used from this shapefile Other inputs have been created using the drainage identifiers in this shapefile Use of another shapefile would result in incorrect names being associated with drainage identifiers The model reads the WRIA 1I DSS User s Manual 1687 1688 1689 1690 1691 1692 1693 1694 1695 1696 1697 1698 1699 1700 1701 1702 1703 1704 67 drainage identifier from the 3 column and drainage name from the 6 column of the shapefile A shapefile with this information in different columns will result in an error H Attributes of bsnwrial_v7 _ FID Shape BSNWRIA1A FIRST_ORDE SECOND_ORD DRAIN NAME SQ_MILE MODEL_TYPE t Of Polygon 16
68. for the item To save the Water Management selected click the button The Water Management items will then be saved to the database To delete the water user selected in the water users list click the ol button The water user will then be deleted Water Quantity Model Interface 1858 1859 1860 1861 1862 1863 1864 1865 1866 1867 1868 1869 1870 1871 1872 1873 1874 1875 1876 1877 1878 1879 76 Manage Water Users When the DSS user creates a new water user or edits an existing water user the Edit View Water User Control is displayed This allows the DSS user to edit the values for the water user EditWiew Data User ID E User Name FWS Residential 5600 City of Belli User Type 4 Public Water Supplier Location of Use Drainage Whatcom In Year Demand Type MonthlyDemand Edit Demand Variable units 536378 Demand Rate ft3 d unit 1336661335 Return Flow RetumFlows Ect Humber of Sources 1 Source s45 None Edit Source Edit Right Edit User Sources and Rights The YID is a unique identifier of the water user in the Water Management To edit the user name edit the text in the text box to the right of seame To edit the user type select a user type from the drop down list to the right of Us To edit the location of the user select a location in the drop down list to the right of besten of Use Drainage To edit the in year demand type select a type from the drop
69. hatcom Ki 544319 772m Yi 5402234471 m eae Pier AR te mi J i Once the drainages that you wish to include in the report appear in the Selected Drainages list ensure that Flow Units Volume Units and Year Display are all set according to your preference This may be done by clicking on the down arrow next to the units and choosing the preferred option from the list Flow Units CFS Volume Units Acre Feet Year Display water Yea Fish Periodicity Dataset refers to which of the four available fish datasets should be included in the Fish Periodicity section of the report Fish Periodicity Dataset Known Current Known Current Presumed Current Known Historic Presumed Historic Watershed Characterization Report Generator Change Sechons Inclua Afarming Report i large a 5359 5360 5361 5362 5363 5364 5365 5366 5367 5368 5369 5370 5371 5372 5373 5374 5375 5376 5377 254 To choose which sections are included in the report you may click the Change Sections Included in Report button This will display the screen shown below F Sections Included in Report Seles Here you may select which sections of the report will be generated and displayed Check the bos nest to the section to have it appear in the report Some items cannot be unchecked These are major section headings which will automatically hide if none of the subsections are present Report Overv
70. in better understanding the data and information gathered by government agencies and other organizations File Edit Plug ins Shapefile Editor Help z H z H z z z D Salat EH O ORAA 0 a a ob wlh a 4 id iaia Legand a xE P A z gM Sampling Locations ajir v Photo Locations ail J Streamflow Gages ra Water Quality Stations a v Permit Compliance System Locations A Hydrogrography J NHD Water Bodies Oo v NHD River Reach File N Pa Roads Major Roads N a ate 7 MY aS E Watershed Boundaries FR oh Atak Si i J USGS HUC o fot gs te IDAR Subwatersheds o oS Pe Shed O Political Boundaries PEN C Land Ownership o BLM E Department of Energy _ Forest Service WB National Parks amp Monuments Open water _ Private _ State of Idaho National Forest Boundaries m County Boundaries g State Boundaries o S mrs hd ye A x 458107 516 Y 308517 888 eee The base system includes an interactive map and legend including typical GIS application functions as well as a core set of plug ins for analyzing water quality and quantity data and digital photography Because the base tool is inherently extensible it allows for the implementation of custom plug ins to address significant concerns in a specific area and the inclusion of models and other data analyses that may be required This allows users to create their own WIS to aid decision making for their area of interest WRIA 1
71. options WWU95 DH 3 Drayton Harbor Customization General Plot Subsets Avie Font Color Style Main Title wt L95 DH 3 Drayton Harbor ia Sub Tithe Border Style Numenc Precision C No Border C Line C D 1 2 2 Shadow C 30 Inset Viewing Stile Grid Lines f Color f Both Poy oP OF None f Monochrome Grid in front of data f Monochrome Symbols Font Size C Large f Medium C Small OF Cancel Help Export Maximize The tab titled Plot allows the user to change the plot style comparison plot style axes options 3D display options and have the data points marked Not all of these options will be available for every plot generated Time Series Data Analyst Plug in 3979 3980 3981 3982 3983 3984 3985 3986 3987 3988 3989 3990 180 WWU95 DH 3 Drayton Harbor Customization General Plot Subsets Avis Font Color Style Flot Style Comparison Plot Style Points Pointe BestFittCurve Points BestFitLine Points Line Points 5 pline Spline Mark Data Points OK Cancel Help Export Maximize The tab titled Subsets allows the user to select which subsets to graph if more than one subset is present If the graph only has one subset this tab will not allow anything else to be selected WWU95 DH 3 Drayton Harbor Customization General Plot Subsets Avie Font Color Style Subsets to Graph Scrolling Subsets aes OF
72. select it by clicking on its name WRIA 1I DSS User s Manual 5053 5054 5055 5056 5057 5058 5059 5060 5061 5062 5063 5064 5065 5066 5067 5068 5069 237 Macroinvertebrate Data Viewer Cite Anderton Creek Sample Mineg ias MA 2 Benthic Stonefly Larvae Macroinvertebrate Data Viewing Options Tabs allow the user to view macroinvertebrate data in various formats Options available in each format are discussed below Raw Data Size Distribution Density Sample Information Viewing Raw Data The Raw Data tab displays the data in spreadsheet format by size class and group Ifa sample was collected as a subsample the user can view the data as it was collected by selecting i Or as the subsample extended to full sample size by selecting Show count for full sample Subsample extended If Fraction subsampled is 100 00 both selections will display the same spreadsheet Macroinvertebrate Data Viewer 5070 5071 5072 5073 5074 5075 5076 5077 5078 5079 238 Size Distribution Plots Click on the Size Distribution tab The user can choose to view a plot of the number of macroinvertebrates present in each size class as shown below by selecting f Show count for full sample Subsample expanded l Alternately a plot of the percent of macroinvertebrates in each size class can be viewed by selecting C Show percentage of macroinvertebrates w Macroinvertebrate Data Vie
73. selected by pressing the Select Nodes From Map button and clicking on another node The user may also select multiple nodes at once by clicking and dragging the mouse to create a rectangle around the desired nodes This will select all nodes that lie within the rectangle Once all the desired nodes have been selected and are listed in the Selected Nodes box and the desired extrapolation method has been selected press o x to accept the selections and return to the Temperature and DO Flags Model Parameters form The user must select at least one node to model or an error will occur WRIA 1 DSS User s Manual 3463 3464 3465 3466 3467 3468 3469 3470 3471 3472 3473 3474 3475 3476 3477 3478 3479 3480 3481 3482 155 To return to the Temperature and DO Flags Model Parameters form from the Select the Nodes to Model form without selecting any nodes or an extrapolation method press the cancel button The default options will then be used to model Edit Temperature and DO Flags Model Outputs The Outputs section of the Temperature and DO Flags Model Parameters form located near the bottom of the form allows the DSS user to edit the outputs for the Temperature and DO Flags Model including selecting the Output Temperature and DO Database Temperature Flags and Warnings Shapefile and the DO Flags andWarnings Shapefile Each of these sections is explained in detail in the following sections Outputs Output
74. stations or by clicking and dragging a box around one or several locations as shown in the example below WRIA 1 DSS User s Manual 2797 2798 2199 2800 2801 2802 2803 2804 2805 2806 2807 2808 2809 2810 2811 2812 2813 2814 2815 2816 2817 E Sampling Data a water Quantity Control Nodes 1D Habitat Sites 2D Habitat Sites Mell Graphs Vell Report Documents Water Rights POW Phatos _ Weather Stations Streamflow Sampling Locations amp Ae eqoanw G Temperature Probes Selecting points from the Periodicity Nodes points theme on the map will load the periodicity data for those selected locations into the Periodicity Viewer Editor form followed by the rest of the periodicity data in the database in numerical order The example below shows Nodes 82 84 and 83 loaded into the Periodicity Viewer Editor after being selected from the map Periodicity Viewer Editor File Edit Node ID Drainage Viewing Periodicity Data via the Periodicity Viewer Toolbar Button As an alternative to selecting points using the map clicking the Periodicity Viewer toolbar button opens the Periodicity Viewer Editor and loads the entire database of periodicity data into the Periodicity Viewer Editor form By pressing this button users can browse the entire database of periodicity data without interacting with the map Periodicity V
75. than 130 cfs Would you like to contunue without the larger sites Yes __ Figure 12 The message the user gets if there are some nodes in the node file with MAF gt 130cfs w Target Site Mode Number Would you like to Enter the node number OR See the map Figure 13 Entering the target site node number Cancel Appendix C Extrapolation Program User Manual 6309 6310 6311 6312 6313 6314 6315 6316 6317 6318 6319 6320 6321 6322 6323 6324 6325 6326 6327 296 Habitat Prediction Mean Annual Flow can not be higher than 130 cfs Choose Another Target Site Figure 14 The message the user gets if the MAF at the target node is greater that 130 cfs If the user chooses to see the map the next window displays western or eastern part of the watershed navigate between the western and eastern parts using Next gt and lt Previous buttons Figure 9 After the node number has been entered the user is given a choice to either use 10 and 90 exceedence flows as maximum and minimum flows option Yes or manually enter the maximum and minimum flows for the calculations option No Figure 10 If option Yes is chosen the option of entering min and max flows on the right part of the form is not available Habitat values are then calculated for 20 flows in the range between the min and max flows After the program finished running the use gets a message
76. the time period over which the data will be averaged C Houle Monthly C Daily C Seasonally C Weekly C early If the Show Control Lines option is checked for either the Time Series or Probability plot the user can add control lines to the plot i Show Control lines Add Remove Control Line Use Averaging Period Clicking the Add Remove Control Line button in the Plot Options tab allows the user to define any number of control lines to include in the Time Series or Probability plots using the Add Control Line form shown below WRIA I DSS User s Manual 3875 3876 3877 3878 3879 3880 3881 3882 3883 3884 3885 3886 3887 3888 3889 3890 3891 3892 3893 3894 3895 3896 175 te Add Control Line Label Value Parameter Water Quality Cnt 0 05 PHOSPHORUS TO Click the button to add a new control line to the list Fill in the Label Value and Color fields in the Control Line form shown below The button to the right of the Color field allows users to select a color for the control line from a variety of predefined colors Control Line Label water Quality Criterion 0 05 mg L Value 0 05 Color Color Red a Cancel The following plots show examples of time series and probability plots showing total phosphorus data along with a control line indicating a hypothetical instream water quality numeric criterion for total phosphorus The control lines can be removed from the p
77. the TopNet input directory There is 1641 one directory for each of the three model scenarios Historic Existing and Full Build Out 1642 conditions When the model is run this entire set of files 1s copied to the specified output 1643 working directory The model is then run in the output working directory which serves as 1644 a record of the inputs and outputs for a specific model run scenario The Input tab gives WRIA I DSS User s Manual 1645 1646 1647 1648 1649 1650 1651 1652 1653 1654 1655 1656 1657 1658 1659 1660 1661 65 the capability for adjusting input information The output tab specifies the locations of the output The input directory is left unchanged To edit the input settings click on the input tab To edit the output settings click on the output tab Edit Water Quantity Model Inputs The input tab of the Water Quantity Model Settings allows the DSS user to edit the inputs for the Water Quantity Model Water Quantity Model Settings Input Output WRIA 1 Drainages Shapefle C Program Files WAl4 1 0554055 DataGlS Data Shapetiles atershed bsriwnial_vi shp TopHet Input Directoy C Program Files WwfAI4 1 DSS rater Quantity TopNet Files ModellnputFilesE sisting Land Cover Summary Database C Program Files WwfAI4 1 D554055 DatatModel Manager Databases LandCoverSummary mdb Land Cover Scenario Selecton Scenario 2 Water Management Database C Program Files WAl4 1 0554055 Da
78. the data for the currently selected station water quality parameter and plot type WRIA 1I DSS User s Manual 3695 3696 3697 3698 3699 3700 3701 3702 3703 3704 3705 3706 3707 3708 3709 3710 3711 3712 3713 3714 3715 3716 3717 167 12203550 WHATCOM CREEK AT BELLINGHAM COLIFORM TO T 44 EA RAHE FILTER MUEL ER DO MED 350 Og Jan 73 Apr Jul Oct 1972 Date The plot shown in this window can be customized using options discussed in following sections A user can zoom in on any area in any of the plots by simply clicking and dragging a rectangle to encompass the area of interest on the plot area To undo the zoom click on the Undo Zoom toolbar button In addition users may identify any point shown in the plots by simply clicking on the data point When the mouse is over the data point it will change from an arrow to a hand Clicking the mouse on a data point will bring up the X and Y values for that point in a Hot Spot Data window as shown below Hot Spot Data a 27 771999 aie 30 Remove Value from Analysis By clicking on the Remove Value from Analysis button users may remove the selected data point from the plot Plot Saving Exporting and Printing B The save button on the tool bar allows the user to export the current plot to a jpeg file or a metafile The small down arrow next to the save button allows the user to specify which file type to be used in exporting the cur
79. the database Make an entry for each AVI in the tblMediaFiles table The data to be entered for the database fields are Station ID The value from the Station_ID field in tbIStations that corresponds with the station that you are currently working with MediaType_ID Select the value AVI from the drop down combo box in this field It is tied to the tblMediaTypes table for values Media_Filename The location filename of the AVI that you are working on relative to the database 1 e if the database is located in c 2D Data database mdb and the AVI that you are working on is located in c 2D Data StationFolderName Miscellaneous AVl avifilename avi then the entry StationFoldername Miscellaneous A Vi avifilename avi Comments Put any comments about the AVI you are working on that you want a user to know here This value will be displayed when this AVI is being viewed If this field is left blank then the value None will be displayed instead Copy the PDF documents into the PDF folder in the Miscellaneous folder see folder structure above Input the PDF documents information into the database Make an entry for each PDF document in the tblIMediaFiles table The data to be entered for the database fields are Station ID The value from the Station_ID field in tbIStations that corresponds with the station that you are currently working with MediaType_ID Select the value PDF from the drop down combo box in this field
80. the desktop the icon with a red and blue molecule This will open the WRIA 1 DSS Launch Pad window as shown below Press Launch DSS to begin WRIA 1 DSS Launch Pad Launch DSS Check for Updates This will bring up a MapWindow and the Nooksack project One of the menus in MapWindow will be labeled DSS as shown below File Edit pss Plug ins Time Series Reports Hel Scenario Builder h i pn Scenarios AL Sal View WRIG 1 Users Documentation O Ser SINE comro a T A MaLAa Select the Scenario Builder option to start the Model Manager Note that this tool goes by three different names which are used interchangeably throughout all literature and software Model Manager Scenario Builder and DSS This last term is best avoided since the term is also used to refer to the complete package of software and data If this menu does not appear select the Plug ins menu instead You will see an option labeled Scenario Builder DSS If there is no check mark next to this item click the item as shown below Scenario Builder Model Manager 26 File Edit O55 Plug ins Time Series Reports Help 0 a 2 al Watershed Characterization Report Legend Well Log Data Viewer E m Sampling Land Cover Summarizer L Water a Grid Wizard 1D Hab 2D Hab Scenario Builder 055 Ns a Table Editor Oe fy mena well Gr Yell Re w Feature ee ee Labeler 790 istar F E x 791 792 Ifthe Scenario Builder DSS option does n
81. the right side of the Time Series Analyst In the tab shown below a user can define a station group for data analysis Time Series Data Analyst Plug in 4269 4270 4271 4272 4273 4274 4275 4276 4277 4278 4279 4280 4281 4282 4283 4284 198 a Options Plot Options Flot Enhancements Summary Data Sources Motes Station Grouping 1 California Creek USU CA Ham California Creek of USU C4 Kick California Creek Mi USU O4 Valley California Creek Clicking on i activates the New Group Form shown below in which a name may be specified for the new group that is to be created The Group ID field is automatically populated fh Mew Group Group Hame Group ID E cel When the user enters a Group Name and clicks ___ on the New Group form the station group is created and the Add Stations to Group form appears A station is added to the group by selecting it from the list of stations in the upper window of the form and clicking 2 The selected station is added to the list of stations to be included in the group which will be shown in the lower window of the Add Stations form Click UK when finished adding stations to the group WRIA 1I DSS User s Manual 4285 4286 4287 4288 4289 4290 4291 4292 4293 4294 4295 4296 4297 4298 4299 4300 4301 4302 4303 4304 4305 4306 4307 4308 4309 4310 199 n Add Stations to Group
82. to bring up the Select your Source Species and Filename screen below Choose the appropriate Species Name then click Browse amp to locate the source Species List file The Select Your Species Source SpeciesList Filename window appears as shown below ag Select your Source Species and Filename species Mame Chinook Fp File Information Source Filename Select Your Species Source SpeciesList Filename Look in gt Species ee Eg m ChinFry Chinook Fryq 24 chs Chin E chinHolding Chinook FryQ 26 chs E chin Output Filename a My Recent ChinJuv Chinook Fryg 28 chs Chin Aon Chinook Fry91 3 chs Chinook FryQ 35 chs Chin 3 Chinook FryQ1 6 chs E Chinook FryQ 43 chs Chin _ Chinook FryQ2 1 chs Chinook FryQ 57 chs Chin Desktop Chinook FryG2 6 chs Chinook Fry 1 chs Chin IE Chinook FryQ 2 chs Chinook Feo 99 chs Chin E Chinook Fryg 0g chs Chinook Holding i 3 chs Chin E Chinook FryQ 09 chs Chinook Holding 1 6 chs Chin My Documents _ ee Chinook FryQ 11 chs Chinook HoldingQe 1 chs Chin E Chinook Freg 14 chs Chinook HoldingQe 6 chs Chin PE Chinook Fry 16 chs E Chinook Holding 2 chs Chin pE Chinook Fry 18 chs Chinook Holding 08 chs Chin E Chinook FryQ 2e chs Chinook Holding 09 chs Chin gi gt hy Network File name ChinFry Places Files of type fa Files Cancel The SpeciesL
83. to view and add anecdotal information about locations and photographs to the Photo Viewer database Clicking on Hew comert under the selected location will show all available comments for the currently selected location Clicking on the View Comments button under the selected photograph will show all available comments for the selected photograph The comments form is shown below WRIA 1 DSS User s Manual 4472 4473 4474 4475 4476 4477 4478 4479 4480 4481 4482 4483 4484 4485 4486 4487 4488 4489 4490 4491 207 rei PhotoViewer Comments Location Cornell Creek Near Mount Baker Highway Bridge g ba Comments Photo All Photos ttio Comments Ayvailable PiciD ID Author Organization Add Comment Close Users can add comments to the database by clicking on acon The following form will open i PhotoViewer Add A Comment Location Photo Author Organization Date Your Comment Cancel By filling in the blanks on the form and clicking _ the comment is added to the database and will show up in the Comments form It should be noted that the location field is automatically populated with the location currently selected in the Photo Viewer The user must select the photo to which the new comment should be associated in the Photo pull down box The button will become active when an author is entered in the Author box Photo Viewer Plug in 4492
84. used The default location for this database is listed in the form above To select a different database press the browse g button to the right of the Habitat Database pathname This will bring up the Database Configuration form as shown below WRIA 1 DSS User s Manual 2997 2998 2999 3000 3001 3002 3003 3004 3005 3006 3007 3008 3009 3010 3011 3012 3013 131 Database Configuration Please select the Habitat Database for the Habitat Time Seres Model Microsoft SQL Server C Use SOL Server to find the database Database Name Server Address Server User ID Server Password Microsol Access f Use Access to find the database Please specify the full path to the mdb file containing the database Database Path C Program Files WWAI4 1 0554055 Data Model Test Connection Save Changes The user has the option of selecting a Microsoft SQL Server database by selecting the Use SQL Server to find the database option The user must then enter the database information in the following boxes Micrasatt SQL Server f Use SOL Server to find the database tabase Hame Server Address local Server User ID ri Use Trusted Server Fassword Connection To use a Microsoft Access database as the input Habitat Database the user can select the gt Use Access to find the database option Micrazolt Access f Use Access to find the database Please specify the full path to the md
85. value Q zero as it is not associated with any particular Station It is associated with all stations Media_Type_ID input the value Q zero as it is not associated with any of the designated Miscellaneous Data types Media_Filename the location filename of the HSC Master Curves file relative to the database i e If the database is located in c 2D Data database mdb and the HSC Master Curves file is located in c 2D Data HSC nastercurvesfilename then the entry HSC nastercurvesfilename Comments Putin a comment saying something like This is the Habitat Suitability Curves HSC definitions file gt it is not dependent on site but just needed someplace to store the filename so put it here Fish Distribution data Copy the Background Layers hillshade image and other background shapefile layers into the Background Layers folder located inside the Fish Distribution folder see folder structure above Input the Background Layers information into the database Make an entry for each Background Layer in the tblFishDistribution table The order that the background layers are entered matters as the top most layer will be added first to the view the next one second etc So the top most layer in the database will be the bottom most layer in the view The background layers need to be in this order Hillshade Marine Boundary Watershed Boundary County Boundary O O O O The data to be entered for the database field
86. will be completely filled in as shown below Select your Source Species and Filename Species Name Chinook Fry File Information Source Filename H 420 DataQ5420 Data New Data 01 WwhatcomSpectes Files ChinookF ry tet Output Filename 5 OF Cancel Because the SpeciesList file lists all of the source and output files for the selected species the Output Filename value is not used and may be ignored Repeat this process of selecting Species SpeciesList pairs until an entry has been added to the File list for every species At this point the screen will look as it does below WRIA 1I DSS User s Manual 281 2D Mesh Data Importer Site Name Site 7 Habitat Information Source Meshpoints Filename Cell Area Fieldname c Habitat Fieldname kesh Filename oz Bed Value Fieldname Substrate veg Code Fieldname Substrateveg Desc Fleldname Importing Habitat Done 0 Flow Information source Meshpoints Filename s Importing Flow Done U4 File Species Information Source Meshpomnts Filename HA2D DataQS 2D Data New Data01 Whatcom Mesh S ource File 07 whatcom_ mes Species Source Filename Chinook Fry H 20 DataQ5420 Data New Data 01 WhatcomS pecies Files ChinookFry tet Chinook Holding H 20 DataQ5420 Data New Data 01 Vhatcom Species Files ChinookHolding txt Chinook Juvenile HAD DataQ5420 Data New Data0 Vhatcom Species Files ChinookJuyen
87. will be minimized revealing the MapWindow view containing the land cover grid and polygon shapefile Remember you must have selected a polygon shapefile to use as the boundary in the previous step If you have not you will get an error message saying that you must select a polygon shapefile for the Land Cover Changer Once you have done this you may continue The polygon shapefile will be the selected layer in MapWindow s Legend To select a shape in the polygon shapefile move the cursor over the desired shape and click on the map The Select New Land Cover Types form will then be displayed allowing the user to select a new land cover type for old land cover types Add Custom Drawn Polygon To draw a polygon on MapWindow s view click the button The Change Land Cover form will be minimized revealing the MapWindow view containing the land cover grid To draw a shape in MapWindow s view move the cursor over the desired starting point in the polygon and click on the map with the left mouse button Repeat this process for all of the points desired in the polygon If the user desires to remove the last point drawn they can do so by clicking the right mouse button When all of the polygon points have been added the user can finish the polygon by moving the cursor over the start point until the cursor appears and then clicking the left mouse button The Select New Land Cover Types form will then be displayed allowing the user to sel
88. 0 End Date 1273171999 MapWindow Version 3 1 1879 37030 DSS Version 1 0 2267 22250 OS Name amp Version Microsoft Windows lt P Professional 5 1 2600 System RAM 1023 MB System Speed Intel A Pentium R 4 CPU 3 40GHz System Other Computer ame NOOETEST SustemType lt 36 based PL Scenario Aun Log HHHHHHHHHHHHH Running Scenario New Scenario AHHHHHHHHHHH Author Last Modified 11 12 2007 8 39 47 PM Notes Description v Export to File Close Exporting Scenario Run Log The scenario run log may be exported which 1s useful for archiving scenario results Exporting the log may be done by clicking the Export to File button in the scenario log viewer above You will be asked where to save the file Save ini i gt Habitat My Recent Documents Desktop hy Computer My Network File name x Places Save as type Text File txt Cancel The output file will be textual ASCII text and will contain exactly what the scenario log viewer shows WRIA I DSS User s Manual 3283 3284 3285 3286 3287 3288 3289 3290 3291 3292 3293 3294 3295 3296 3297 3298 3299 3300 145 Temperature and Dissolved Oxygen Flags Model Interface The Temperature and Dissolved Oxygen DO Flags Model Interface allows the DSS user to specify the input for the Temperature and DO Flags Model Add Temperature and DO Flags Model to DSS Scenario To add the Temperature and Diss
89. 0 Nooksack South Fork Subbasin Deer Roaring amp Plumbago 6 46 Headwater 1 Polygon 179 Coastal Samish Bay Blanchard 2 Polygon 178 Coastal Samish Bay Whitehall 3 Polygon 177 Coastal Samish Bay Colony 4 Polygon 176 Nooksack South Fork Subbasin Upper South Fork Nooksack Vest 5 Polygon 175 Nooksack South Fork Subbasin Upper South Fork Nooksack East 6 Polygon 174 Coastal Eliza Island AT 71M w wd wl Record Ki KI 1 gt l Show all Selected Records 0 out of 177 Selected Options Select TopNet Input Directory To select an input directory for the TopNet model click the l button to the right of TopHNetInput Directo The Select Directory form will then be displayed The Select Input Directory form allows the DSS user to select a directory containing the input for the TopNet model The default location for the TopNet Input Directory is C Program Files WRIA 1_DSS Water Quantity TopNet Files ModelInputFilesExisting Select Input Directory C Program Files WAIS 1_ DSS 4vater Quantity Topet Files ModellnputFilesE sisting ModellnputFilesFBU ModellnputFilesHistoric To move up a directory level click the E button To change the drive to browse for folders click the 17 button To select a folder as the desired directory click on the folder s name To open a folder double click the folder s name Water Quantity Model Interface 1705 1706 1707 1708 1709 1710 1711 1712 1713 1714 1715 1716
90. 03 1804 WRIA 1I DSS User s Manual 1805 1806 1807 1808 1809 1810 1811 1812 1813 1814 1815 1816 1817 1818 1819 1820 73 To select a WRIA 1 Drainage click the drop down menu to the right of Pana To edit the tile drained and ditch drained fractions for a land cover type double click on the row in the land cover list The Edit Table Values form will be displayed Edit Table Values Sele Edit Agricultural Drainage Drainage 5 Bertrand LULC Description Area 82 Row Crops abe bs anara Tile Drained Fraction 0 046802576751 F Ditch Drained Fraction 0 3451 696087997 ea To edit tile drained fraction change the text in the textbox to the right of T Prained Fraction To edit the ditch drained fraction change the text in the textbox to the right of DitchDrained Fraction To save values that have been entered click the ro button To Cancel discard the values that have been entered click the button Edit Water Management To edit the Water Management click the button to the right of SaaS in the Water Quality Model Settings form The Water Management form will be displayed Water Quantity Model Interface 74 Water Management File Edit Help Edit View Data E ten Fee 3 179 Blanchard E 178 Whitehall E 177 Colony E 176 Upper Soul 3 175 Upper Soul E 174 Eliza Island E 173 Larabee E 172 Howard 3 171 Cavanaugt 3 170 Brannian E 169 Fir E 168 Dye E
91. 1 5872 5873 5874 5875 5876 5877 5878 5879 5880 5881 5882 5883 5884 5885 5886 212 Appendix B 3 Using the 2D Data Importer Install 2D Data Importer To install the 2D Data Importer double click on the setup exe file This will install the importer as well as these help files and a blank database The default location for the installation of these items is C Program Files 2DImporter and C 2D_Importer_Output Select Database Launch the 2D Data Importer program The default location for the installation of this program is C Program Files 2DImporter Find the executable named 2DMeshDatalImporter exe Double click this application to begin The following screen will appear Select Your Database Database C Program Files 2D Importer Phabsim2DData_Test mdb Select the desired database In the example above this is C Program Files 2DImporter PHabSim2DData_Test mdb To append data to the database used by the 2D Viewer select the database named Phabsim2DData mdb The default location for this file is C Program Files WRIA 1 DSS DSS_Data 2D Data Phabsim2DData mdb If the DSS was not installed in the default location this file will have to be located To start a new blank database copy the Blank mdb database from the 2D Data folder rename it and enter its location in the box above After selecting the database the main 2D Data Importer window below will appear Select the desired site name from the dro
92. 1 Feature Identifier Water Qu Seles Shape Index Bey 679 Field Hame STATION DATABASE STATION Ma AGENCY LOCATION STATE 680 68 682 683 of 857 will turn red in the Map view 684 Shape Labeler 685 686 687 688 Shapefile Labeler Shapetile Layers 10 Habitat Sites 0 Habitat Sites Airports Beaches and Lakes Campsites Comprehensive Plan Zoning County Boundaries Culverts Drainages Listed Water Courses Listed Water Grid Cells Major Roads Marinas Marine Waters Municipal Boundaries National Parks Mational Recreation Areas Parks Photos 689 690 WRIA 1I DSS User s Manual Boulder Creek at Mount Nooksack Washington Ww haboor 0 0 A096 38 In the example above the Water Quality Sampling Site gage s that has a Shape Index The Shape Labeler allows you to add customized labels to the Map view To open the tool click the Shape Labeler button lt a The following window will open Label by Field None Label Properties Font Microsoft Sans Sent 6 25 nA Color Color Black EZ Align Center Use Label Shadow Color ay rite Scale Labels Reset Font Scale Use Label Collision Avoidance Remove Duplicate Labels Label zoom extents Enable label extents ane Close 9 691 692 693 694 695 696 697 698 699 700 701 702 703 704 705 706 707 708 709 710 711 712 713 714 715 716 717 718 719 720 721
93. 10 To use the changed BMP values click the button To discard the changed BMP values click the __ Caneel button Delete Best Management Practices To delete the BMP selected in the BMP list click the a button This removes the selected BMP from the BMP list Change Best Management Practices Database To change the BMP database click the Bl button The Database Configuration form will be displayed allowing the user to browse to the Best Management Practices Database Database Configuration X Please select a Best Management Practices database Microsoft SOL Server C Use SQL Server to find the database Server Address Server User ID PO a Use Trusted Server Password Connection Microsoft Access Use Access to find the database Please specify the full path to the MDEB file containing the database Database Path C Program Files WRIA 1_DSS D055_Data go Test Connections Save Changes To browse to a Microsoft Access Best Management Practices Database click the l button An open file dialog will be displayed The default location for the Best Management Practices is C Program Files WRIA 1_DSS DSS_Data Model Manager Databases BestManagementPractices mdb To save the selected database location click the D SaveChanges button Select Land Cover Summary Scenario The Select Scenario form allows the DSS user to select a DSS Scenario ID associated with a summary of land cover contai
94. 2 2913 2914 2915 2916 2917 125 Default values can be restored for the Current Node or All Nodes by clicking on the Edit menu and selecting either Current Node or All Nodes as shown below Periodicity Viewer Editor File gari Current Mode All Modes Restore Defaults Hi ranana Im 77 2 kl ama Blank a l Aiar Dalta This will again bring up the Select the Type of Data to Restore box allowing the user to restore data from the Periodicity and or Distribution databases Copy Save the Distribution and Periodicity Grid To copy the Distribution and Periodicity Grid as shown on the screen press the copy button Al located near the top right hand corner of the Periodicity Viewer Editor form This will copy an image of the Distribution and Periodicity Grid to the clipboard and allow it to be pasted into documents Also the grid may be copied by clicking on the File menu and selecting Copy To save the Distribution and Periodicity Grid press the save button located near the top right hand corner of the Periodicity Viewer Editor form This will open a save dialog box as shown below allowing the user to select a destination and filename for the grid Save the Distribution and Periodicity Grid As The grid will be saved as a bitmap Also the grid may be copied or saved by clicking on the File menu and selecting Copy or Save As as shown below is Edit Copy Save Os Exit Periodi
95. 2007 Once the appropriate dates have been selected the model can be run To run the scenario click the P button If you would like to abort the scenario run click the button to cancel the scenario run When the scenario has completed the DSS user will be asked 1f they would like to view the scenario run log a text file containing messages output by the elements contained in the scenario that has just been run View Log The scenario run has completed Would you like to view the log For this scenario run oe To view the log for the scenario run click the button To decline viewing the scenario log at this time click the Me button The scenario run log is saved for each individual execution of the scenario The log contains information about the user running the scenario their computer and the elements involved in the scenario Each element that runs contributes a segment to the run log including details about input and output files and what actions the element took An example scenario log viewer is shown below Habitat Time Series Model Interface 3271 321 2 3273 3274 3275 3276 3277 3548 3280 3281 3282 144 Scenario Lop Viewer View Logs for Scenario New Scenario id 5 View Scenario Aun 1 171272007 8 39 48 PM run id 15 No Scenario Aun Selected Scenario Information Scenario Aun ID 15 Run Date 1171272007 8 39 48 PM Username Test User Start Date 1717199
96. 25 1026 1027 1028 1029 1030 1031 1032 1033 1034 1035 1036 1037 1038 1039 1040 1041 1042 1043 1044 1045 1046 36 It is useful to export a scenario run log as well and keep it with the exported scenario this is a useful way to tell what data the scenario requires Each model element will list the data files it accesses as a part of the scenario log Custom elements not made by USU may not follow this guideline Editing the Base Data Part of the Scenario Builder database is a table listing all of the base data available to model elements This table contains the data type name and location This data may be edited by clicking on the File menu then selecting Edit Base Data The following screen will appear Edit Base Data Fileld DataType FilePath Landover LandCover C Program Files WRIA4 1_ 05545055 DataGlS DataXords LandUseslulc_calb 5 Drainages Watershed C Program Files W AlA 1_ DS5S4055 DatasGlS Data Shapetles Watershed b 6 gt To Delete Click to the left of the record and press Delete on the keyboard To Adc Scroll to the bottom of the grid and begin entering new data Cerme Add _ Browse Save To change the location of an existing data item click on the row to highlight it click Browse as shown below DE Edit Base Data BAA Fileld DataType FilePath Record Landover LandEower C Program FileswwAlA 1_055055_DatasGlS_DatatGridssLandUseslulc_ cals Drainages Wa
97. 2881 2882 2883 2884 2885 2886 2887 2888 2889 2890 124 Periodicity 1 SPA MAY JUN JUL SUG SEP OCT N Edit the Periodicity EA Species Spring Chinook Litestage Spawning Steam Penodicity 2nd Half of October es Cancel LJ ie Present C Absent C Peak WARNING IF you click Apply the changes will be applied and saved in the database also Using the radio buttons 1n the Periodicity section of the form the selected periodicity Apply value can be changed to Present Absent or Peak To change the data press Note that pressing this button will apply the changes to the on screen view and will also change the Periodicity database as well To return to the Periodicity Viewer Editor form without changing the periodicity data press Cancel Restoring Database Values To restore the default values to the database press the 8591s Defaults button located in the top right hand corner of the Periodicity Viewer Editor form This will bring up the following box allowing the user to choose to restore the Periodicity database the Distribution database or both Select the Type of Data to Restore x Select From Distribution Data Periodicity Data This will restore the data for all the nodes in the database WRIA 1I DSS User s Manual 2891 2892 2893 5895 2896 2897 2898 2899 2900 2901 2902 2903 2904 2905 2906 2907 2908 2909 3917 291
98. 3 1424 1425 1426 1427 1428 1429 1430 1431 1432 53 To save the polygons currently listed in the polygon list click the button A save file dialog will then be displayed allowing the DSS user to select a location to save the polygons data in xml format Add Changed Land Cover Grid to MapWindow View To add the grid containing the land cover changes selected for the polygons to MapWindow s view when the Change Land Cover element is run in the DSS Scenario Builder check the 44d Changed Land Cover Grid ToView box at the bottom of the Change Land Cover form Edit Change Land Cover Settings To edit the settings for the Change Land Cover element the DSS user may click on the Stins button The Land Cover Changer Settings will then be displayed These options are explained in the previous section titled Edit Land Cover Change Scenario Element Settings Accept Discard Land Cover Change Polygons To save the land cover changes selected in the Change Land Cover form click the button The form will then be closed and the land cover changes will be saved in the Change Land Cover element To cancel the land cover changes selected in the Change Land Cover form click the L button The form will then be closed and the land cover changes will be discarded Change Land Cover Example The following example shows how the DSS user can select polygons containing land cover changes Once the Change Land Cover setting
99. 3048 BAGLEY CREEK POINT D Customization General Plot Subsets Avis Font Color Style BREED JE RUBBUL Point Type Solid Circle Line Type yE OF Cancel Help Export Maximize Correlation Analysis The Correlation Analysis tool allows users to perform correlation analysis and multiple time series analysis on water quality data This tool is accessed by clicking on the Correlation Analysis toolbar button The Correlation Analysis form is shown below Time Series Data Analyst Plug in 4024 4025 4026 4027 4028 4029 4030 4031 4032 4033 4034 4035 4036 4037 4038 4039 4040 4041 4042 4043 184 Fa Correlation Plots PH A Correlation Multiple Time Series Correlation Statistics 12203550 WHATCOM CREERE AT EELLIHGHAM VS 12203000 WHATCOM CRERE HEAR BELLINGHAM fags Slope OF RA Squared 0963 s Intercept Pairs Options Log Scale Correlation C Match Exact Date os Match within a Day Time Senes a Lu 4 T T LW wu wo Lu Ww oc T L fam ho Lu W a pm e T W oo W He mm co oO HE co C E 75 100 125 150 12203550 TEWPERATURE WATER DEGREES CENTIGRADE me Aas Station 12203550 WHATCOM CREEK 47 BELLINGHAM Y Anis Station 12203000 WHATCOM CREEK NEAR BELLINGHAM Plot Parameter TEMPERATURE WATER DEGREES CEN TIGRADE TEMPERATURE WATER DEGREES CENTIGRADE
100. 38 Custom Scenario BICMOS eoncensccinasdssewesusesenesctncadecorecaiinaedeqswauitesevasctncadecotecstnesdeneweteven es 4 Land Cover Change Scenario Element ssscccsscccssssssssssssscccccccsssssssssccccccssesssssssees 42 Add Land Cover Change Element to DSS Scenario essseeseceeceeeeeaeeeseeeeeees 42 Add Change Land Cover to DSS Scenario ccccccsssesssseececcceeeeeessseeeeceeesaeeessees 42 Add Land Cover Summarizer to DSS SCenari0 c cc cececcescccceeceeeeeseseeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeees 44 Edit Land Cover Change Scenario Element Settings ccccccccssesseeececeeeeeeeeseeeeeees 46 Select Input Land Cover Grid esses r E 47 SPEEL PONY COnN Shape IE osoen E E EE ETE EIE 48 Select Output Land Cover Grid Dire Clon ys irsassrnintctssrtntarareioneleomoatseierdsenisasseetenls 50 Select Land Cover Change Poly CONS viscccwsscsuscntescecvessssueccesdiatinsssawscaceedeteneswsueesesdeutee 50 Edit Land Cover Summarizer Settings ccccccccccccccccessseseeececeeeeaeaeeeeeceeeeeseaeeeesees 56 Run Land Cover Change Scenario Element snsessssoeenesssssssseerrrsssssssseeressssssseeeeees 60 Water Quantity Model Interface eecccosssssscccccccsssssccceccosssssceccocosssssceccocsssssseeeeesssssss 61 Add Water Quantity Model to DSS Scenario ceccccecccccccceeeeeeseecceeeeeeaaeeeseeeeeess 61 Edit Water Quantity Model Settings cc eecccccccccccceessssseecccceccseesesseeccecesesaeaeseeeeeees 64 Edit Water
101. 4551 212 Database Connection Connection Database Type Access Database C Program Files WAS 1 OSS4055 DatasPHabSim DatasNoo ame Connection String Deny None Persist Security Into Fals uld Connection Test Connection i Use ShapeFile Shapetile Optional shapetile Path C Program Files WAIA _DSSSDSS_Datas gs Station Hame Station am OF Cancel Users will typically not need to modify any of the settings in this form However if a different PHABSIM database or shape file were to be used then this form is where the new database connection information would be assigned Habitat Station Selector The station selector button is used to select different habitat stations where 1 D PHABSIM results data sets are available The stations in this drop down list correspond to stations shown in the main DSS map in the 1D Habitat Sites layer as shown in the following figure WRIA 1I DSS User s Manual 4552 4553 4554 4555 4556 4557 4558 4559 4560 4561 4562 4563 4564 4565 4566 4567 4568 4569 4570 4571 4572 t WRIA 1 Watershed DSS wrial dss mwprj File Edit DSS Plug ins Time Series Reports Help Del amp 8 e EF Sampling Data Water Quantity Control No amp 1D Habitat Sites _ 2D Habitat Sites _ Well Graphs 1 Well Report Documents _ Water Rights POAN Photos _ Weather Stations a _ Streamflow Sampling
102. 476 21 cubic feet Source 3 Source 4 Source 5 Source 6 Source Source 8 Source 9 Sources Sources ml ree Id ource Mame To edit the source name edit the text in the text box to the right of csMame To edit the source type select a type from the drop down menu to the right of 1e To edit the source location select a location from the drop down menu to the right of e Location ID To edit the physical daily maximum withdrawal edit the text in the text box to the right of Physical Daily Max To edit the physical annual maximum withdrawal edit the text in the text box to the right of Physical Annual Max To use the changed water source values click the button To discard the Cancel changed water source values click the button Manage Reservoirs Water Quantity Model Interface 1902 1903 1904 1905 1906 1907 1908 1909 1910 1911 1912 1913 1914 1915 1916 1917 1918 1919 1920 1921 1922 1923 78 When the DSS user creates a new reservoir or edits an existing water user the Edit View Reservoir Control is displayed This allows the DSS user to edit the values for the reservoir Edit Reservoir Reservar Edit ltem Rezervor Mame Drainage Lake Whatcom wat Reservoir Type 1 Instream Water Aight Masimum Storage i 4943 0878490125 acre feet Initial Storage OO acre feet Minimum Storage OO acre feet Maximum In Flow BOS47E 21 OOOO cls Maxinurn Withdrawal BaS47E 21
103. 483 484 485 486 487 488 489 490 491 492 493 494 495 496 497 12 Em AAL Sha Editor Hap Oe at MRDIGA ajil bw a n oal Legend wooo o o o o O Pr 3 Tool Bar OS gfamepding Locations Ca i si r he E a Gat Peo A Preview Map ee ca cc D Parts of the MapWindow Interface The following sections describe each of the major pieces of the MapWindow User Interface Map The map is the window in which roads rivers cities county boundaries water quality stations habitat locations and other spatial data are displayed Legend The legend displays layer groups each of which consists of one or more layers A layer is a coverage of spatially located points lines or polygons that represent geographical information or site locations Each layer may have attribute data associated with it for example a river reach layer may contain attribute information regarding the length average flow elevation and reach geometry for each feature Each layer in the legend can be displayed in the Map view WRIA 1 DSS User s Manual 498 499 500 501 502 503 504 505 506 507 508 509 510 511 512 513 514 515 516 517 518 519 13 Layer Sampling Data Group Ho i Streamflow Samping Locations Layers A Temperature Probes 4 Water Quality Sampling Sites FT In the legend you can turn on and or activate layers A layer is on if it
104. 49 Inputs Input Land Cover Grid Filepath X mM Use Boundaries From Polygon Shapetile Polygon Shapetile Filepath This will enable you to click the button to the right of Polygon shapetile Filepath The Select Shapefile form will then be displayed dr Select Shapefile Sele Select Data Layer f From loaded layers US Forest Service National Parks National Recreation Areas Listed Water Grid Cells Marne Waters Shellfish Harvesting Activities U From Base Data C From file E Cancel To select a shapefile loaded in MapWindow s view click the Frem loaded layers radio button then select the name of the shapefile layer in the layer list To select a shapefile from the DSS base data click the radio button then click the button A base data form will be displayed with Drainages shown Click the button To select a shapefile from file click the Fromfle radio button then click the button An open file dialog will be displayed Browse to a polygon shapefile and click open To save the polygon shapefile that has been selected click the button To discard Cancel the polygon shapefile that has been selected click the button Land Cover Change Scenario Element 1314 1315 1316 1317 1318 1319 1320 1321 1322 1323 1324 1325 1326 1327 1328 1329 1330 1331 50 Select Output Land Cover Grid Directory To select a directory
105. 5 24 column to its desired width Clicking the field name at the top of the table sorts the field in ascending or descending order Information in each of the fields can be changed by clicking in the fields and editing the contents Fields can be either added or deleted using the Add S and Delete X field buttons at the top of the form Fields can be renamed using the Rename Field button oO Records in the table can be selected by clicking on the grey bar at the extreme left of the table In addition once a record or group of records is selected in the table you can use the Show Selected Records button to hide the records that are not selected The last button on the Attribute Table Editor toolbar is the Zoom to Selected Shapes is button When clicked this button zooms the Map view to the shape corresponding to the selected record in the attribute table that you were viewing For additional help see the User s Guide accessible through the All Programs menu under the Start Menu as shown below All Programs d TE Mapwindow gt Map Window 3 1 e Sample Project USA A Log OrF O Shut Dow User s Guide WRIA 1 DSS User s Manual 766 767 768 769 770 771 712 e 774 715 716 TTI 778 119 780 781 782 783 784 785 786 787 788 789 25 Scenario Builder also commonly called Model Manager or DSS Starting the DSS WRIG 1 D55 Double click the WRIA 1 DSS icon on
106. 55 2056 2057 2058 2059 2060 2061 2062 2063 2064 85 Lake Whatcom Water Quality Model Interface The Lake Whatcom Water Quality Model Interface allows the DSS user to specify the input for the Water Quality Model for the Lake Whatcom drainage Add Lake Whatcom Water Quality Model to DSS Scenario To add the Lake Whatcom Water Quality Model to a DSS scenario layout first open the DSS Scenario Builder See Model Manger s User Guide Create a new scenario layout by clicking L Click on the Models tab in the Scenario Builder and then double click on the Lake Whatcom Water Quality Model highlighted in red below g DSS Scenario Builder gt File Elements View Run Hebd 010171930 12 31 1999 Models Fiters Data Editors Other a e WRIA Wide Water Quality Model Lake Whatcom Water Quality Model Sine The Water Quality Model will then be added to the scenario layout Lake Whatcom Water Quality Model Interface 2065 2066 2067 2068 2069 2070 2071 2072 2073 2074 86 DSS Scenario Builder E E E joj x gt Fie Elements view Run Heap lar jorj1990 12 31 1999 Elements Water Quality Scenario Models Filters Data Editors Other WRIA Wide Water Quality Model stop Lake Whatcom Water Quality Model Start Location Finish Location e Water Quantity Model Lake Whatcom Water Luality Model To prepare the Lake Whatcom Water Quality Mo
107. 6 1127 1128 1129 1130 1131 1132 1133 1134 1135 1136 1137 1138 1139 1140 1141 1142 1143 1144 1145 1146 1147 1148 1149 1150 1151 1152 1153 1154 1155 1156 1157 1158 1159 1160 1161 1162 1163 1164 1165 4 Custom Scenario Elements The Scenario Builder has been put together with extensibility in mind New model elements can easily be created using any programming language capable of implementing an interface from a DLL Details about constructing your own scenario elements can be found in the section entitled Model Manager Technical Documentation and Programmer Tutorial How to Create a DSS Model Scenario Builder Model Manager 1166 1167 1168 1169 1170 1171 1172 1173 1174 1175 1176 1177 1178 1179 1180 1181 1182 1183 1184 1185 1186 1187 1188 1189 1190 1191 1192 1193 42 Land Cover Change Scenario Element The Land Cover Change Element allows the DSS user to change the land cover of a land cover grid and create a new summary of land cover within the changed land cover grid The Land Cover Change Element consists of the Change Land Cover element and the Land Cover Summarizer element Add Land Cover Change Element to DSS Scenario The Land Cover Change Element consists of the Change Land Cover element and the Land Cover Summarizer element These elements must both be added to the same DSS Scenario Add Change Land Cover to DSS Scenario To add the Change L
108. 6 6237 6238 6239 6240 6241 292 Habitat Prediction Program Introduction The program predicts habitat values at small streams mean flow lt 130cfs within the Nooksack watershed In general a stream where the proposed technique is expected to work well for all fish and life stages should not experience dramatic changes in substrate and or cover availability from low to high flows The more substrate cover becomes available with increasing flows compared to low flow conditions the more the two approaches are expected to deviate For more information on limitations of this approach see Appendix A For complete description of the technique see Saraeva 2006 http www engineering usu edu uwrl inse nooksack Saraeva Dissertation pdf chapter 3 p 42 Program Setup Folder Pictures has to be in the same folder as the program itself The folder contains images of the western and eastern parts of the watershed that are displayed during the program run The folder is provided with the program Run Program The user is given a choice to predict habitat values at a single node or a number of nodes with MAF of less than 130cfs Figure 1 There are 252 of the 337 nodes with MAF of less than 130 cfs within the watershed Habitat Prediction Sele Would you like to calculate Habitat Values for CO A Number of Modes Cancel Figure 7 Habitat prediction choice WRIA I DSS User s Manual 6242 6243 6244
109. A 1 DSS User s Manual 4688 4689 4690 4691 4692 4693 4694 4695 4696 4697 4698 4699 4700 4701 4702 4703 4704 4705 4706 4707 4708 4709 4710 219 The user may also select multiple species and lifestages to be displayed by checking and unchecking the boxes next to the species and lifestage names in the Species window located along the left hand side of the graph window All of the Suitability Index values apply to every cross section at the selected site so the cross section selector option is not available for this tab Habitat The Habitat tab displays habitat related data for the species selected from the Species dropdown combo box for each of the Predicted Flows The X axis is the distance along the cross section in feet The Y axis on the left side of the plot is dependent on the plot type selected from the Plot Type dropdown combo box For example if the selected plot type is Computational Cell Cross Section Area as seen below then the Y axis values would be the area for the given point along the cross section in square feet ft 2 The units for the Y axis on the right side of the plot are for the cross section geometry elevation given in feet Physical Stage Discharge Longitudinal Profile HSC Habitat Reach WUA Species Comparison Diecharge Comparison Surface Plat Species CHINOOK HOLDING Adult Cell Area Depth SI CHINOOK HOLDING Adult aes Bell Creek Cross Section 1 WLA Cros
110. Any records that the user 5406 deleted on the local database 1 e via models will be recreated and data that was created 5407 onthe local machine again perhaps by models will be left intact 5408 5409 Editing Data Manually 5410 5411 A Launch the DBMS application You must have the Administrative Edition to 5412 continue and you must also know the administration password Terry Holland 5413 may be contacted for these items 5414 5415 B Click the Administration Tools button 5416 UNIVERSITY ix an 4 4 pee 5417 5418 5419 C Enter the password 5420 e ie to access the 5421 WRIA I DSS User s Manual 5422 5423 5424 5425 5426 5427 5428 5429 5430 257 D Next you will be presented with the window below Select the database that you wish to edit by selecting it from the drop down list labeled 1 Select Database J Administration Tools Masfer Server information SQL Server Address Jnooksack uwilusuedu SQL Server Port 22 SQL Server User ID WRAD SAIL ora Pen quebec SSS F Use Trusted Connection Test SQL Server Connection Product Updates Download Location htip nooksack uwl usu edu DBMSSourcey Binary Installers Download Locator htip nooksack uwel usu edu download Database Updates Download Location http nooksack uwr usu edu dbupdatess Save All Changes Edit Data on Master Serve 1 Select Database 2 Select Table to Edit R
111. D Habitat Viewer Plug in 4982 4983 4984 4985 4986 4987 4988 4989 4990 4991 4992 4993 4994 4995 4996 4997 4998 4999 5000 5001 5002 5003 5004 5005 5006 5007 234 By selecting the pan button w located to the right of the Type selector the user may pan around the image displayed in the graph window The user may also zoom in R and zoom out al or zoom to the full extent of the image Miscellaneous Data The Miscellaneous Data tab allows the user to view AVIs showing a movie of the combined suitability for the selected species lifestages at the selected site as well as photographs taken at the selected site and PDF documents detailing the work at each site To select which type of data to view use the arrow to the right of the Media Type selector as shown below Media Type aM x ns POF Photograph AVIs show a background image for the study site and often a photograph of a portion of the site A legend is displayed in the top left hand corner of the screen This shows the color scale used in the AVI to display the Combined Suitability This scale ranges from unsuitable a value of 0 000 as red to highly suitable a value of 1 000 as blue A purple time clock located in the top right hand corner of the window shows which frame is being displayed For a list of flows associated with each frame click the blue link located near the left hand bottom of the screen b Iie oi Flow Frame Inde o
112. D Habitat Viewer button to the toolbar When the toolbar button is clicked the following form will appear In the figure below the different parts of the form are labeled for reference The following sections describe each part of the viewer WRIA 1 DSS User s Manual 209 Hi Print Export fic Visulation Tool Habitat Station Selector Result Data Selector Cross Section Selecto Result Data Set S R s Cross Section IE Physical Stage Discharge Longitudinal Profile HSC Habitat Reach WUA Species Comparison Discharge Comparison Surface F 4 aLa a y E W View Observed Data a cle Graph Tabs Blue Lines ellow gt Red Lines Channel Index Observed Data Orbs Bell Greek Gross Section 3 EES Observed Data D Crees Section Geometry hannel lade Plot Type Discharge cts 4 4 4 4 al a CU Wolpe Aa S 4 x Channel Index Graph Window 4 4 4 axl 1 Destance Tt z BREREHEEEEEEEeEeeD x 4510 1D Habitat Viewer Plug in 4511 4512 4513 4514 4515 4516 4517 4518 4519 4520 4521 4522 4523 4524 4525 4526 4527 210 Parts of the 1D Habitat Viewer Plug in Graph Window The graph window displays the graphs selected using the graph tabs Print Button Use this button to print the current graph in the graph window The print dialog appears as shown in the following figure Options include printer selection paper layout and printing style color mo
113. DI TEMPERATURE WATER DAILY MAXIMUM DEG C CI TEMPERATURE WATER DAILY MINIMUM DEG C ec nchec ance W Check All 7 Uncheck All C 4197 4198 4199 The user will be prompted to supply a file name and location for the output file 4200 containing the summary of records by parameter Save in E Desktop X AA G My Documents 2 g 4 My Computer My Recent Jmy Network Places Documents i File name Water Temperature C by statior z aces 4202 Save as type Text txt v Cancel 4204 The resulting output file lists stations by identification number and the number of 4205 observations of the specified parameter that were made at each station An example 4206 output file is shown below 4207 Water Temperature C by station Notepad File Edit Format View Help Station TEMPERATURE WATER CDEGREES CENTIGRADE 3 1 1 1 3 4 2 I 2 3 1 1 1 I 1 1 4208 WRIA 1 DSS User s Manual 4209 4210 4211 4212 4213 4214 4215 4216 4217 4218 4219 4220 4221 4222 4223 4224 4225 4226 4227 4228 195 Evaluate Criteria The Evaluate Criteria option is activated by clicking on the Evaluate Criteria button on the toolbar Evaluate Criteria NONE Secondary Criterion IN ONE Primary Criterion of observations meeting the Criteria of observations not meeting the Criteria of observations not meeting the Criteria Date Range Criterion Type
114. DSS User s Manual 451 452 453 454 455 456 457 458 459 460 461 462 463 464 465 466 467 468 469 470 471 472 473 474 475 476 477 11 Overview of the MapWindow WIS Interface Opening the Map Window WIS The installation of your WIS program should have placed a shortcut in the Windows Start Menu To open your WIS program click the Start menu lower left corner of screen From the Programs menu select MapWindow and select the MapWindow 3 1 program as shown below J MapwWwindow 3 1 e Sample Project USA Y User s Guide For more information about using this program select the User s Guide from the list shown above WRIAG 1 055 In the case of the Nooksack DSS double click the WRIA 1 DSS icon on the desktop the icon with a red and blue molecule This will open the WRIA 1 DSS Launch Pad window as shown below Press Launch DSS to begin All Programs r fa Map window WRIA 1 DSS Launch Pad Launch DSS f Check for Updates The window contains three frames 1 the Legend 2 the Preview map and 3 the Map It also contains a Menu bar and a Tool bar The following figure may help you understand the MapWindow WIS interface Note Your WIS program may look different than the one below depending on the configuration settings specified by the WIS developer MapWindow Watershed Information System 478 479 480 481 482
115. Data Layer f From loaded layers FromBas Data Add ToView iNone Selected Bal From file Add To view a Drainage ID Field JBSNWRIATA Drainage Mame Field DRAIN_NAME To select a shapefile loaded in MapWindow s view click the From laded wers radio button then select the name of the shapefile layer in the layer list To select a shapefile from the DSS base data click the 84Pa a radio button then click the button A base data form will be displayed with Drainages shown Click the button WRIA 1 DSS User s Manual 2134 2135 2136 2137 2138 2139 2140 2141 2142 2143 2144 2145 2146 2147 2148 2149 2150 2151 DN SZ 2153 2154 2153 2156 2157 2158 2159 2160 2161 2162 2163 2164 2165 2166 2167 2168 91 To select a shapefile from file click the F fle radio button then click the button An open file dialog will be displayed Browse to a polygon shapefile and click open To select the shapefile field to be used for the id choose a field listed in the dropdown list to the right of Panas I Feld To select the shapefile field to be used for the name shoose a field listed in the dropdown list to the right of P3139 Name Field To save the polygon shapefile that has been selected click the button To Cancel discard the polygon shapefile that has been selected click the button Select Drainage To select a drainage contained in the Watershed L
116. Import button in the lower right hand corner of the window 5470 ii Water Quality Data Station 010031 ILE OFF ARCO Data for Station D Station Agency Code Date Depth Parameter C Value Comment _Co QA moo 10EFACOP 8 2A971 OD 480 27 81 null nul m00 10EFACOP 8 21971 163 480 29 02 null nul moa 10EFACOP 8 91971 163 760 1 null nul moa 10EFACOP 8 91971 163 760 1 rill nul moa 10EFACOP 8 91971 163 760 1 null nul moa 10EFACOP 8 96971 327 760 1 null nul mo 10EFACOP 8 94971 327 760 1 null nul moo 10EFACOP 8 99971 327 760 1 null nul 0003 10EFACOP 8 91971 O 760 0 null nul moa 10EFACOP 8 99971 O 760 0 null nul moo 10EFACOP 7A261971 O 760 1 null nul moa 10EFACOP 722671971 O 760 1 null nul moa 10EFACOP 7 26 1971 O 760 1 null nul moa 1OEPACOP 8 21971 O 760 0 null nul m03 10EFACOP 8 21971 163 760 0 null nul moa 10EFACOP 8 24971 OD 760 0 null nul 7 ninna 10E PAC CAE Asso 164 TEN Peali an To Delete Click to the left of the record and press Delete on the keyboard Era Te To Add Scroll to the bottom of the grid and begin entering new data 5471 5472 5473 D This will cause the window below to be displayed which describes the text file 5474 format needed in order to import data You may click the yellow folder icon to 5475 browse for the text file Next select the field delimiter that your text file uses 5476 5477 Records are delimited by
117. It is tied to the tblMediaTypes table for values Media_Filename The location filename of the Photograph that you are working on relative to the database 1 e if the database is located in c 2D Data database mdb and the Photograph that you are working on is located in c 2D Data StationFolderName W lt iscellaneous Photos photofilen ame then the entry StationFolderName Wiscellaneous Photos photofilename Comments Put any comments about the Photograph you are working on that you want a user to know here This value will be displayed when this Photograph is being viewed If this field is left blank then the value None will be displayed instead WUA Data e Copy the WUA file into the WUA folder see folder structure above e Input the WUA information into the database Make an entry in the th WUAFiles table The data to be entered for the database fields are Station ID The value from the Station_ID field in tblStations that corresponds with the station that you are currently working with WUA_Filename The location filename of the WUA file relative to the database i e if the database is located in c 2D Data database mdb and the WUA file is located in c 2D Data StationFolderName W UA wuafilename then the entry StationFolderName W UA wuafilename Appendix B Importing 1D and 2D data from PHABWin_2002 5856 5857 5858 5859 5860 5861 5862 5863 5864 5865 5866 5867 5868 5869 5870 587
118. LIFORM TOT MEMBRANE FILTER IMMED M ENDO MED 35C Station 12203550 WHATCOM CREEK AT BELLINGHAM isd Once a station is selected the available water quality data at that station may be viewed by selecting a water quality parameter from the Plot Parameter pull down box This list is automatically populated with the list of parameters for which data are available at the selected station Restrict Data Range The Date Range pull down boxes allow you to restrict the plots and calculated statistics to a specified data window for analysis such as a single year out of a group of years Date Range Include Month Range Stark 1972 January End 1977 December When a station is selected the date range boxes are automatically populated to correspond with the time period of available data for that station Selecting a subset of the available data is accomplished by selecting a starting year and month and an ending year and month within the range of available data for the selected water quality station Changing the date range restricts the data shown in the plots and in the statistical summaries described below Statistical Summary Data Sources Plot Options Plot Enhancements and Notes These five tabs in the Options frame to the right of the plot window provide access to several different options Information in each of these tabs is accessed by clicking on the desired tab at the top of the control Each tab is described below
119. LINGHAM l Plot Parameter TEMPERATURE WATER DEGREES CENTIGRADE l Station 12203000 WHATCOM CREEK NEAR BELLINGHAM v Plot Paramete TEMPERATURE WATER DEGREES CENTIGRADE v Formatting display and exporting options can be accessed by right clicking on the plot window These options are the same as those described for the main Time Series Analyst Multiple Time Series Analysis The Multiple Time Series Analysis tool allows the user to plot multiple time series of water quality on the same set of axes and 1s activated by clicking on the Multiple Time Series button hs on the toolbar When the Multiple Time Series Analysis tool is activated the window shown below will indicate that no stations are selected and the plot window will have no data displayed WRIA 1 DSS User s Manual 4075 4076 4077 4078 4079 4080 4081 4082 4083 4084 4085 4086 4087 187 pie Multiple Time Series Sets fl Options Plot Type f 1 Parameter Multiple Stations Add Remove Fr oy ff TP ey Fr F fo PE Options m 9 00 9 25 9 50 9 75 10 25 70 50 11 00 H a a 10 00 i 10 75 ed Date Range Include Month A ange Start End The user can choose to plot either one parameter at multiple stations or multiple parameters at a single station by clicking on the appropriate Plot Type option in the Options frame located on the right side of the form an Options Plot Type f 1 Param
120. Layer f From loaded layers Photos Water Aights POW Well Report Documents Well Graphs 2D Habitat Sites 10 Habitat Sites Water Quantity Control Nodes Temperature DO Nodes ags Warnings C From file BI Cancel If the Temperature Flags and Warnings shapefile has already been added as a layer it can be selected from the loaded layers list as shown above Otherwise click the From file radio button and enter the pathname or press the browse button we to bring up the Open Point Shapefile form as shown below Open Point Shapefile Look in Shapefiles do E A ka OO Flags Warnings shp O e TANTER MEERA S My Recent e Temperature DO Nodes Documents Desktop My Documents Places My Metwork File name T emp Flags_W arnings shp Z Files of type ESAI Shapefiles shp Cancel Temperature and Dissolved Oxygen Flags Model Interface 3521 3522 3523 3524 3525 3526 3527 3528 3529 3530 3531 3532 3533 3534 3535 3536 3537 3538 3539 3540 3541 3542 158 This same shapefile should be used every time the model is run since it is updated with the temperature data for the selected nodes The shapefile used must have the same formatting as the Temp_Flags_Warnings shp file or the model will not run successfully Select DO Flags and Warnings Shapefile The model also writes DO data flags and warnings to a shapefile This shapefile and its selection process a
121. Legend Numeric Precision Plotting Method Data Shadows b Grid Options eU Include Data Labels Mark Data Points Maximize Customization Dialog Export Dialog h Help This brings up the Customization Dialog window as shown below In general this window has several tabs that allow further manipulation and customization of the plot window Note that these tabs may vary depending on what type of plot is being customized Not all options are available for all plot types and in some cases the order of tabs will vary Again the following is a general description of most of the plot options available through the Customization Dialog window WWU95 DH 3 Drayton Harbor Customization General Plot Subsets Aus Fort Color Style Main Title ww L 95 DH 3 Drayton Harbor a Sub Tithe Border Style Humeric Precision C No Border C Line c c e e Shadow C 30 Inzet Viewing Stile Grid Lines f Color f Both Coy f amp f None f Monochrome Gridin front of data f Monochrome Symbols Font Size C Lange Medium C Small OF Cancel Help Export Maximize Regardless of which of the tabs are selected the buttons along the bottom of the window perform the same functions Pressing OK will accept the selected options and return the user to the plot window Pressing Cancel discards the selected options and returns the user to the plot window Time Series Data Analyst Plug i
122. Manual 5334 5335 5336 5337 5338 5339 5340 5341 5342 5343 5344 5345 5346 5347 5348 5349 5350 5351 5352 5353 5354 5355 5356 5357 5358 253 You may also move the Launch Report window out of the way of the main MapWindow screen and select drainages using the mouse To do this the Drainages layer must be selected and you must be using the Select Shapes tool o Hold the Ctrl key while selecting multiple drainages with the mouse clicking a drainage that s already selected will deselect it As drainages are selected or deselected from the map the list in the Launch Report window will be updated Note that doing this does not permanently change the contents of the aggregation but only selects drainages for the report You may also select drainages to report on without first selecting an aggregation by using the map to select drainages Je WRIA 1 Watershed DSS wrial dss mwprj File Edit O55 Plug ins Time Series Reports Help County Boundaries Major Roads State Municipal Boundaries Airports C Comprehensive Plan Zoning El Water Features Water Bodies Culverts ra A Beaches and Lakes F Launch Re port i L s k t ia T ek a Foy E A 4 ea Predefined Agqgregations Selected Dranages C Shellfish Harvesting Acti Bellingham Bay Academy si Marine Waters Birch Bay Area Agate Bay Drayton Harbor Anderton w
123. Multiple Well Graphs More than one well graph can be displayed on the bar graph at one time by selecting more than one Well ID number from the list in the Well ID window as shown below To select more than one well click on the well ID number for the first well to be viewed Well Log Data Viewer Plug In 5184 5185 5186 5187 5188 5189 5190 5191 5192 5193 5194 5195 5196 5197 5198 244 then hold the Ctrl control key on the computer keyboard while clicking on each additional well ID If the desired wells are listed contiguously click on the first well ID then hold the Shift key on the computer keyboard and select the last well ID desired Selected well ID numbers will be highlighted in the window Graphs for selected wells will appear in the graph window and the associated key to soil rock layers will update automatically fs Well Log Data Viewer re File Options Well Log Data Clay Gravel Pebbles Gravel Pebbles Clay water gt GraveliPebbles Vater EE Hard pan GraveliPebbles Gravel Pebbles Clay EE Shale B Coal Shale Sand Gravel Pebbles E Sandstone BE Shale Vater Depth Ft mael Logs Mumber of Wells 2523 J Copy to Clipboard Exporting Graphs Copy to Clipboard Click on the ________ button to add the graph and associated key to the clipboard From the clipboard the graph and key can be pasted into a report or other document and printed WRIA 1I D
124. My Documents My Computer My Network File name vwial 33 mpr Places Files of type Maptwfindow Project mwpri Cancel You may get a warning message that one or more databases could not be found If so the following section titled Changing the Database Configuration will help you fix this problem If you do not get an error message you may proceed to the section titled Starting the Report Generator Plug in Changing the Database Configuration If one or more of the databases for the Report Generator cannot be found you will be presented with the screen below Watershed Characterization Report Generator 5294 5295 5296 5297 5298 5299 5300 5301 5302 5303 5304 5305 250 Database Configuration The Report Generator plug in expects to find three databases Reportlenerator Streamflow and WaterLuality These databases are expected to be found in SOL Server or Access Please select which database system you wish to use and provide the necessary options to connect to tt Microsoft SOL Server e Use SOL Server to find the databases Server Address local Server User ID Use Trusted it Server Password Connection Microsoft Access C Use Access to find the databases Please specify the full path to the MOB file containing each of the following databases The filename may be the same for more than one Report Generator IC Dev Report Generator Access Version g Stre
125. NE FILTER IMMED M ENDO MED 35C 1973 5411 4000 4993 3310 100 20000 COLOR PLATINUM COBALT UNITS 1977 24 36 07 26 01 6 180 NITRATE NITROGEN TOTAL MG L AS N 1973 0 27 0 2235 0 3194 0 16 0 8 NITRITE NITROGEN TOTAL MG L AS N 1973 0 01013 0 008 0 007124 0 009006 0 005 0 04 NITRITE PLUS NITRATE TOTAL 1 DET MG L AS N 1977 0 4246 0 345 0 3001 0 3224 0 06 1 1 NITROGEN AMMONIA TOTAL MG L AS N 1977 0 1026 0 07 0 07889 0 08237 0 03 0 36 OXYGEN DISSOLVED MG L 1977 11 10 7 1 271 10 93 8 9 13 6 PH STANDARD UNITS 1977 7 617 7 6 0 2697 7 612 fe 8 6 PHOSPHATE ORTHO MG L AS PO4 1977 0 04172 0 03 0 02877 0 03305 lt BDL gt 0 15 PHOSPHORUS DISSOLVED ORTHOPHOSPHATE MG L AS FP 1977 0 01277 0 01 0 006994 0 01097 0 001 0 04 PHOSPHORUS TOTAL MG L AS FP 1977 0 05638 0 04 0 05148 0 0435 0 01 0 28 SPECIFIC CONMIICTANCE Ih ICh fa ORC 1977 1927 415 999 1197 BA nd 4 b Data Selection Station 12203550 WHATCOM CREEK AT BELLINGHAM l Date Range Condition Include Month Range Number of observations lt 47 Start fi 372 z x aoe z Number of observations gt 23 End fi of v December v Update Summary 4 1 6 6 V Use Censored Data 4168 The table provides descriptive statistics listed as column headings at the top of the table 4169 for each water quality parameter listed as row headings on the left side of the table for 4170 the selected station Again stations for analysis are selected using the Station pull
126. OMmAANNA BW Ne 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 WRIA 1 DSS USER MANUAL Table of Contents DiS CaP Vy ROL eT DSS oisinnean inar E ES ESEA 1 Stanne He Ti SCAT Ossie ss ersatsassnepetsceesuetssearsawetiqeeseuctasanaeiehictbe E sanciqisvoustiaisuceatetiwsusenee l NETFramework Installat ON scoenen ei OR nE RSi 2 TOn WN E O a E ES 4 S 0G E E A E E E A EE E A ET TE 5 S oc a a E EE E E E E E E E E E 6 Installs te Pordoi Comple srecne E ES 7 Microsoft SQL Server Desktop Edition Installation ccccsseseseececeeeceaeeeesseeeeees 7 PRS OO PE E E dase E E A EET E E E E 8 Restonne DAL AD ASC Sesiones E E EE 9 Poal oC onle e a o a E a E E E uns 9 MapWindow Watershed Information System cccccsssscsccccccssssssssssssssssssssssssscees 10 Overview of the MapWindow WIS Interface ccccccccssssssseeceeceeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeees 11 Opening the M pWindow WIS sessieiciseinseiiesn ee EE Eae 11 Parts of the MapWindow Interface 0 cc cecccsceccceccceeessseeccceecessaeesseeececeeessaaenseeeeess 12 Mape A E E E T A E E A E genes 12 E SN E E E A E S 12 Leena EO ea r E E O 13 PESEN M a E sgt ac ose eee sngedae eganeeea sage lseunewen screeds 15 ie ere ie gles Hoag 610 keane ae eee ee ee ee eee ee 15 TAO MOOS scr tertactseiss san eanst sce E T E A 16 DAY OOS N E E E E eee etctacennt E E eseateaate cece E E T 17 Customizing the MapWindow WIS Intertace ccccccssssesseeccceeeee
127. Ouantity Model TOUTS ssriisctastaceectsssacatiucrscauissatablacatescustacebassscasbet tele 65 Edit Water Quantity Model Outputs 200 0 eccccccccccccceesseeeecceceeeseeeeeseeeeceeeseeeeeesees 81 Run Water Quantity Model eccccccccccccesssseseeeceeceeeaesesseeeceeeesseaeeeseeeeeeeeeesaaeeseeeeeees 84 Lake Whatcom Water Quality Model Interface sscccccscsssssssssscssccccccccssssscscees 85 Add Lake Whatcom Water Quality Model to DSS Scenario ccccccccessseeeeeeeeees 85 Edit Lake Whatcom Water Quality Model Settings ccssseeseeeeeeceeeeeeeeseeeeeees 88 Edit Lake Whatcom Water Quality Model Inputs cc ccessseeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeees 88 Edit Lake Whatcom Water Quality Model Outputs ccccssesseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 99 Run Lake Whatcom Water Quality Model ccccccccsssssseeccceeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeees 100 WRIA Wide Water Quality Model Interfacce sssscssccccssssssssssscsccccsccscssssceees 102 Add WRIA Wide Water Quality Model to DSS Scenario cc eeeececceeeeeeeeeeeeeees 102 Edit WRIA Wide Water Quality Model Settings 200 0 ecceccccccccessseseeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeees 105 Edit WRIA Wide Water Quality Model Inputs ec cecccccccesssseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 105 Edit WRIA Wide Water Quality Model Outputs 0 0 ccccccccsssseeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 113 Run WRIA Wide Water Quality Model 0 0 ecccccccccccsssssseeeceeeeeesaeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeaeeneees 114 Periodicity Viewe
128. Path C Program FilesSWRIA 1_DSSS055_Data g Test Connectionis Save Changes To browse to a Microsoft Access Water Quality Parameters database click the l button An open file dialog will be displayed The default location for the WRIA Wide Water Quality Parameters Database is C Program Files WRIA 1_DSS DSS_Data Model Manager Databases WRIA WideWQParameters mdb To save the selected database location click the _ SaveChanges button Edit WRIA Wide Water Quality Model Outputs The Output tab allows the user to view edit the output settings for the WRIA Wide Water Quality Model To change the settings for a particular output select the button to the right of the output setting Fal Water Quality Model Inputs E Ioj x Water Quality Output Directoy C Program Filesww AlA 1_D0554Model 7 ung WRIA Wide Water Quality Model Interface 2641 2642 2643 2644 2645 2646 2647 2648 2649 2650 2651 2652 2653 2654 2655 2656 2657 2658 2659 2660 2661 2662 2663 2664 2665 114 To save the changes to the settings that have been made in the outputs form click the button To cancel the changes to the settings click the cei button Select Water Quality Output Directory The Select Directory form allows the DSS user to select a directory for the Water Quality Model output To access this form select the l button to the right of Water Quality Output Directory on the Output tab
129. Practices mdb To save the selected database location click the _____SaveChanges__ button Select Land Cover Grid The Select Land Cover Grid form allows a DSS user to select a land cover grid for the Water Quality Model To access this form press the button to the right of Land Cover Grid on the Input tab of the Water Quality Model Inputs window as shown below G X Input Output Best Management Practices BRP Selected bal Land Cover Grid lule_ cal bgd l X Lake Whatcom Grids Input Direction This will open the Select Land Cover Grid from as shown below The default location for the WRIA 1 Land Cover Grid is C Program Files WRIA 1_DSS DSS_Data GIS_Data Grids LandUse lulc_cal5 bgd WRIA 1 DSS User s Manual 2233 2234 2255 2236 2231 2238 2259 2240 2241 2242 2243 2244 2245 2246 2247 2248 2249 2250 2231 2232 2253 2254 95 de Select Land Cover Grid ioj x Select Data Layer From loaded layers FromBase Data Add To View iN one Selected E i From file P Add To view A To select a grid loaded in MapWindow s view click the Fomleadedlevers radio button and then select the name of the grid layer in the layer list To select a grid from the DSS base data click the Fom Base Data radio button then click the button A base data form will be displayed with LandCover shown Click the button To select a grid from file click th
130. SS User s Manual 5199 5200 5201 5202 5203 5204 5205 5206 5207 5208 5209 Viewing Well Report Documents Scanned well report documents can be viewed using the Well Log Data Viewer te Well Log Data Viewer File Options Yell Logs Number of Wells 6967 yj ain v lh mem dd E a I ep Se TL Ge D OMA FU a r a EE Hna aa RE T tps Gace ru fight aw tHe ATER PEL REPORT Welt oT in Src Ay san oT Ri WF La Ty ne Le Ail WIR LLERS Of Co eee eee ie re ee oe oO sels a b ie DLT Tea hes H gt ips iE S T ar PENA NNMMGEFSI FE ORCI n e sra ae ee a ere zmrd m Batis Eike Ih oT F r Tee damer os r EEEn Ae a am m mi i are u m m LHn hH TATT hi aigh kaa FEINT i da e ie Tate ET ni Pash dion h faa a anin grasa 1 iamli jarr amp dl ible j iy Are zani E erar ory 1 nar se rp Pt Ls Zan a i mas A AARE ii ru re Ea E matce T7 aris Lore zrem KES One wde lpm a mla am ni EEE f Ee ee A ET prr ow ar ey D er PN Wu mre Lm rhor a Tet Dar win nr lai M ia bhu Ie ee a p Uri pim bop Fr arla LIL el TETIT ET a Aila TET m dhe a at Ih wir m 2 oi l ut OR ed Fe Val ra rka FAB Te Sb ees PA ENTI RAE ren nw mw Kee ts ETPA si Sac hee HE u pi we fat Kania er ee enda ee ae CE a a m Te am m anaE a E I ARL PTET TAI DH IE YTA r Fa ba u e rih k uba AHi mobi rih raaa am a a ma om oe kb lhm m hun u urme a ikampa Ina
131. Shapefie C Program Files WAI4 1 0555055 DatayGlS Date Shapetiless Model odes PenodicityNodes shp To change the Model Nodes Shapefile used in the Habitat Time Series Model click the browse 5 button to the right of the Model Nodes Shapefile pathname The following WRIA 1 DSS User s Manual 3084 3085 3086 3087 3088 3089 3090 3091 3092 3093 3094 3095 3096 3097 3098 3099 3100 3101 3102 3103 3104 3105 3106 135 form will appear allowing the user to select a different shapefile from the loaded layers or from file Select A Model Nodes Shape Select Data Layer From loaded layers Streamflow Sampling Locations Weather Stations Well Report Documents Well Graphs 2D Habitat Sites 10 Habitat Sites Penodicity Hodes C From file wal Cancel To select a Model Nodes Shapefile from the layers currently loaded in the DSS select the f From loaded layers option and select a layer from the list as shown above To select a Model Nodes Shapefile from file select the Fromfile option and enter the Ss entire file pathname in the box below or press the browse button to navigate to the desired file location f From file C Program FilesswAl 1_OSS4D5 OF Once a layer or file has been selected press ok to accept the shapefile and continue To return to the Habitat Time Series Model Parameters form without selecting a new Model Nodes shapefile press nae The
132. Slanetk Acuis _ Slornatk Laras Midge Larm ac Blat k Lamar mE T True Fly Adults iC ipte ra 5087 5088 Macroinvertebrate Data Viewer 240 5089 Viewing Sample Information 5090 5091 Click on the Sample Information tab to view a summary table of information pertaining 5092 to sample collection including site name sample name sample type initials of 5093 sampler time in and out velocity in and out site coordinates net area bed area and mesh 5094 size Use the horizontal scroll bar at the bottom of the window to view all information 5095 for a sample 5096 mT Macroinvertebrate Data Viewer Cite anderson Creek Sample MA 1 Benthic Raw Data Size Distribution Density Sample Information Site Hame Sample Hame sample Type Initials Time In Time Out Anderson Creek MA 1 Benthic benthic JN 5097 5098 5099 5100 5101 5102 5103 5104 5105 5106 5107 5108 5109 5110 5111 5112 5113 5114 5115 5116 5117 5118 5119 5120 WRIA 1 DSS User s Manual 241 5121 5122 Well Log Data Viewer Plug in 5123 5124 The Well Log Data Viewer Plug in to the DSS allows users to view well graphs and 5125 scanned well report documents A database of well data is linked to a geographic 5126 coverage showing the locations at which water well reports and well log data are 5127 available 5128 5129 Viewing well graphs 5130 5131 Well log data is displayed on a bar graph that shows well log d
133. Statistical Summary Microsoft Internet Explorer File Edit View Favorites Tools Help p gt x a A P Search Pp Favorites E2 Address C Documents and Settings peggy Local Settings Temp tmp1D html Be m Ld Time Series Statistical Summary Station 12203550 WHATCOM CREEK AT BELLINGHAM Range Number OF Mean Median Standard Geometric Deviation Mean Number Of E Observations BDL Minimum Maximum Dates COLIFORM TOT MEMBRANE 1972 FILTER MMED M ENDO MED 23 5411 4000 4993 3310 350 1973 COLOR PLATINUM COBALT 1972 UNITS 4 1977 34 81 24 36 07 26 01 6 180 NITRATE NITROGEN TOTAL 1972 MG L AS N 23 1973 0 373 0 27 NITRITE NITROGEN TOTAL 1972 MG L AS N 23 19730 01013 0 008 0 007124 NITRITE PLUS NITRATE 1976 TATAT TOUT MAT ASKA 24 1077 0 4246 0 345 0 3001 zj Done 0 2235 0 3194 0 16 0 8 0 009006 0 005 0 04 0 3224 0 06 1 1 4 My Computer To create a summary of records by parameter for all stations click on E This will bring up the Parameter List as shown below Select the parameters of interest using the check boxes Click when finished Time Series Data Analyst Plug in 194 S Parameter List Seles Parameter CO TEMPERATURE AIR DALY MAMMUM DEG C TEMPERATURE AIR DAILY MINIMUM DEG C TEMPERATURE SUMMER DEG CENT PERMIT TEMPERATURE WATER DEGREES CENTIGRADE I TEMPERATURE WATER DEGREES FAHRENHEIT I TEMPERATURE WATER DAILY AVERAGE DEG C
134. TOTAL MG L AS MI NITRITE NITROGEN TOTAL MGL AS M NITRITE PLUS NITRATE TOTAL 1 DET MG L AS M NITROGEN AMMONIA TOTAL MG L AS M OXYGEN DISSOLVED MGL PH STANDARD UNIT Si PHOSPHATE ORTHO MGL AS PO4 PHOSPHORUS DISSOLVED ORTHOPHOSPHATE MG L AS F PHOSPHORUS TOTAL MaL AS F SPECIFIC CONDUCTANCE UMHOSCM Gi 250 TEMPERATURE WATER DEGREES CENTIGRADE TURBIDITY JACKSON CANDLE UNITS Parameter Identifier Data Selection Date Range Option Include Month Range 5 e Station 12203550 WHATCOM CREEK AT BELLINGHAM a 1372 x January El End 1 J77 r December 4116 4117 4118 4119 The plot shown above will automatically be generated for the selected Water Quality 4120 station in the Station pull down box on the main Time Series Analyst form From this 4121 form users can select and generate summaries for any of the water quality stations in the 4122 database by choosing stations from the Station pull down box Water quality parameters 4123 are listed on the Y axis with the X axis representing the number of water quality 4124 observations at the selected station 4125 4126 Select the Time Distribution tab to view the time distribution of water quality 4127 observations for each parameter at the selected station Again the water quality 4128 parameters are listed on the Y axis but in this plot the X axis represents the date an 4129 observation was made Points on the plot represent an observati
135. The Summary tab shown below provides descriptive statistics for the data shown in the plot window These descriptive statistics are automatically updated each time a new Time Series Data Analyst Plug in 172 3817 station is selected when a new date range is selected using the data range restrictors 3818 when a data point is removed from the plot or when an agency is turned on or off using 3819 the Data Sources tab The Copy Summary button at the bottom of this tab allows the user 3820 to copy the statistical summary to the clipboard so that it can be pasted into a table or 3821 document 3822 3823 An additional option at the bottom of this form allows you to consider any censored data 3824 n the calculation of the descriptive statistics Clicking on the check box turns this option 3825 on and the statistics are re calculated taking into account any below detection limit 3826 values in the database 3827 QB Options Plot Enhancements Data Sources Notez Summary Plat Options Statistics Arithmetic Mean 501 Geometric Mean 30 Maximum 20000 Minimum 100 Standard Deviation 4993 Coefficiant of Variation 24936 07 Quantiles 104 75 eo 200 Median 50 400 roo ai 1 1E 0 Of Observations Tad Of Censored Data Copy Summary Dewe Use censored data in summary statistics 3828 3829 WRIA 1 DSS User s Manual 3830 3831 3832 3833 3834 3835 3836 3837 3838 3839 3840 3841 3842
136. U4 looking ds SFB O4 looking 2D Habitat Viewer Plug in 5033 5034 5035 5036 5037 5038 5039 5040 5041 5042 5043 5044 5045 5046 5047 5048 5049 5050 5051 5052 236 Macroinvertebrate Data Viewer The Macroinvertebrate Data Viewer Plug in to the DSS allows the user to see all of the macroinvertebrate data listed by site and sample Data may only be viewed not changed Viewing Macroinvertebrate Data Load the Macroinvertebrate Data Viewer plug in by clicking on the Macroinvertebrate Data Viewer toolbar button EA The Macroinvertebrate Data Viewer form will appear as shown i Macroinvertebrate Data Viewer Gite Anderson Creek z Sample MA 1 Benthic Raw Data Size Distribution Density Sample Information f Show count for full sample Subsample extended f Show count for fraction of sample Fraction subsampled 100 00 4 Group 1 2 mm 2 4 mm 4 6 mm 6 8 mm 2 10 mm 10 mm and up Mayfly Larvae 2 if Stonefly Larvae Midge Larvae Caddistl Larvae Beetle Larvae Midge Pupae Click on the arrow on the right side of the Site window to reveal a drop down box listing all sites for which macroinvertebrate data was collected Use the scroll bar to view the list and select a site by clicking on its name Click on the arrow on the right side of the Sample window to see a list of all samples collected for the selected site Scroll through the list to find the sample of interest and
137. Viewer Points from the Map First make sure that the Photos theme is turned on checked and active selected El Sampling Data Vater Quantity Control Mo d 1D Habitat Sites 2D Habitat Sites Yell Graphs Yell Report Documents Vater Rights Pov Weather Stations Streamflow Sampling Loca is Temperature Probes Vater Quality Sampling Sit J Gt Gs m A Ba ail Next use the Zoom R on w and Pan W Tools to locate the area of interest on the map Additional Zoom tools are accessed by clicking on the black arrow as shown RAJAS lt E Previous GA Next al Max Extents S Layer wg Selected T Shape Using the select tool 4 points can be selected by either clicking on individual stations or by clicking and dragging a box around one or several locations Selecting points from the Photo points theme will load the photographs for those selected locations into the Photo Viewer form shown above Photo Viewer Plug in 4350 4351 4352 4353 4354 4355 4356 4357 4358 4359 4360 4361 4362 4363 4364 4365 4366 4367 4368 4369 4370 4371 4372 4373 4374 202 Viewing Photographs via the Photo Viewer Toolbar Button As an alternative to selecting points using the map clicking the Photo Viewer toolbar button E opens the Photo Viewer and loads the entire database of photographs into the Photo Viewer form shown above If this button is not available on the toolbar select the Plug ins menu and
138. Waste Water Treatment Plant ID 1 To use the changed return flow values click the button To discard the changed return flow values click the __ Cancel button WRIA 1I DSS User s Manual 1967 1968 1969 1970 1971 1972 1973 1974 1975 1976 1977 1978 1979 1980 1981 1982 1983 1984 1985 1986 81 Manage Monthly Demand When the DSS user creates a new monthly demand or edits an existing monthly demand the Edit View Monthly Demand Control is displayed This allows the DSS user to edit the values for the monthly demand Edit Monthly Demand Monthy Demand Edit ltem Honth Demand MonthlyDemand3 Monthly Demand Name Monthly Demand Monthly emandd Month Demands Month 1 l Month 7 Month 2 Month amp Month 3 Month 9 Month 4 l Month 10 Month 5 Month 11 Month 6 Month 12 To edit the monthly demand name edit the text in the text box to the right of Monthly Demand Name To edit the monthly demand values for a month edit the text in the text box to the right of athi for Month 1 in this example To use the changed monthly demand values click the button To discard the changed monthly demand values click the cei button Edit Water Quantity Model Outputs The outputs tab of the Water Quantity Model Settings allows the DSS user to edit the outputs for the Water Quantity Model Water Quantity Model Interface 1987 1988 1989 1990 199 1992 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 82
139. a a Low Intensity Residential 31 A900 Impervious Fraction E 1791 1792 1793 To edit the impervious fraction change the value in the textbox to the right of 1794 Imperious Fraction To save the impervious fraction that has been entered click the 1795 button To discard the impervious fraction that has been entered click the 1796 button 1797 1798 Edit Scenario XML File Agricultural Drainage Values 1799 1800 The Agricultural Drainage form allows the DSS user to edit the Agricultural Drainage 1801 values for a WRIA 1 Drainage These values are then stored in the scenario XML file 1802 Agricultural Drainage Siz x Agricultural Drainage Tile Coeff inches day 271 391581 Drainage Ditch Coeff finches day 0 0840051 0187 LULC Description Area acres Tile Drained Fraction Ditch Drained Fraction Orchards vineyards 126 320159 0 04680257675156 0 3451696087997 206 Grasslands Herbaceous 106 082246 0 04680257675156 0 3451696087997 206 Pasture Hap 11640 3582 0 04680257675156 0 3451696087997 20 Row Crops 599 353972 0 04680257675156 0 34516956087997 26 Small Grairis 561 101693 0 04680257675156 0 3451696087997 20 Fallow O444 70929 0 04660257675156 0545769608799 265 Urban Recreational Grasses 15 7900199 0 04680257675156 UO S451 69608799 26 Dairy 5293 185395 0 04680257675156 O S457 69608799 26 Double click a row to edit the row s values 18
140. a new folder name If the user chooses to save the output in the Habitat database the user will be prompted to open the database It should be noted that even though both extrapolated WUA in sq feet 1000ft and percent of maximum habitat are written into the database only percent of maximum habitat values that show the shape of the WUA curves have been proven to provide meaningful results Extrapolate to a Single Node If the user chooses to extrapolate to a single node the next window will request the user to either enter the node number or will offer to show a map Figure 8 w Output Choice Sel Would you like to save extrapolated WUA In the C Habitat Database Cancel Figure 7 Output choice Appendix C Extrapolation Program User Manual 6133 6134 6135 6136 6137 6138 6139 6140 6141 6142 6143 6144 6145 6146 6147 6148 6149 6150 6151 6152 6153 6154 6155 6156 6157 6158 6159 288 w Target Site Node Number Would you like to C Enter the node number OR See the map Figure 8 Choosing the target site node number 6 Enter the Node Number Option If the first option is chosen Enter the node number the user will be prompted to enter the node number If the user enters an invalid node number a message will be displayed asking to reenter the node number Extrapolation can only be carried out to the nodes other than USU study sites If the entered node corre
141. a new line carriage return linefeed 5478 WRIA 1 DSS User s Manual 261 J Import Water Quality Data Please select the text file to import The file must contain the fields delimited by the selected delimeter the fields must appear in the following order Station Agency Code Date Depth Parameter Code Walue Comment Code WAQC Code Data Code Source Database File Hame Delimeter Preview Import Progress 5479 5480 5481 E Once the text file and delimiter are selected you may click Preview If you 5482 selected the wrong delimiter all data will show up in the first column 5483 fi Import Water Quality Data Please select the text file to import The file must contain the fields delimited by the selected delimeter the fields must appear in the following order Station Agency Code Date Depth Parameter Code Walue Comment Code WAQC Code Data Code Source Database File Marne C zample Hes wiqdata tut D elimeter Comma Progress 5484 5485 5486 F Clicking preview will cause the window below to appear This is intended to 5487 show what data is about to be imported Only the first 10 rows will be shown 5488 Once you have made sure that the data about to be imported is correct and is what 5489 was intended close the window returning to the Import window In this preview 5490 window you may resize the columns by positioning the mouse bet
142. abs is described in the following sections Other Features There are also Menu Options available Under the File menu you can Copy Save or Print the current graph or you can Exit the Viewer These exporting functions can also be accessed through the Export Button Under the Help menu you can launch and view the User s Manual this document Finally under the Options menu you can launch the Database Connection form the same as pressing the Database Connection Button 1D Habitat Viewer Plug in 4573 4574 4575 4576 4577 4578 4579 4580 4581 4582 4583 4584 4585 4586 4587 4588 4589 4590 4591 214 PHabSim 1D Data Visualization Tool Graphs The PHabSim 1D Data Visualization Tool includes nine tabs allowing the user to view various plots of the 1D data Each of these tabs is descried in detail in the following sections Physical The Physical tab shows a scaled view of the selected cross section geometry The X axis is the distance across the cross section in feet The Y axis on the right side of the graph is the elevation of the bed in feet The Y axis on the left hand side of the graph displays the units and scale for the Plot Type selected using the Plot Type Selector box shown below The Plot Type selected for this graph is Channel Index PHabSim 1D Data Visulation Tool Fie Options Help sa ARF Habitat Staton ERINES Result Data Set iis Cross Section A x Physical Stage Discharge Longitu
143. ag Model Parameters Inputs Stream Response Model Output Folder C Program Files W ALS 1_ O55 4Model Aun StreamA esponsew orking sy ALAM idel nputs Loads Watershed Loading Model Output T ext Fie C Program Files Al4 1 05S Model Aune StreamA esponsey orking 4A Law idel utputs Coarse utput tet Hodel Nodes Shapefie LP rogram Filles vv HIA 1 0554055 Data GlS Data Shapetiles Temp DO Nodes T emperature_ DO kades shra Hode lD FieldName STATION Select Hodes Selected Nodes Default All Nodes Outputs Output Temperature and DU Database C Program Files tw AIA 10555055 Data TempO 0D ata Temperature OO mdb Temperature Flags and Warnings Shapefile LOPTOgran Flees AIA 1 0554055 Data alS Data Shapetiles Temp DO Nodes T emp Flags arn inat thri DO Flags and arnings Shapetie CAFrogam Files VAI 1 D0555055 Data Gl5 Data Shapetiless Temp DO Nodes 00 Flags Ww amin ne hn OF Cancel Edit Temperature and DO Flags Model Settings The inputs for the Temperature and DO Flags Model include the following Stream Response Model Outputs Folder Watershed Loading Model Output Text File Model Nodes Shapefile Node ID Field Name and Select Nodes Each of these options may be edited in the Inputs section of the Temperature and DO Flags Model Parameters form How to edit each of these options is discussed in the following section titled Edit Temperature and DO Flags Model Inputs The output optio
144. allowing the user to view the map To select a node from the map the desired node shapefile layer must be active and selected This layer must be the same shapefile entered in the Model Nodes Shapefile section described above If the user attempts to select nodes from a shapefile other than the one entered in the Model Nodes Shapefile section and error will occur To select nodes the user must use the Select Shapes tool 4 In the example shown below nodes from the Temperature DO Nodes layer are being selected WRIA 1 Watershed DSS wria1 dss mwprj Fie Edit D55 Plug ins Time Series Help D0 salst a E MR AlQ S Oa m BZ oM Sampling Data a H Temperature _DO_Nodes Water Quantity Control No amp 1D Habitat Sites amp 2D Habitat Sites amp _ Well Graphs 8 _ WellReport Documents 8 c Water Rights POW z Photos ii _ Weather Stations os amp 4 a _ Streamflow Sampling Loca _ Temperature Probes _ Water Quality Sampling Sit EM Political Features cy County Boundaries AC Major Roads _ State AL Roads Municipal Boundaries _ Airports y Drainages O O 0O amp 535643 756m Y 9416710 644m Lin 1 257 mi Once a node has been selected the Select the Nodes to Model form will reappear and the selected node will be listed in the Selection Nodes section of the form Additional nodes can be
145. allows users to add photographs to a new location that has just been created or to add additional photographs to locations that are already in the Photo Viewer database To adda photo to the database click on the ade Phetel button in the Photographs section of the Photo Viewer form below Photos Available Photographs 3 Cornell Creek looking downstream form bit Bak View Comments Add Photo Photo Viewer Plug in 4451 4452 4453 4454 4455 4456 4457 4458 4459 4460 4461 4462 4463 4464 4465 4466 4467 4468 4469 4470 4471 206 The Add a Photo to the Database form shown below will appear This same form appears automatically after adding a photograph location to the database as described in the previous section titled Add Location i PhotoViewer Add a Photo to the Database Location example Fhoto Description Date Direction Motes Photo Filename Cancel The fields in the Add Photo form must be filled out with the descriptive information about the photograph that is to be added Once the descriptive fields are filled out the user can browse to the location of the digital photograph on disk using the wl button to the right of the Photo Filename field to access the form shown below Photograph file formats supported by Photo Viewer include jpeg and bitmap View Comments The view comments options in the Locations and Photos sections of the Photo Viewer allow users
146. alyst Options i cccsseccccsceseavessaacedsatuteeressaccensdtasdeaedsawbdnetididsaeisananctiiasievaies 165 POr WW OW e a E E A E E E S 166 Plot Saving Exporting and Printing eeeesseeoeenssssssssoeerrsssssssseerrssssssseeeersssssssees 167 POCI e Tae E E E N eeods 169 Selecting Stations and Water Quality Parameters nooosoooeeensssssseeeeresssssssseeeees 171 ReaD IRO e E E A a o56 171 Statistical Summary Data Sources Plot Options Plot Enhancements and Notes 171 Con TACO AY a E O 183 Correlaton PVA GUS soccer atecesesatassieasctass e ei oen ESE aE E EE aE 184 Multiple Time Series Analysis css ctesvocs scacsinenctsbonnsbaesanenetaneds sbawsenanctebenasonseanenetvedasdats 185 Multiple Time Series Analysis sesser dernier E E iE 186 Parameter Summary ANALY SIS sc ssasncmccstososewsunaetsncedeasepsanaieecctedsneuanaasdwsedsoievsanasescotodusoses 189 S SICAL TAPES Sa E EE TT AEE EET 192 E O yc aU E ee ere EE E O E A eer 195 Stalon Gropi E serieren snn Ee EE TSE ESEE I EEE EE Ea N EERS 197 Photo Viewer PIU cs vessavscicncacexssnnsat sencsconvessavaberxcesensusessteseneiseasedeavaberececersannssteneneiiness 200 NEW Ui FOTO FONG era E E E I EO EA E EETA 201 Selecting Photo Viewer Points from the Map ccccccsssssssseeceeceeeeeesseeeeeeeeeeaes 201 Table of Contents 173 174 175 176 177 178 179 180 181 182 183 184 185 186 187 188 189 190 191 192 193 194 195 196 197 198 199 200 201 202 203 204
147. amflow C Dev Report Generator Access Version g Water Quality C A Dev Report Generator Access Version g Climate PO gl Test Connection s Save Changes If you wish to change your database configuration at any time the screen may also be accessed by clicking the Reports Menu then choosing Configuration as shown below Reports Help Full Report Configuration h Report Help On the Database Configuration screen select the method SQL or Access you would like to use to find the databases Fill in either the security details such as username and password contact your administrator if you don t know these or the paths to the access databases You may verify that the settings are correct by pressing the Test Connection s button If the settings are correct you will see this screen WRIA 1 DSS User s Manual 5306 5307 5308 5309 5310 5311 5312 5313 5314 5315 5316 5317 5318 5319 5320 5321 3322 5323 5324 J923 5326 251 Success So s 1 All tests successfull You may then proceed with using the report generator If the databases could not be found with the specified information you will see a message similar to this Cannot Find Database A Unable to locate the Report Generator database at the specified location Please verify its existence In this case verify the settings and try again If you are unable to connect to the database s contact your system administr
148. and Cover Element to a DSS scenario layout first open the DSS Scenario Builder WRIA 1 D55 Double click the WRIA 1 DSS icon on the desktop the icon with a red and blue molecule This will open the WRIA 1 DSS Launch Pad window as shown below Press Launch DSS to begin WRIA 1 DSS Launch Pad Launch DSS Check for Updates From the DSS menu select the Scenario Builder option to start the Model Manager File Edit 055 Plug ins Time Series Reports Hel O Gh E scenerie Balder O j Scenarios F FL Sa View WRIA 1 Users Documentation O Ser SINENIn comro E I A MaLAa WRIA 1 DSS User s Manual 1194 1195 1196 1197 1198 1199 1200 1201 1202 1203 1204 1205 1206 1207 1208 1209 1210 1211 43 If this menu does not appear select the Plug ins menu instead You will see an option labeled Scenario Builder DSS If there is no check mark next to this item click the item as shown below If the Scenario Builder DSS option does not appear in the Plug ins list you do not have the Model Manager installed File Edit O55 Time Series Reports Help k a 2 al Watershed Characterization Report E Well Log Data Viewer E D Sampling Land Cover Summarizer L Water i Grid Wizard 10 Hab 2D Hab Scenario Builder O55 X well Gr B Table Editor vvell Re w Feature peel ae Labeler Wistar BT 1 r Plug ins OPA Mala Once the DSS Scenario Builder window opens begin a new scen
149. and exported using the DSS Exporting a scenario is accomplished by first opening the scenario then selecting the File menu and then choosing Export Scenario The user will be asked where to save the file The output file will be a proprietary binary format which is unreadable by anything except the Model Manager Scenario Builder Importing a scenario 1s accomplished in much the same way start with an empty scenario builder screen or with a scenario loaded Click on the File menu and select Import Scenario Select the file to be imported and clic eat The scenario will immediately open in the scenario builder under a separate tab if another scenario is already open The scenario will also be added to the database of scenarios automatically If a scenario with the same name as the scenario being imported already exists in the database a warning message will appear and the scenario will not be imported An exported scenario file may be given to another user who has the Scenario Builder installed As long as that user has all of the model elements that exist in the exported scenario and any input data that the model elements of that scenario require the user can run the scenario If a user imports a scenario and doesn t have one of the scenario elements the missing element will show up in the Model Manager as a question mark in the scenario window Scenario Builder Model Manager 1018 1019 1020 1021 1022 1023 1024 10
150. and habitat modeling were performed for flows ranging from 0 17 to 6 2 m s while the MAF at this site was 2 45 m s When a comparison of the habitat versus flow relationships are confined to flows ranging from 0 17 to 2 45 m s an average for the site RMSE was 15 median RMSE 18 Tenmile Creek was another site that differed significantly from the rest of the intensively studied sites The low flow channel of the stream is covered with sand poor quality substrate cover while the margins are extensively covered with vegetation When the flows increase the amount of high quality cover starts to increase significantly on both river banks 100 of additionally inundated area is high quality cover highlighting the importance that substrate and cover can play in calculating available habitat This leads to a misrepresentation of habitat curves for fry of all fish species Figure C1 4 along with spawning and juvenile life stages of some species that are more sensitive to substrate when calculating habitat using the frequency equations In general a stream where the proposed technique is expected to work well for all fish and life stages should not experience dramatic changes in substrate and or cover WRIA 1I DSS User s Manual 6437 6438 6439 6440 6441 6442 6443 6444 6445 6446 6447 301 availability from low to high flows The more substrate cover becomes available with increasing flows compared to low flow conditions th
151. and scroll bars along the side and bottom of the window allow the entire document to be viewed te Well Log Data Viewer File Options File Original with Department of Ecology 027 i Second Copy Owners Copy Third Copy Drillers Copy 1 OWNER Name ris 2 LOCATION OF WELL County ___ 2a STREET ADDRESS OF WELL or n Mell Loga Mumber of Yells B967 Vell ID Cony to Clipboard wiew the entire Image without scroll bars Close The number of well report documents available for viewing is shown in the section below the well report document window Well ID numbers for the sites loaded into the Well Log Data Viewer are listed in the Well ID window Exporting Documents f C to Clipboard Click on the _ _ button to add the image of the scanned document to the clipboard From the clipboard the image can be pasted into a report or other document and printed Well Log Data Viewer Plug In 5257 5258 5259 5260 5261 5262 5263 5264 5265 5266 5267 5268 5269 5270 5271 5272 5273 5274 3213 5276 5277 5278 5279 5280 5281 5282 5283 248 Watershed Characterization Report Generator The Watershed Characterization Report Generator is a tool used to summarize a variety of GIS data and database information into a readable report Output reports can be written to Adobe Acrobat Microsoft Word Microsoft Excel and Rich Text formats The datasets that the generator uses to gather and gene
152. ario layout by pressing i or by selecting the File menu and choosing New Next click on the Data Editors tab in the Elements window and then double click on the Change Land Cover element highlighted in red below DSS Scenario Builder File ie gt Jorjorji990 iz s1j1999 l Elements View Run Models Filters Data Editors other gt Best Management Practices Tool VA change Land Cover The Change Land Cover element will then be added to the scenario layout Land Cover Change Scenario Element 1212 1213 1214 1215 1216 1217 1218 1219 1220 1221 1222 44 DSS Scenario Builder File Elements View Run 0H 01 01 1990 l 12 31 1999 ay Mew Scenario Models Fitters Data Editors other Best Management Practices Tool A Change Land Cover Change Land Cover Add Land Cover Summarizer to DSS Scenario Click on the Filters tab in the Elements window in the Scenario Builder and then double click on the Land Cover Summarizer element highlighted in red below Elements Models Filters Data Editors Other ae 7 r F l nd Cover Summarizer h The Land Cover Summarizer element will then be added to the scenario layout WRIA 1 DSS User s Manual 1223 1224 1223 1226 1227 1228 1229 1230 1231 1232 1233 1234 DSS Scenario Builder File Elements View Pun 0H 01 01 1990 1273171999 Element
153. ase Data Hone selected f From Curent Scenario From file A l Cancel To select a grid from the layers loaded in MapWindow s view click the Frm loaded layers radio button and then select the name of the grid layer in the layer list C From Base Data To select a grid from the DSS base data click the radio button then click the button A base data form will be displayed with LandCover shown You may add this grid to the current view by checking the box next to Add to View i Add To View Click the OF button C From Current Scenano To select a grid from the current scenario click the radio button To select a grid from file click the From fle radio button then click the 1 button An open file dialog will be displayed Browse to a land cover grid and click open You may add this grid to the current view by checking the box next to Add to View cabs Click the K button to continue OF To save the land cover grid that has been selected click the button To discard Cancel the land cover grid that has been selected click the button Select Polygon Shapefile In order to use boundaries from polygon shapefiles you must first check the box next Use Boundaries From Polygon Shapefile as shown below WRIA 1I DSS User s Manual 1293 1294 1295 1296 1297 1298 1299 1300 1301 1302 1303 1304 1305 1306 1307 1308 1309 1310 1311 1312 1313
154. ata Editors Other WRIA Wide Water Quality Model C Lake Whatcom Water Quality Model Start Location Finish Location i water Quantity Model Lake Whatcom Water Guality Model Before the Water Quality Model can be run the start and end dates need to be specified in the Scenario Builder To change the start and end dates click frojorjises froyosjise0 l The start date is the date listed to the left and the end date is the date listed on the right To run the scenario click the button If you would like to abort the scenario run click the button to cancel the scenario run When the scenario has completed the DSS user will be asked if they would like to view the scenario run log a text file containing messages output by the elements contained in the scenario that has just been run WRIA 1 DSS User s Manual 101 CC x The scenario run has completed yy i P Would you like to view the log For this scenario run 2353 2354 2355 To view the log for the scenario run click the 2356 scenario log at this time click the C w button 2357 2358 2359 2360 2361 2362 2363 2364 2365 2366 2367 2368 2369 2370 2371 2312 2373 2374 2375 2376 2377 2378 2379 2380 2381 2382 2383 2384 2385 2386 2387 2388 2389 2390 2391 2392 2393 J button To decline viewing the Lake Whatcom Water Quality Model Interface 102 2394 2395 WRIA Wide Water Quality Model Interfa
155. ate spaces Select a Criterion Type from the pull down box and click The Criteria List window now appears as follows Criteria List Slee ParameterCode Parameter Name Primary Criteria Secondary Criteria _E valuation Type 10 TEMPERATURE WATER DEGREES CENTIGRADE 7 5 DAE Remove WRIA 1I DSS User s Manual 4238 4239 4240 4241 4242 4243 4244 4245 4246 4247 4248 4249 4250 4251 4252 4253 4254 4255 4256 4257 4258 4259 4260 4261 4262 4263 4264 4265 4266 4267 4268 197 To remove or edit criteria on the list use the mouse to select the parameter from the list and click 2 or edt as appropriate More parameters can be added from this form by clicking on the Add button however it is advisable to click on and go to the initial Evaluate Criteria form If one attempts to add a new parameter for criteria evaluation by selecting in the Criteria List window all available parameters from the entire database are listed in the Parameter pull down box in the Add Edit Criteria form If however the user proceeds from the initial Evaluate Criteria form the parameters listed in that Parameter pull down box are only those that are applicable to the station specified in the Station pull down box The result of the Evaluate Criteria operation used for this example is shown below The results indicate that 35 observations are above 7 5C and 12 observations are below
156. ath to the MOB file containing the database Database Path i Databases ExistingaterManagementmdb Test Connections Save Changes To browse to a Microsoft Access Water Management Database click the J button An open file dialog will be displayed The default location for the Water Management Database is C Program Files WRIA 1I_DSS DSS_Data Model Manager Databases Existing WaterManagement mdb To save the selected database location click the ____SaveChanges__ button Three initial water management databases are provided one for each scenario HistoricWaterManagement mdb ExistingWaterManagement mdb FBOWaterManagement mdb Select Scenario XML File The scenario XML file is used to store information on drainage area within each land cover class within each drainage and parameters pertaining to impervioius area and agricultural drainage which are editable A default scenario XML file is provided and will be updated whenever the scenario is changed However you may save and use and alternate XML file To select an XML file click the button to the right of scenarios File in the Water Quality Model Settings form An open file dialog will be displayed allowing you to browse to the desired scenario XML file The default scenario WRIA I DSS User s Manual 1769 1770 1771 1772 1773 1774 1775 1776 1777 1778 1779 1780 1781 1782 1783 1784 1785 1786 1787 1788 1789 1790 71 XML file is
157. ation form as shown below Database Configuration xX The Water Quality Model needs parameters from database Lake hatcom O Parameters rid Microsoft SOL Server Use SOL Server to find the database Server Address Server User ID C Use Trusted Server Password Connection Microsoft Access f Use Access to find the database Please specify the full path to the MDB file containing the databaze Database Path C Program Files WRIA 1_DSS 055 Data go Test Connechon s Save Changes To browse to a Microsoft Access Water Quality Parameters database click the l button An open file dialog will be displayed The default location for the Lake Whatcom Water Quality Parameters Database is C Program Files WRIA 1_DSS DSS_Data Model Manager Databases LakeWhatcomW QParameters mdb To save the selected database location click the __SaveChanges button WRIA 1 DSS User s Manual 2312 2313 2314 2315 2316 2317 2318 2319 2320 2321 2322 2323 2324 23293 2326 2327 2328 2329 99 Edit Lake Whatcom Water Quality Model Outputs The output tab allows the user to view edit the output settings for the Lake Whatcom Water Quality Model HE Water Quality Model Inputs A loj x Water Quality Output Director C Program Files WAl4 1_0554Model Runs To save the changes to the settings that have been made in the outputs form click the button To cancel the
158. ations into the Time Series Analyst Time Series Data Analyst Plug in 3650 3651 3652 3653 3654 3655 3656 3657 3658 3659 3660 3661 3662 3663 3664 164 Viewing Data via the Time Series Data Analyst Toolbar Button To view and analyze all data in a database click the Time Series Data Analyst toolbar button and select a database from the list Selecting the Water Quality database from the list opens the Time Series Analyst and makes available the entire water quality database in the form shown below In this manner users can browse the entire database of water quality data without interacting with the map Time Series Data Analyst Water Quality File view Options Help tt Options Plot Enhancements Data Sources Notes Summary Plot Options y Asis in Log Scale ili Time Series Plat C Line CO Point Both Show Control lines Aten ie Conlin Use Averaging Period Normalize 7 Show Data Gaps hy Probability Plot W Show Best Fit Line Show Control lines Atenas tonne Bow hisker Plots f Connect Means f Connect Medians Data Selection Date Range Include Month Range Plot Parameter COLIFORM TOT MEMBRANE FILTER IMMED M ENDO MED 35C Gee 1972 January Station 12203550 WHATCOM CREEK AT BELLINGHAM Frid i977 December Selecting Water Quality Stations from the Map First make sure that the Water Quality Sampling Sites layer is turned on c
159. ator Once you have successfully selected the databases you wish to use press the Save Changes button to continue Starting the Report Generator plug in Next start the Report Generator plug in by clicking the Reports menu then selecting Full Report as shown below Note do not use this menu option for the time being instead use the icon mentioned below Reports Help Full Report ss Configuration Report Help You may also start the plug in by selecting the graph icon from the toolbar lid Generating a Report Once the Launch Report screen is visible as shown below you may select options for the report This window will look differently depending on the project you have opened Watershed Characterization Report Generator 5327 5328 5329 5330 5331 5332 5333 252 Fl Launch Report Predefined Aggregation Bellingham Bay Birch Bay Area Drayton Harbor Fraser River Lake Whatcom Lower Mainstem Nooksack Lummi and Eliza Island Lummi Bay Lummi Peninsula and Portage Iland Lynden North Middle Fork Nooksack Morth Fork Nooksack Point Roberts Silver Creek and Nooksack Delta Flow Unita CFS Acre Feet Volume Units Year Display Selected Drainage Note You may aleo add and remove drainages visually from the map please hold down Ctrl while clicking Fish Periodicity Dataset Known Current Y Change Sections Included in Report Warning Report tt lange and may take tim
160. ayer choose a drainage in the drop down list to the right of Panas on the Best Management Practice Tool Select Best Management Practice To select a Best Management Practice choose a Best Management Practice from the drop down list to the right of Bet Management Practice On the Best Management Practice Tool To add the Best Management Practice specified in the drop down list click the eee button The Best Management Practice for the selected drainage will be added to the Best Management Practice list Create New Best Management Practices To create a new set of BMP s click the button You will be asked to confirm whether you would like to start with new BMP s discarding any that may currently be displayed in the BMP list Click the L button to clear existing BMP s Click the _ button to keep the current list of BMP s Lake Whatcom Water Quality Model Interface 2169 2170 2171 2172 2173 2174 317 2177 2178 2179 2180 2181 2182 2183 2184 2185 2186 2187 2188 21 21 6 92 Opening Existing Best Management Practices To open a set of previously defined BMP click the El button The Select Scenario form will be displayed allowing the DSS user to select a set of BMP s associated with a DSS Scenario Run ID OF Cancel YZ To open the BMP s contained in the selected scenario click the button To Cancel cancel opening a set of BMP s from a previous scenario cl
161. b with the desired scenario s name Each element inside a scenario has properties associated with it but these properties cannot be edited The properties for an element can be viewed by selecting the element in the scenario click on it once Next click on the View menu and select Element Properties An example Element Properties screen is shown below Filter Element Properties Element Details Land Cover Summarizer 1 0 2274 1 7307 Jap 200E 11 37 08 AM EMAL Utah Water Research Lab Description Summarizes Land Cover Values by drainiage Configuring Elements Many of the scenario elements must be configured before the scenario can be executed Every scenario element will differ in what needs to be configured and how this is accomplished A scenario element is configured by double clicking on the element s icon in the scenario window the window with the Go and Stop icons Double clicking on a scenario element brings up the configuration screen for that particular element Any configuration needed to run the selected element can be done using this configuration screen For more specific configuration information refer to the section in this document describing the particular element of interest Once data and configuration parameters have been entered for an element the information will be saved as a part of the scenario The various parameters available for each scenario element allows for multiple instances
162. b MediaFiles table The data to be entered for the database fields are Station ID The value from the Station_ID field in tbIStations that corresponds with the station that you are currently working with MediaType_ID Select the value Aerial View from the drop down combo box in this field It is tied to the tbIMediaTypes table for values Media_Filename The location filename of the Aerial View Image that you are working on relative to the database 1 e if the database is located in c 2D Data database mdb and the Aerial View Image that you are working on is located in c 2D Data StationFolderNameWiiscellaneous Aerial View imagefname then the entry StationFolder Name Wiiscellaneous Aerial View imagefname Comments Put any comments about the Aerial View image you are working on that you want a user to know here This value will be displayed when this Aerial View image is being viewed If this field is left blank then the value None will be displayed instead Appendix B Importing 1D and 2D data from PHABWin_2002 5769 5770 5771 5772 5773 5774 5775 5776 5771 5718 5719 5780 5781 5782 5783 5784 5785 5786 5787 5788 5789 5790 5791 5792 5793 5794 5795 5796 5797 5798 5799 5800 5801 5802 5803 5804 5805 5806 5807 5808 5809 5810 5811 5812 270 PDF AVI Copy the AVIs into the AVI folder in the Miscellaneous folder see folder structure above Input the AVI information into
163. b file containing the database Database Path C Program Files WALS 1 DSSS055 DatatModel The user must then enter the complete pathname in the box to the right of Database Path or use the browse button oe to navigate to the desired database Habitat Time Series Model Interface 3014 3015 3016 3017 3018 3019 3020 3021 3022 3023 3024 3025 3026 3027 3028 3029 3030 3031 3032 3033 3034 3035 132 To test the connection to the database and to verify that the database is available press the Test Connection button If a successful connection is made to the database listed the following message will appear Success Lai k Connection Successful If the database cannot be found the following error will be displayed mwP hab limeSeriesModel Invalid Database Database does not exist in the SOL Server at Address local Once a successful database connection has been made to the desired database press the save Changes button to continue Select Daily Flow Database The default database for the Daily Flow Database is the WaterQuantityStreamFlow database To select a different database click the browse button database name as shown below to the right of the Daily Flow Database Water uantitys treanmF low Scenario Run Miar This will bring up the Database Configuration form WRIA 1I DSS User s Manual 3036 3037 3038 3039 3040 3041
164. bel Extents check box Attribute Table Editor Plug in The Attribute Table Editor Plug in allows you to view and edit the attribute data associated with the data layers in the Map view To view the attribute table associated with one of the layers first make the desired layer active and then click on the Attribute Table Editor Plug in icon on the toolbar This will open the attribute table for the active theme Fie Ect 05S Papen Tine Series Ropi O88 24 8 wm Brae TER GE Edt View ai jth 7 ee ia i a Quartt s abdnt Sia PA C Program Filas WAL I_DSSDSS_Data GES_ DataS hapai WOS aons a saone cho Hebtet Ste amp SHAPE JID STATION DATAAASE STATION_NA AGENCY LOCATION STAT Wel Graphit y LWLANDO 1 pas we Ovepe W Wat Report Document tw AUS 1 Water Rights POW Photos a2 4 Weather Statins z Streamtow Samping Li t TemeerstucProbes sb T Whaler Quality Sergiy Stes E gt otca Feature E Courty Bounciar AJ Mapa Ronds AJ State o Ros Muricipal Boun g Arporns P Dr nrumpes J Congr eher oO The columns in the table can be resized to show their contents by hovering over the line between two columns until the resize cursor appears and then clicking and dragging the MapWindow Watershed Information System 726 121 728 129 730 731 732 733 734 735 736 137 738 739 740 741 742 743 744 745 746 747 748 749 750 751 P 753 754 755 756 757 758 759 760 761 762 763 764 76
165. button down and you will see a line come from the model element to your cursor continue dragging the mouse pointer to the destination element and release the mouse The elements will be connected by one directional arrow All model elements must be connected to form a path from the Start Location to the Finish Location When the model is executed the Scenario Builder will start at the Go icon and follow the arrow from it to the first element which will then be executed The Scenario Builder will follow the arrow from that element to the next element process it and so on until the Scenario Builder reaches the Stop icon Since elements are executed in sequence the order in which elements are connected in a scenario matters In this example the changes to land cover will be applied before the land cover is summarized Therefore the land cover data editor must run before the land cover summarizer There could be additional elements between the two but since the edit takes place before the summary that s all that really matters in the positioning of elements As arule of thumb elements that produce input for another element must run before that element The screen below shows a scenario with the Land Cover Data Editor and the Land Cover Summarizer properly connected WRIA 1I DSS User s Manual 29 DSS Scenario Builder File Elements View Pun ie gt jorjorji990 12 31 1999 7 New Scenario Models Filter
166. ce 2396 2397 The WRIA Wide Water Quality Model Interface allows the DSS user to specify the input 2398 for the Water Quality Model for all of the WRIA 1 Drainages 2399 2400 Add WRIA Wide Water Quality Model to DSS Scenario 2401 2402 To add the WRIA Wide Water Quality Model to a DSS scenario layout first open the 2403 DSS Scenario Builder See Model Manger s User Guide Create a new scenario layout 2404 by clicking J Click on the Models tab in the Scenario Builder and then double click on 2405 the WRIA Wide Water Quality Model highlighted in red below 2406 DSS Scenario Builder gt File Elements View Run Hep _Jarjo1j1990 izisij1999 Models Filters Data Editors Other wWRIA Wide Water Quality Model Cp Lake Whatcom Water Quality Model 2407 Water Quantity Model 2408 2409 The Water Quality Model will then be added to the scenario layout 2410 WRIA 1 DSS User s Manual 2411 2412 2413 2414 2415 2416 2417 2418 2419 2420 2421 103 DSS Scenario Builder Ioj x gt File Elements Yiew Run O hk gt o1 01 1990 12 31 1999 Water Quality Scenario Models Fiters Data Editors other WRELO Wide Waker Kl TEISA Model D Lake Whatcom Water Quality Model Start Location Finizh Location G WALA W ide Water Quality Model Water Quantity Model To prepare the WRIA Wide Water Quality Model to be run in the Scenario Bu
167. cenario Models Filters Data Editors Other N Land Cover Summarizer Start Location As a a Land Cover yd Summarizer o Change Land a Coyer a D Finish Location Running All Elements in New Sce Applying land cover changes C PPPS WRIA 1 DSS User s Manual 946 947 948 949 950 951 952 953 954 955 956 957 958 959 960 961 962 963 964 965 966 967 968 33 If there are any errors in the configuration of the scenario it will not run properly and an error message will appear Errors When running a scenario one or more of the scenario elements may report errors during execution This is often due to the user forgetting to configure an element or improperly configuring an element 1 e asking an element to use a nonexistent database The error message which appears though not visually appealing is quite informative Error while running Element The Following Element reported that it was not able to complete successfully Element Mame Land Cover Data Editor Author EMRE Utah Water Research Lab Version 1 0 1803 31785 Build Date 12 8 2004 5 49 34 PMI Type DssDataEditor Results Summary Failed to identify polygon shapefile layer Parameters Polygons XML gt lt xml version 1 0 7 gt lt hangeLandCover version 1 0 gt lt Polygons gt lt hChangeLandCoyver gt Show Changed Grid gt False Grid Directory gt Use Current Scenario gt False Is Grid Layer L
168. ch has an arrowhead on both ends this line is serving both roles The Loop Control Node should then have a second connection leaving it which in this example leads to Stop The Loop Control Node is configured like any other element simply double click it Double clicking the Loop Control Node will produce the window below Scenario Builder Model Manager HBa 1105 1106 1107 1108 1109 1110 1111 1112 1113 1114 1115 1116 1117 1118 1119 1120 40 Loop node properties Seles r Loop Settings f Loop Style For Time Steps inclusive 1 To fa OF Cancel As this window shows the loop control node will run for 4 time steps Another example is given below s DSS Scenario Builder File Elements View Run Heep jorjorsi990 12 31 1999 gt lements 9 Test Scenario Scenario 1 Test Scenario 2 Models Filters Data Editors Other Loop Control Node T Test Scenario Start Location n a pee Test Scenario 2 Test Scenario Loop Control NN 5 cenario Test Scenario 2 Finish Location The Loop Control Node here has been set to run twice so execution will flow thusly l eo a a go icon loop control node iteration 1 Scenario Scenario 1 Scenario Scenario 2 loop control node iteration 2 Scenario Scenario 1 Scenario Scenario 2 loop control node finished stop icon WRIA 1 DSS User s Manual 1121 1122 1123 1124 1125 112
169. checking and unchecking 4600 the boxes next to these data view options Note that Channel Index has only observed 4601 data thus the predicated data option is not available For the velocity and water surface 4602 level plot options the observed and predicted values can be displayed using these 4603 checkboxes as shown below 4604 Data bo view W View Observed Data if View Predicted Data 4605 Blue Lines fellow gt Red Lines 4606 4607 The Y axis along the left hand side of the graph will change to show velocity in feet per 4608 seconds and water surface levels in feet When displaying the velocity and or water 4609 surface level plot options the user may also select which of the predicted discharges or 4610 flows to display results for using the Discharge Selector window All the predicted 4611 discharges used in the PHabSim model runs will be displayed in this window located on 4612 the right hand side of the graph window By using the check boxes next to each 4613 discharge listed in cfs the user may choose which discharges to display This option 4614 will change the plotted results only if the View Predicted Data checkbox is selected 4615 4616 Stage Discharge 4617 4618 The Stage Discharge tab plots the relationship between the observed and predicted stage 4619 discharges The X axis is the Flow value for the stage discharge in cubic feet per second 4620 cfs The Y axis is the Stage Discharge value in feet The Y axis valu
170. choose Photo Viewer as shown below File Edit O55 Reports Help 0 watershed Characterization Report Legend Well Log Data viewer Ei Sampling Dat Land Cover Summarizer Water Guar j T k brs i Scenario Builder O55 well Graphs Table Editor Well Report Feature Identifier Shapefile Labeler Water Right C Photos Plug ins Time Series Grid Wizard Lake Whatcom Water Quality Model Macroinvertebrate Data Viewer Weather Ste Steamnticie Habitat Time Series Model Temperatur Time Series Data Analyst s Water Gual Change Land Cower O Political Feature County Bou Major Road Water Quantity Model WRIA Wide Water Quality Model State Shapefile Editor AC Roads Photo Viewer Municipal B 1D Habitat viewer Airports 2D Habitat viewer Drainages _ Best Management Practices Tool HC Comprehen ee Pluctins This will add the photo viewer button to the toolbar By pressing this button users can browse the entire database of photographs without interacting with the map Photo Viewer Options Several options are available on the Photo Viewer form These options are described in the following sections Photograph View Window When selected scales the current photograph to fit in the view window as shown in the example at the beginning of this section above regardless of the original size of the digital image When this option is deselected unchecked the photo is shown in its original size and res
171. city Viewer Editor Plug In 126 2918 2919 Habitat Time Series Model Interface 2920 2921 The Habitat Time Series Model Interface allows the DSS user to specify the input for the 2922 Water Quality Model for the WRIA 1 Drainages 2923 2924 Add Habitat Time Series Model to DSS Scenario 2925 2926 To add the Habitat Time Series Model to a DSS scenario layout first open the DSS 2927 Scenario Builder by choosing the Scenario Builder option under the DSS menu Create a 2928 new scenario layout by clicking k Click on the Models tab in the Elements window of 2929 the Scenario Builder and double click on the Habitat Time Series Model highlighted in 2930 red below 2931 amp DSS Scenario Builder Fie Elements View Run Deu Joijorjis90 x 12 31 1999 l 2932 2933 WRIA 1 DSS User s Manual 2934 2935 2936 2937 2938 2939 2940 2941 2942 2943 2944 2945 127 The Habitat Time Series Model will be added to the scenario layout as shown below DSS Scenario Builder Fie Elements View Pun je gt 01 01 1990 12 31 1999 EEk Habitat Time Seres Scenario Models Filters Data Editors Other WRIG Wide Water Quality Model Start Location Habitat Time Senes Model Cp Lake Whatcom Water Quality Model Habitat Time Series Model Cp Water Quantity Model Finish Location To prepare the Habitat Time Series Model to be run in the Scenario Builder you must D connect the
172. ct Land Cover Summary Aka Previous Scenario Land Cover Summary f Curent Scenario Land Cover Summary OF To use a land cover summary from a previous scenario click the Previous Scenario Land Cover Summary radio button and then select a scenario from the drop down menu To select a land cover summary that will be created when the current scenario layout is run click the Curent Scenario Land Cover Summary radio button To save the scenario that has been selected click the button The initial land cover summary database provided includes land covers for each scenario Scenario Historic conditions Scenario 2 Existing conditions Scenario 3 Full build out conditions As additional land cover scenarios are created the user needs to keep track of what they are and which database they are in Select Water Rights Database To select the Water Rights Database click the button to the right of as Water Quantity Model Interface 1745 1746 1747 1748 1749 1750 1751 1752 1753 1754 1755 1756 1757 1758 1759 1760 1761 1762 1763 1764 1765 1766 1767 1768 70 Database Configuration Please select the database containing the topnet water management inputs Microsoft SOL Server l Use SOL Server to find the database Server Address Server User ID Use Trusted Server Password Connection Microsoft Access e Use Access to find the database Please specify the full p
173. ct a plot of the Channel Index suitability index depth suitability index or the velocity suitably index by selecting the desired option from the pull down menu as shown below Notice the blue underlined link called Channel Index is available to the right of the Plot Type menu when the channel index option is selected Clicking on this link displays a description of the channel index codes Physical Stage Discharge Longitudinal Profile HSC Habitat Reach WA Species Comparison Discharge Comparison Surace Plat Plot Type WMat alate Tats e Channel Index Channel Index 5 Papih a elocity Sl E OHNA ASUH Channel Suitability Index Bell Creek e CHINOOK HOLDING Adult C FINK SPAWN C SOCKEYE SPAWN O EULLTAROUT SPAWN GRA O RAINBOW JUYADULT WINTER CO RAINBOW SPAWN CI RAINBOW JUYADULT L STEELHEAD JUW I STEELHEAD SPAWN LI TROUT_STEEL FRY L Chinook Fry L Chinook FryGen L Coho Fry T9 Channel Index The Y axis for all plot types is the Suitability Index SI on a scale from 0 0 completely unsuitable to 1 0 suitable The X axes depend on the plot type selected For Channel Index the X axis displays the Channel Index codes Again a description of these codes can be found by clicking on the blue Channel Index link to the right of the Plot Type selector menu The X axis for the Depth SI is the depth in feet and the Velocity SI has units of feet per second ft s WRI
174. cument ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 247 FE OI NO OCH AIC NiS aeaa 247 Watershed Characterization Report Generator ssscccsccccsssssssssssscccccscccsssssccecs 248 Opening a MapWindow PLO CCl sicascxcnicrecaassccneneminsscasessanenemtetsaiaetesememiesecsioshinenenieeu 248 Changing the Database Configuration ccccececsccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeaeeeseeeeeeeeeeaaas 249 Starting the Report Generator plug in sesssssssseeersssssssseeeesssssssseeeressssssseeeeees 251 Go Nas e261 Sas Repo ee c e 291 Appendix A Importing Data into the Master Server cccccccssssssssssssssssssssssscees 256 RVC A IVE A AY E EE E E 256 Importing Data Automatically ccccccccccccccccssssseeeececeeeeeaeeeseeececeeeeseaeeeseeeeeeeeeeaaas 259 Appendix B Importing 1D and 2D data from PHABWin_2002 ccsssseeees 263 Appendix B 1 Importing 1D data from PHABWin_ 2002 00 eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 263 Appendix B 2 Importing 2D Data into the 2D Habitat Viewer 264 Appendix B 3 Using the 2D Data Importer ccccceccccecceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 212 Appendix C Extrapolation Program User Manual sssssssssececeeecccccccososssssesesseceee 283 Extrapolation Program ccccccccccsssssssecccceccceessseeecceeeeeaaesseeeceeeeeeaaeeeseeeeeeeeeeaaaaeaees 283 Habitat rc CIC OM Prog ramiers e E 292 Appendix C 1 Limitations of the Approach cccccceeeeccececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 298 Tab
175. del to DSS Scenari0 i ececcccccccccesseseeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeees 126 Edit Habitat Time Series Model Settings cccccccccccssssssseeeceeceeeaeeeseeeeeceeeeeesaeeeees 130 Edit Habitat Time Series Model Inputs cc ccssssssseeececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeaaeeeeees 130 Edit Habitat Time Series Model Outputs cc cccsesssseecceeceeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeaeeeeeees 139 kun Habitat Mine Series Mode Lorcaren nnair a Ere 142 Exporine scenario RUN LOS cessrscssro esio e Erea E 144 Temperature and Dissolved Oxygen Flags Model Interfacce ccccccsssssssssssees 145 Add Temperature and DO Flags Model to DSS Scenario eeccccccceeeeeeeeeeeees 145 Edit Temperature and DO Flags Model Settings ce cccccccccccccesseseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 148 Edit Temperature and DO Flags Model Inputs cc ecccccsssseeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeees 149 Edit Temperature and DO Flags Model Outputs cc ccccccssssseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 155 R n Temperature and DO Flags Mode lis dacisesccrssrreaianiewsncauruiiaiaietamererialacareerisads 160 Exporune SCC HA o RUN LOP gpa crecos sein sncrenecon cress isatveneacsen sie E ESEE 161 Time Series Data Analyst PIUG I0 cccccccssssssssscccccsssssssscsscccccsccssssssssccccsssssssssssees 163 Nicwme Water Quality Dala arsson ENE a 163 Viewing Data via the Time Series Data Analyst Toolbar Button 164 Selecting Water Quality Stations from the Map eeecssccceeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeaas 164 Time Series An
176. del to be run in the Scenario Builder you must connect the model to the StatLocaion and the FrishLocsion nodes in the scenario layout Water Quality Scenario Q i Start Location Finish Location Lake Whatcom Water duality Model First click on the StatLocation node Then click and hold the mouse on the blue box in the center of the node s icon While still pressing the mouse button drag the mouse to the Lake Whatcom Water Quality Model node in the scenario layout WRIA 1 DSS User s Manual 87 Water Quality Scenario Start Locator Finish Location A o E E 1B Water ality Model 2075 a 2076 2077 Repeat the previous step by again clicking the blue box in the center of the Lake D 2078 Whatcom Water Quality Model dragging the mouse to the FirishLecation node 2079 Water Quality Scenario FN a Start i Finish Location Lake Whatcom Water Quality Model 2080 2081 The Lake Whatcom Water Quality Model is now ready to be run in the DSS Scenario 2082 Builder To edit the Lake Whatcom Water Quality Model settings double click on the 2083 Lake Whatcom Water Quality Model node in the scenario layout 2084 Water Quality Scenario Start Locator Figi 2085 2086 Lake Whatcom Water Quality Model Interface 2087 2088 2089 2090 2091 2092 2093 2094 2095 2096 2097 2098 2099 2100 2101 2102 2103 2104 88 The Lake Whatcom Water Quality Model se
177. dinal Profile HSC Habitat Reach WUA Species Comparison Discharge Comparison Surface Plot Plot Type Selector Data to yew i View Observed Data fa Blue Lines fellow gt Red Lines Discharge Selector Channel Indes Plot Type MEE Discharge cts Deeley Onions Channel Index F 01 Observed Data Only Bell Creek Cross Section 1 GG Observed Data EE Cross Section Geometry W 1 51 224 Ww 2 91 361 4 31 M 501 Ww 571 641 M 711 M 781 M 8 5 Ww 921 M 391 1061 1131 M 1201 M 1271 M 1341 M 1411 T5 10 0 R 1481 Distance tt A Ww 0 80 Channel Index 41 Uoeaalg By clicking on the Plot Type Selector menu the user can select to display the Channel Index associated with the selected cross section the velocity sets water surface levels or both the velocity sets and water surface levels as shown below WRIA 1I DSS User s Manual 215 Channellndex Flot Type g iterates Channel Index Velocity Water Surface Level MSL Velocity and Water Surface Level 4592 4593 4594 Notice that when the Channel Index plot type is selected a blue underlined Channel 4595 Index link is visible to the left of the Plot Type window Clicking on this link will bring 4596 up an explanation of the channel index codes used for this project 4597 4598 Along with these Plot Type options the user also has the ability to display or hide the 4599 observed data and predicted data values This can be done by
178. e Land Cover Change Scenario Element 56 1458 Change Land Cover element in the polygon list The next figure shows two polygons 1459 that have been added to the Change Land Cover element 1460 1461 1462 1463 Edit Land Cover Summarizer Settings 1464 1465 The Land Cover Summary Settings for allows the user to change the Land Cover 1466 Summarizer element settings 1467 1468 To edit the Land Cover Summarizer element s settings double click on the Land Cover 1469 Summarizer node in the scenario layout 1470 Stal ae Change Land Cover 1471 1472 1473 1474 1475 The Land Cover Summarizer element settings form will be displayed as seen below 1476 WRIA 1 DSS User s Manual 1477 1478 1479 1480 1481 1482 1483 1484 1485 1486 1487 1488 1489 1490 1491 1492 1493 1494 57 Land Cover Summary Settings Output Databaze Summary Database LandCoverSummary mdb Select Input Land Cover Grid Polygon Shapetile Polygon ID Field Polygon Name Field OF Cancel Select Output Land Cover Summary Database To select the Land Cover Summary Database for the Land Cover Summarizer output click the L button to the right of Sia Database Configuration The Land Cover Summarizer needs to store ite output in a database Where i the database you would like to use to store the Land Cover Summary output Microsoft SQL Server 0 Use SOL Server to find the database Server Addre
179. e e Cutthroat Juvenile Native Char Juvenile Mountain Whitefish Juvenile c Prediction errors for the Juvenile life stage of the select fish species 80 gt 60 v x x z x o x 2 i e x x xX a y X aXe 0 XXX X T x Y e E T x ry Qa j p y r4 Pray 35 K na a Ps lu 1 c ak xA oo yoxa o e a vane eee a Bq ah 8 3 neh ma a Us gx d g 4 kg et ae a x 40 60 80 I I I I I 0 0 0 3 0 5 0 9 1 8 3 3 6 1 11 0 Q Qmaf o Chinook Holding a Rainbow Adult x Rainbow Winter x Cutthroat Adult e Native Char Adult Mountain Whitefish Adult d Prediction errors for the Adult life stage of the select fish species Figure C1 5 Continued WRIA I DSS User s Manual
180. e C Framfile radio button then click the button An open file dialog will be displayed Browse to a land cover grid and click open To save the land cover grid that has been selected click the button To discard Cancel the land cover grid that has been selected click the button Select Lake Whatcom Grids Directory The Select Directory form allows the DSS user to select a directory containing the Lake Whatcom grids To access this form press the button to the right of Lake Whatcom Grids Inputs Directory on the Inputs tab of the Water Quality Model Inputs window as shown below Lake Whatcom Water Quality Model Interface 2293 2256 2251 2258 2259 2260 2261 2262 2263 2264 2265 2266 2267 2268 2269 2270 2271 2212 2273 2274 2215 2276 96 S Water Quality Model Inputs q lOl Input Output Best Management Prachce BMPs Selected Land Cover Grid luke_ cal bgd Lake Whatcom Grids Input Directory l C Program Flesh AilA 1 DS54055 DatavGlS Dataord Wate iet Pr Pirie 0 eee Di riean This will bring up the Select Lake Whatcom Grids Inputs Directory form as shown below The default location for the Lake Whatcom Grids is C Program Files WRIA 1_DSS DSS_Data GIS_Data Grids WaterQualityGrids HE Select Lake Whatcom Grids Dit E O x tE C Program Files WfALG 1 O554055 DatatGls_Da To move up a directory level click the button To change the driv
181. e a Bo ONS Le 8 Te 8 oe 2 oo ee oe 1s 8 8 ob 221i 618d 76 4 94 6197 89 0 eo oi A Do eo oo 6s iD be ee oO ee oo 76 69 9 89 691 79 9 89 6186 oo oo aa 14 83 55903 49 14 83 4007 89 14 83 4137 481 148s sobs 69 148d 981 18 188s obo 28 14a 20 15 6999 97 276 19 aid 67 280 13 5682 56 278 13 4291 927 28 19 17 488 78 28 19 5391 12 278 25 67 86360 15 25 87 6584 97 25 607 6686 81 25 67 4606 58 25 67 1999 71 259 67 59195 59 25 30 82 8821 604 396 602 75527 _ 604 36 62 7622 5 98 62 4859 09 386 82 1995 74 968 62 59659 54 396 oy 96 1 BY 96 81611 96 8166 34896 6856 19 948 96 1698 2 5896 abo ao a 39 91 9990 3 6 39 91 911 6 68 oo 91 9183 39 91 5211 32 39 91 17 69 51 39 91 598 95 59 91 a eS 18s 78 Le ee 1 oe ee 8 oe oe 8s 53936 79 AALS TBs LOY AS 4196 89 4 56 15 1866601 2 78 96 75 16294 116616 10335 91 50 15 5460 57 50 15 1827 6 6 50 15 3865 oe 60 805 160972 38 60 603 10966 89 66 609 11131 69 68 8609 5685 5 68 639 21801 71 68 039 3449 89 1 74 87 11257 89 74 87 11748 17 74 87 12131 74 87 607 21 Fale 22 62 41 784 87 3143 07 78 990 94 1082 8 59 99 94 11798 31 99 94 12993 1 99 94 6 612 04 99 94 252 6 5 99 94 2839 1 99 125 01 9 6 64 6 125 01 10788 86 125 01 13247 03 125 01 7072 78 125 01 2698 05 125 01 2 6 156 609 8802 64 158 69 9615 52 158 09 12975 98 158 09 7376 79 1580 09 27965 09 150 09 2753 Figure 3 Example of the WUA input file TF Rinput Folder The IFRinput folder contains 37 comma delimited t
182. e below shows the Whatcom Creek computational cell surface areas with background image and steelhead juvenile fish observation overlay WRIA 1I DSS User s Manual 229 Phabsim 2D Intensive Site Viewer fe lx Units Intensive Site Name B hee US Customary C Metric Physical WUA HSC Fish Distribution Miscellaneous Data Map View p en AE EASTA E EAEE Lane v wy q Flow ft 3 s J Y Species Lifestaae Chinook Fr Y A Q V View Background Image IV View Fish Observation Overlay E 0 1076 0 1292 E 0 1292 0 1507 E 0 1507 0 1722 E 0 1722 0 1938 E 0 1936 0 2153 E 0 2153 0 2368 E 0 2368 0 2583 0 2583 0 2799 0 2799 0 3014 Run 0 3014 0 3229 hrubs and dense erry vines Lateral Pool a 3 7 a 3 p tall shrubs willows Irg live B trees gt 10 in most places Low Gradient Riffle a On f m Rife na 7 shrubs sm trees lt 10ft lt z 1 2 dia treesw few 10 dia burned 19 JTA Fu N Lateral Pool go o SN rN Rife shrubs and short bushes aN 53 BOS 100 4 g 9 6 Scale in Feet 4897 4898 Some of the map view options such as Water Surface Elevation Depth and Velocity 4899 Magnitude allow the user to view data at different flows When this is an option the 4900 Flow Selector option will be activated and the user can select flows using the arrow to the 4901 left of the Flow Selector as shown below 4902 Map View water S
183. e button Select Simulation Stream Flow Database To select the Simulated Stream Flow Database click the button to the right of Simulation Streamflow Database Database Configuration Please select the location of the SQL server the WateriuantityStreamFlow database resides on Microsoft SQL Server f Use SQL Server to find the database Server Address local Server User ID Sn w Use Trusted Serwer Password Connection Microsoft Access C Use Access to find the database Please specify the full path to the MDE file containing the database Database Path water uantityS treamFlow g Test Connection s Save Changes To change the address of the Microsoft SQL Server containing the WaterQuantityStreamFlow Database enter the server address in the textbox to the right Use Trusted y gt of smer Addes To enter the User ID for the server uncheck Connection and enter the user id in the textbox to the right of 55 Usel To enter the Server Password uncheck Use Trusted Connection and enter the password in the textbox to the right of e Password The default location for the server installed with the WRIA 1 DSS is local with the Use Trusted M Connection check box checked To save the selected database location click the ____SaveChanges__ button Water Quantity Model Interface 2026 2027 2028 2029 2030 2031 2032 2033 2034 2035 2036 2037 2038 2039 2040 2041 2042
184. e changes made to the Habitat Time Series Model Parameters form press Lancel Run Habitat Time Series Model The DSS Scenario Builder allows the DSS user to run the Habitat Time Series Model amp DSS Scenario Builder File Elements View Pun jie p gt 01701 1990 12 31 1999 Elementp eee puuun Habitat Time Series Scenario Start Locakon P Location Habitat Time Senes Model Models Filters Data Editors Other WRIG Wide Water Quality Model Lake Whatcom Water Quality Model Habitat Time Series Model Water Quantity Model Before the Habitat Time Series Model can be run the start and end dates need to be specified in the Scenario Builder To change the start and end dates click on the date boxes frorosjis6s froyosi1990 x located below the toolbar near the left hand corner of the window The start date is the date listed to the left and the end date is the date listed on the right The dates can be edited by clicking on the number in the box and typing in the desired values as shown below Ege Or by clicking on the down arrow Tl to the right of the date and selecting the desired start and end dates from the calendar as shown below WRIA 1 DSS User s Manual 3248 3249 3250 3251 3252 3253 3254 3255 3256 3257 3258 3259 3260 3261 3262 3263 3264 3265 3266 3267 3268 3269 143 1 2 3 5 6 7 8 9 10 iz 13 14 15 4 17 119 20 21 22 23 24 26 27 28 29 30 31 11 28
185. e file a name Both the ClipBoard and File options allow the user to also choose the Object Size This can be done by choosing an option from the lower portion of the screen The first sizing option is No Specific Size which will leave the plot the size it appears in the window The next sizing option is to enter the desired width and then the desired height of the plot in the text boxes to the left of Width The user must also select the desired unit corresponding to the width and height values entered Once the desired sizing options have been entered the Export button will execute the selected options Pressing Cancel will discard the selected options and return the user to the plot window Pressing Help will activate the Help dialog allowing the user to find more information about these options WRIA 1 DSS User s Manual 3964 3965 3966 3967 3968 3969 3970 3971 3972 3973 3974 3975 3976 3977 3978 179 If the Printer option is selected the Object Size options change allowing the user to designate the plot size to be a Full Page or again to enter the desired width and height and select the corresponding units Once these options have been set press the Print button to select a printer and set the printing options for the selected printer The tab titled General allows the user to edit the plots title add a sub title change border styles viewing styles font sizes numeric precision used in the axes labels and grid line
186. e more the two approaches are expected to deviate Tenmile Creek is an example of an extreme case high quality cover increased from none to about 40 of the entire wetted area as the flow increased from the 90 to about the 10 exceedence flow and all of the additional area represented favorable substrate cover for target life stages fry juvenile spawning Squalicum Creek Modeled Fry Depth Velocity and Substrate Percent of Maximum Habitat 0 0 0 2 0 4 0 6 0 8 1 0 1 2 1 4 1 6 Flow cms lt Chinook Fry Coho Fry Trout steelhead Fry a WUA curves calculated using habitat model Appendix C Extrapolation Program User Manual 6448 6449 6450 6451 6452 6453 6454 6455 6456 6457 6458 6459 6460 6461 302 Squalicum Creek Predicted Fry Depth and Velocity Percent of Maximum Habitat 0 0 0 2 0 4 0 6 0 8 1 0 1 2 1 4 1 6 Flow cms lt Chinook Fry Coho Fry Trout steelhead Fry b WUA curves calculated using velocity and depth frequency distribution equations frequency based approach Figure C1 2 Comparison of habitat vs discharge relationships for fry life stage for Squalicum Creek 70 60 R 77 50 p x xX k 40 x X Q x X e X NEA x xXx X Ky 4O Lu a X op 30 rs X E oO tey E m z og mo ta o rn 20 e y X fe iak x 0 o
187. e to browse for folders click the 17 button To select a folder as the desired directory click on the folder s name To open a folder double click the folder s name To save the selected directory click the button Select Water Quantity Output Directory The Select Directory form allows the DSS user to select a directory containing the Water Quantity Model output To access this form press the button to the right of Water Quantity Output Directory on the Input tab of the Water Quality Model Inputs window as shown below WRIA 1 DSS User s Manual 2271 2278 2279 2280 2281 2282 2283 2284 2285 2286 2287 2288 2289 2290 2291 2292 2293 2294 97 Ler Water Quality Model Inputs Oj x Input Output Best Management Prachoes BMPs Selected E Land Cover Grid luke_calS bgd x Lake Whatcom Grids Input Directory E C Program Files wAl4 1 PS54055 DatayGlS Data Gnde Wate J Water Quantity Output Direction C Program Fles twH li 1 D55055 Dete aber Quantity Toohet Water Quality Parameters Database C Program Fles YRA E 1 D55 055 Data hodel hianaosr Databa i coren This will open the Select Water Quality Model Output Directory form as shown below The default location for the Water Quantity Model output is C Program Files WRIA 1_DSS Water Quantity TopNet Files Existing HE Select Water Quantity Model Oul O x t El O Use Curent Scenario Direct
188. e to complete Destination Format Adobe Acrobat PDF Water ear Remove Selected Drainages Destination File ie MWA 1 27 2007 pol g Esecute Report On the left hand side is a list of predefined aggregations These are collections of drainages that are commonly grouped together Click on one of these aggregations and you ll see the drainages that are associated with this aggregation fill the list on the right Pl Launch Report Predefined Aggregation Bellingham Bay Birch Bay Area Drayton Harbor Fraser River Lake Whatcom Lower Mainstenm Nooksack Lummi and Eliza Island Lummi Bay Lummi Peninsula and Portage sland Lynden North Middle Fork Nooksack Morth Fork Nooksack Point Roberts Silver Creek and Nooksack Delta Flow Unita CFS Acre Feet Volume Units Year Display Selected Drainage Anderson v hatcom Austin Beaver Blue Canyon Brannan Cable Carpenter Donayvan Eagle Ridge Fir Geneva Hillsdale Lake Whatcom water Note You may aleo add and remove drainages visually from the map please hold down Ctrl while clicking Water ear Remove Selected Drainages Fish Periodicity Dataset Known Current Y Change Sections Included in Report Warning Report iz lange and may take time to complete Destination Format Adobe Acrobat PDF io MWRLA 1 1 27 2007 pol GF Esecute Report Destination File WRIA 1I DSS User s
189. ect a new land cover type for old land cover types Select New Land Cover Types The Select New Land Cover Types form is displayed when a new polygon is created or when a polygon in the polygon list on the Change Land Cover form is double clicked It allows the DSS user to select a new land cover type for an old land cover type in the polygon Land Cover Change Scenario Element 1370 1371 1372 1373 1374 1375 1376 1377 1378 1379 1380 1381 1382 1383 1384 1385 1386 1387 1388 1389 1390 1391 1392 1393 1394 1395 52 Open Water Open Water Perennial lee Snow Perennial lce Sron Low Intensity Residential Low Intensity Residential High Intensity Residential 22 High Intensity Residential Commerciallndustial Tran 23 Cormerciallndustral T ransp Bare Rock Sand Clay 31 Bare Rock SandClay Quames Strip Mines Grave 32 Quarnries Stip Mines Gravel Transitional 33 Transitional Deciduous Forest 47 Deciduous Forest Evergreen Forest 4 Evergreen Forest Mined Forest 43 Mined Forest Shrubland A Shrubland t BE Right click or Double click on a Land Cover row to choose the new Land Cover type for the polygon View Only Land Cover Inside Polygon Cancel To select a new land cover type for an old land cover type click a row in the land cover types list A menu will be displayed with the possible choices of new land cover type for that row T
190. eesseeeeeeeeeeaaeeeeees 18 Feature Identifier and Shape Labeler Plug in o oo ee ccccccccccceessseseeceeeceeeaasenseeeeees 19 sere LAN Nord 6 1018 1G ol eee ene nee ce eee ee ee ee ee 19 SDan Or b Doane enna OAR RTS Par nT em E 22 Attribute Table Editor Plug in ijcsesussccscenescensnns stessenesncnennsatievecbaenanennsetins sanebecnonesataeeczenwands 23 note ELT Ea OU 0 E enero rere ee Sere eer N E ee pes ea E ae T eee reer reer 25 BR Lissa E ccc nese ance cca nanan EEE E eeucowesas 23 Cie aid a New 5 Ce AIO scrierii na EEE E E EE E ERR 26 Adding Elemen S eserse r eena EEEN E EENE AE E Enisi 2i Coone mia Eee a E E 28 Viewing Properties and the Scenario Tab cccccccccssssessseccececeeaeeeeseeeeeeeeeeaaaeeeees 29 Con arn EE N a O T 30 Seme Me Dait Rani Oer r E 31 PY CDS e E EE EE tion dats E E R E E EE 31 Pannor Te o e a E E E E 32 a i E EE E A EE E A E O EE E EA E 33 OnO R LOE e A E E E A A 33 Importing and Exporting Scenarios essssssssoeeresssssssserrrssssssseeteeessssseseerresssssseeeeres 35 re TS AS AG E E E E E E E E E 36 Table of Contents 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 1i Contigurme the DSS Databas ssavstedtinsen sessauncccntenies assuwnnediesanesssgawanebianiiesatiawend tian tees 37 Placing a Scenario Inside of another SCeNAL1O cc eeeeeeseccccceceeeeesseecceceeesaaassseeeeees 37 Tne Loop COMO ING GS essre E acted oroaiendies
191. elector allows the user to change between US Customary units and Metric units Changing the units will automatically update the units displayed in the Graph Window Units f US Customary C Metric 2D Habitat Viewer Plug in 4836 4837 4838 4839 4840 4841 4842 4843 4844 4845 4846 4847 4848 4849 4850 4851 4852 4853 4854 4855 4856 4857 226 Viewer Tabs The five Viewer Tabs allow the user to view the different results for the selected site Each Viewer Tab has a unique Graph Window and displays unique data for the site selected The following sections describe the Viewer Tabs in detail Physical WUA HSC Fish Distribution Miscellaneous Data Graph Window The graph window displays the selected options for the site selected This window will vary depending on the options selected and the Viewer Tab selected 2D Data Viewer Graph Tabs The 2D Data Viewer includes five tabs allowing the user to view various pieces of the 2D data Each of these tabs is descried in detail in the following sections Physical The Physical tab displays the mesh properties for the selected site as well as background images and fish observations When the 2D Viewer first opens the screen will appear as shown below with the Computational Cell Surface Area for Whatcom Creek showing WRIA 1I DSS User s Manual 221 Phabsim 2D Intensive Site Viewer Seles l l Units Intensive Site Name MEREN US Customary
192. enario the window with the Go and Stop icons You may add the same element to the scenario more than once if your particular scenario requires this As you add elements to the scenario it is a good idea to rearrange them so that they fall in a logical place on the screen You may move a model element by simply clicking on it and holding down the mouse key to drag it The screen below shows what the Scenario Builder looks like after adding the Land Cover Data Editor Note that this example shows the mechanics of setting up a scenario without including all the various specific configuration parameters necessary to run a real scenario Scenario Builder Model Manager 823 824 825 826 827 828 829 830 831 832 833 834 835 836 837 838 839 840 841 842 843 844 845 846 847 848 849 850 28 DSS Scenario Builder Fie Elements View Pun eS gt 01201 1990 12 31 1999 ements i New Scenario Models Filters Data Editors Other Best Management Practices Tool ri Change Land Cover Start Location r4 Change Land Cover Finish Location Connecting Elements Once all of the model elements you wish to use in your scenario have been added they will need to be connected This is done by clicking once on the first element to be connected a box will appear in the very center of the element Click and hold the mouse button down on this box and drag the mouse while holding the mouse
193. ensure that I Agree is selected Press the Install button TA Microsoft NET Framework 1 1 Setup Saks m T Microsoft net WRIA 1 DSS User s Manual License Agreement 4 copy of the license is available for printing at http go microsoft comfwlnkyLinkld 12285 SUPPLEMENTAL END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT FOR MICRASAET SRT amp RE have read understood and agree to the terms of the End User License Agreement and so signify by clicking agree and proceeding to use this product f do not agree Install Cancel 307 After pressing the Install button the NET Framework will begin to install You will see 308 the following screen as this is happening 309 ig Microsoft NET Framework 1 1 Setup i il Installing Components The following items are being installed on Your computer Ml icrosoft NET Framework Files Net T TTT Writing system registry values Rey Writing system registry values Name Value Gathering required information 310 311 312 313 314 When the installation of the NET Framework has completed you ll see the notification 315 window below Press OK on this message window 316 F 2 F E i Microsoft NET Framework 1 1 Setup ai aA Installation of Microsoft NET Framework 1 1 i complete 317 318 Installing the WRIA 1 DSS 319 320 321 322 323 324 325 326 327 328 329 330 Installation Welcome Next yov ll be presented with a welcome screen Th
194. eport Generator Streamflow PEPE CE PREUEELOLERECE CER EEEELEE nononnnnnnunnnnnnnunnnannunnnnnnnnnnnnunnnnunnnnnnnnnnmnnunnnnmnn View Data Change Log Close E Next click the name of the table with contents you wish to edit Appendix A Importing Data into the Master Server 5431 5432 5433 5434 5435 5436 5437 5438 5439 258 J Administration Tools Masfer Server information SQL Server Address Jnooksack uwilusuedu SQL Server Port 22 SQL Server User ID WRAD SOL Server Password quebec SS F Use Trusted Connection Test SQL Server Connection Product Updates Download Location htip nooksack uwl usu edu DBM Sourcey Binary Installers Download Locations http nooksack uwil usu edu download Database Updates Download Location http nooksack uwr usu edu dbupdatess Save All Changes Edit Pafaan Master Server 1 Select Database water Quality 2 Select Table to Edit Water Quality Stations Agency Code Descriptions Comment Code Descriptions Data Code Descriptions Parameter Code Descriptions QAGC Code Descriptions Source Database Descriptions View Data Change Log Close F Clicking the name of the table to edit as shown above will cause the data editor for that table to be displayed shown below For Water Quality and Flow Data tables you may select a particular station from the drop down list to view the data for There is too much data to show all of it If you w
195. epth and the thickness of 5132 each soil rock layer A color coded key lists the soil rock types presented on the graph 5133 te Well Log Data Viewer File Options Well Log Data EE opsol s LL k ch ma co 16 vvell 1D Mell Lage Number of Wells 2523 Vell ID Copy to Clipboard 5134 5135 Well Log Data Viewer Plug In 5136 5137 5138 5139 5140 5141 5142 5143 5144 5145 5146 5147 5148 5149 5150 S151 5152 5153 5154 5153 5156 5157 5158 5159 5160 5161 5162 242 Selecting Well Graph Points from the Map First make sure that the Well Graphs theme is turned on checked and active selected EW Sampling Data Vater Guantty Control MHo ak 1D Habitat Sites 2D Habitat Stes Vell Graphs Vell Report Documents Vater Rights POW Photos Weather Stations Streamflow Sampling Loca Temperature Probes Water Gualty Sampling Sit Py T Gs m E a ii iF Next zoom on the map to the area of interest using the pan E and zoom a Q tocar _ tools Using the select tool locations can be selected for viewing by either clicking on individual points or by clicking and dragging a box around several locations Selecting Well Graph points from the map will load the well graph data for those selected locations into the Well Log Data Viewer shown above Viewing Well Graphs via the Well Log Data Viewer Toolbar Button As an alternative to selecting point
196. ertical line represents the selected flow The available flows for comparison are the same as the Predicted Flows The X axis shows the entire range of Predicted Flows in cfs The Y axis value is the Effective Habitat value in square feet per 100 feet t42 100ft The example below shows the entire effective habitat curve since the starting flow is so near the end flow value As the starting flow value is decreased the chart will automatically update itself to show only that portion of the curve Physical Stage Discharge Longitudinal Profile HSC Habitat Reach WUA Species Comparison Discharge Comparison Surface Plot Starting Discharge 2 01 kd From Q1 To Q2 Comparison From 12 01 cfs For COHO JUV Bell Creek Cross Section 1 Species MIs Lainey ro 60 20 40 Effective Habitat ff 271000 ft 30 20 10 0 0 0 2 5 5 0 T 10 0 12 5 15 0 Surface Plot The Surface Plot is a 3 Dimensional wire frame visualization of all of the available flows in the Flow Comparison tab stacked up next to each other for the selected species from the Species dropdown combo box The X axis and Z axis correspond to the available Predicted Flows in cubic feet per second cfs The Y axis is the Effective Habitat value WRIA 1 DSS User s Manual 4779 4780 4781 4782 4783 4784 4785 4786 4787 4788 4789 4790 4791 4792 4793 4794 A795 4796 4797 4798 4799 4800 4801 4802 4803 223 There are
197. es are dependent 4621 on the plot type selected in the Plot Type section 4622 1D Habitat Viewer Plug in 4623 4624 4625 4626 4627 4628 4629 4630 4631 4632 4633 4634 4635 4636 4637 4638 4639 4640 4641 216 Habitat Station et a s fer Result Data Set ell DO Cross Section fi kd Physical Stage Discharge Longitudinal Profile HSC Habitat Reach WUA Species Comparison Discharge Comparison Surface Flot Data to View Plot Type lf View Observed Data lf View Predicted Data T WSL EFF WSL Log of Data Blue Dots Red Line Stage Discharge Relationship Observed and Predicted Data Bell Creek Cross Section 1 1 50 1 25 Em m 4 00 en E 0 75 T gt 2 wo 50 0 25 0 0 25 5 0 LO 10 0 14 5 15 0 Discharge cts The Observed Data points are shown in blue The x values are the actual flows observed in the Calibration Data set The Predicted Data is drawn in red The x values are the predicted flows that are available The user can toggle on and off the Observed Data and the Predicted Data by checking and un checking the checkboxes marked View Observed Data and View Predicted Data in the Data to View section There are two Plot Types available Water Surface Level minus the Stage Zero Flow value WSL SZF or just the Water Surface Level WSL Either of these plot types may also be viewed on a Log scale To view the selected plot type in a Log scale
198. ess K The database has been exported successfully Appendix B 2 Importing 2D Data into the 2D Habitat Viewer Below are step by step instructions for importing data into the 2D Habitat Viewer Refer to the next section titled Using the 2D Data Importer for the sections using the importer tool itself that section provides step by step instructions for using the importer tool WRIA I DSS User s Manual 5560 5561 5562 5563 5564 5565 5566 5567 5568 5569 5570 5571 5572 5573 5574 5575 5576 5577 5578 5579 5580 5581 5582 5583 5584 5585 5586 5587 5588 5589 5590 5591 3992 5593 5594 5595 5596 5597 5598 5599 5600 265 including screen shots No screen shots are given for using Access to edit the database directly Folder Structure The folder structure that exists for the 2D Viewer is given below To add new data to the 2D Viewer create a new site folder in the 2D Data folder The existing 2D Data folder contains the following folders for existing site data e HSC e Fish Distribution Inside the Fish Distribution folder create the following folders o Background layers o Distribution Layers e A folder for each Station named Site where is a two digit number code Inside each station folder create the following folders o Background Image o FishObs Overlays o Mesh Flow Habitat Species o Miscellaneous Inside each Miscellaneous folder for each station create the followi
199. eterMultiple Stations Add Remove 0 1 Station Multiple Parameters fads Station Parameter combinations are added to the plot using the Fe e button under each plot type An example of this form activated by the Add Remove button is shown below Time Series Data Analyst Plug in 188 H 1 Parameter Multiple Stations Plot Parameter 100000 TEMPERATURE AIA DAILY AVERAGE DEG C station 014140 North Fork Nooksack River above the Middle Fork O1FOFO South Fork Nooksack Arver at Potter Ad 4088 4089 4090 Station Parameter combinations are selected using the pull down boxes at the top of the 4091 form The button is clicked to add the combination to the plot Clicking 4092 saves the selected Station Parameter combination and updates the plot window 4093 pte Multiple Time Series H 8 I Options Plot Type 1 Parameter Multiple Stations Add Remove C7 Station Multiple Parameters Options C Point C Line Both Add Remove Control Line Use Averaging Period 22 Mon did SORT Date Range Include Month Range Stark 2002 January End 2002 December 4094 4095 4096 Using the options on the right side of the form the user can specify whether the time 4097 series are represented as points lines or both In addition the user can superimpose a WRIA 1I DSS User s Manual 4098 4099 4100 4101 4102 4103 4104 4105 4106 4107 4108
200. ew water right or edits an existing water right the Edit View Water Right Control is displayed This allows the DSS user to edit the values for the water right Edit Water Right Sel Fight Edit Item Right Right Name Right Priority D ate S 7 1970 Legal Daily Maximum i 525595 4 cubic feet day Legal 4Snnual Maximum E 53570 24 cubic feet To edit the water right name edit the text in the text box to the right of Name To edit the priority date click the drop down menu to the right of Fronty Date To edit the legal daily maximum allowance edit the text in the text box to the right of b293 Daily Maximum T o edit the legal annual maximum allowance edit the text in the text box to the right of Legal Annual Maxinurn To use the changed water right values click the button To discard the changed Cancel water right values click the button Manage Return Flows When the DSS user creates a new return flow or edits an existing water user the Edit View Return Flow Control is displayed This allows the DSS user to edit the values for the return flow Water Quantity Model Interface 1946 1947 1948 1949 1950 1951 1952 1953 1954 1955 1956 1957 1958 1959 1960 1961 1962 1963 1964 1965 1966 80 Edit Return Flow ReturnF low Edit Iter RetumnFlow2 FAeturnF low R eturnF low FeturmFlows Number of Return Flows FReturnF lowe EN eT Return Flow Units 1 Fraction of Flow ReturmF low ReturnF low Flo
201. ext files with instream flow recommendations for the 37 USU study sites Figure 4 shows an example of the IFR input file Again note that the names of the files e g AndersonCreek txt AustinCreek txt should be exactly the same as in the Source_Site column of the Source Target file Figure 1 The folder is provided with the program Honth IFR cfs Oct 4 46 Hou 20 91 Dec 42 81 Jan 51 49 Feb 50 94 Har 28 60 Apr 18 79 Hay 10 73 Jun 37 Jul 4 95 ug 3 68 Sep 3 54 Figure 4 Example of the IFR input file Pictures Folder The Pictures folder contains a number of pictures that are displayed during the program run The folder is provided with the program Appendix C Extrapolation Program User Manual 6087 6088 6089 6090 6091 6092 6093 6094 6095 6096 6097 6098 6099 6100 6101 6102 286 Running the program The user may choose to extrapolate either IFR or WUA curves or both Figure 5 w Extrapolation E m Eg What Would You Like to Extrapolate i Instream Flow Recommendations l Weighted Usable Area Curves Cancel Figure 5 Extrapolation choices IFR or WUA Dialog opens that asks to Open file with Source and Target Sites Open Source Target_337nodes csv file The user is asked to choose to extrapolate to all 300 nodes or a single node Figure 6 Sls Would you like to extrapolate to f All 300 nodes 337 nodes minus the study sites
202. f optimum values on the suitability curves of at least one parameter velocity or depth but especially both parameters are expected to have higher prediction errors Table C1 2 lists life stages that have higher prediction errors due to the shape of suitability index curves RMSE above 10 Table C1 3 lists target fish and life stages with corresponding RMSEs averaged between small study sites Since Hutchinson Creek had a unique shape of the riverbed and Tenmile Creek was characterized by significantly different substrate cover conditions they were omitted from these results Most of the frequency based curves were predicted within a RMSE of 15 overall and only two life stage curves were predicted with a RMSE of more than 20 Appendix C Extrapolation Program User Manual 304 TenMile Creek Modeled Fry Depth Velocity and Substrate 100 T 80 i rT 5 60 a 40 e 5 2 20 a 0 0 0 0 5 1 0 1 5 2 0 Flow cms lt Chinook Fry Coho Fry Trout steelhead Fry 6480 6481 a WUA calculated using habitat model 6482 TenMile Creek Predicted Fry Depth and Velocity 100 5 80 rT 5 60 5 40 e 5 2 20 a 0 0 0 0 5 1 0 1 5 2 0 Flow cms lt Chinook Fry x CohoFry gt Trout steelhead Fry 6483 6484 b WUA curves calculated using velocity and depth frequency distribution 6485 equations frequency ba
203. has a check mark in its corresponding box A layer is active if it has a box surrounding it and is gray In the following example the Water QualitySampling Sites Temperature Probes and Streamflow Sampling Locations layers are on but only theStreamflow Sampling Locations layer 1s active there can be only one active layer at a time Sampling Data k Streamflow Sampling Locations E Temperature Probes 4 wf Water Quality Sampling Sites Pt You can turn an entire group of layers on by checking the box beside the layer group name Similarly you can turn an entire group of layers off by un checking the box beside the layer group name If you want to display some layers in a layer group but not others you can turn on and off individual layers within each layer group To check or un check a layer simply click in its corresponding box When a layer is checked it is displayed in the map Legend Editor The Legend Editor is a tool that allows you to change the way a layer is displayed To open the layer editor double click on the layer of interest in the legend The following form will open MapWindow Watershed Information System 520 521 322 523 524 529 526 527 528 529 530 531 532 14 Legend Editor ae 24 A ColonngS cheme None El Dynarnucy sibility Disabled Name Streamflow Sampling Lo Expanded False LegendPicture 4 Icon E PoimtColor Foint
204. he Stop 1076 icon within that scenario The scenario will then continue to the Stop icon in the 1077 window above Additional elements could be placed between the Scenario Test 1078 Scenario icon and the Stop icon if desired 1079 1080 This may be useful to encapsulate often used functions 1081 The Loop Control Node 1082 1083 Another advanced scenario element is the loop control node This facilitates running an 1084 element multiple times This is also best illustrated by example 1085 WRIA 1I DSS User s Manual 1086 1087 1088 1089 1090 1091 1092 1093 1094 1095 1096 1097 1098 1099 1100 1101 1102 39 DSS Scenario Builder File Elements Yiew Run ie gt WS Test Scenario Scenario 1 Models Filters Data Editors Other Loop Control Mode i TEENE Start Location CN oo Scenario Test Scenario Loop Control Hode 2 Finish Location In the scenario shown above the execution flows from Go to Loop Control Node The loop control node has been configured to run four times Since the loop control node is connected to the node Scenario Test Scenario 1t will be run four times before execution flows to Stop The Loop Control Node must have a connection leading to a valid scenario element not Stop and a connection coming back into it In this example there is a line between Loop Control Node and Scenario Test Scenario whi
205. he Temperature DO Flags model is run any data already existing in this database will be cleared and the new data for the selected nodes will be written to the database The user must enter the complete pathname in the box to the right of Database Path or use the browse button oe to navigate to the desired database To test the connection to the database and to verify that the database is available press the Test Connection button If a successful connection is made to the database listed the following message will appear Success ao 3 i Connection Successfull Once a successful database connection has been made to the desired database press the save Changes button to continue Select Temperature Flags and Warnings Shapefile When the Temperature and DO Flags Model is run temperature data flags and warnings for the selected nodes will be displayed on the map using a shapefile A default Temperature Flags and Warnings shapefile exists and should be used for all model runs The data in this shapefile is overwritten each time the model runs The shapefile is named Temp_Flags_Warnings shp To select this shapefile press the browse button we to the WRIA 1I DSS User s Manual 3510 3511 3512 3513 3514 3515 3516 3517 3518 3519 3520 157 right of the Temperature Flags and Warnings Shapefile pathname box This will bring up the screen shown below Select A Temperatuer Flags Select Data
206. he bottom of the grid where 5445 the empty line is displayed and begin entering data in that row Editing data 5446 may be done directly on the grid by clicking in the field to be edited and 5447 typing Additionally you may sort the data view by a given column by 5448 clicking the column name You may resize columns by clicking between the 5449 column names and dragging the window itself may also be resized 5450 5451 H Not all data editors have a station drop down as mentioned above as it is not 5452 appropriate for all data editors 5453 5454 I Data is saved by clicking the Save button in the right hand lower corner If 5455 you do not click Save 1 e just close the window the changes will not be 5456 saved 5457 Importing Data Automatically 5458 5459 A Data may be imported into the database tables automatically from a delimited text 5460 file This delimeter may be a comma semicolon tab character or pipe I The Appendix A Importing Data into the Master Server 260 5461 order in which the fields must appear in the file is displayed on the Import screen 5462 described below You are responsible for ensuring that your import operation will 5463 not create duplicate or invalid data the importer does not check for duplicate 5464 records 5465 5466 B First follow all of the steps in Editing Data Manually up to step F causing the 5467 data editor grid to be displayed 5468 5469 C Click the
207. he current choice for the new land cover type will have a check mark beside it Click the land cover that is the desired new land cover type and the new land cover type chosen will be displayed in the land cover types list for the appropriate row To limit the old land cover types listed in the land cover types list to the land cover found Ea View Only Land Cover View Only Land Cover within the polygon being edited click the M Pobson_ button The 1n Poligon l View All Land C ee View All Land C button text will change to be View Ankand cover By clicking on _ vewatLansCover the land cover types list will once again display all of the land cover types To accept the new land cover types selected click the button To discard the new Cancel land cover types selected click the button Remove Land Cover Change Polygon To remove a polygon from the polygon list click on the polygon name in the list and then click the button The polygon will then be removed from the polygon list Open Save Land Cover Change Polygons List To open a saved list of polygons click the z button An open file dialog will then be displayed allowing the DSS user to browse to an xml file containing the saved polygons WRIA 1 DSS User s Manual 1396 1397 1398 1399 1400 1401 1402 1403 1404 1405 1406 1407 1408 1409 1410 1411 1412 1413 1414 1415 1416 1417 1418 1419 1420 1421 1422 142
208. he folder comprising input files required to run the water quantity model Three such folders are provided one each for historic existing and full build out conditions When the model is run this entire set of files 1s copied to the specified output working directory The model is then run in the output working directory which serves as a record of the inputs and outputs for a specific model run scenario The land cover summary database contains the area of each land cover type summarized for each drainage This is created by the land cover summarizer tool The initial land cover summary database provided includes land covers for each scenario Scenario Historic conditions Scenario 2 Existing conditions Scenario 3 Full build out conditions The water management database is a Microsoft Access database contains the information needed to populate the water quantity model water management input files This database is changed when water management options are edited Three initial water management databases are provided one for each scenario The following sections describe the steps involved in using the water quantity model Add Water Quantity Model to DSS Scenario To add the Water Quantity Model to a DSS scenario layout first open the DSS Scenario Builder by choosing the Scenario Builder option under the DSS menu Create a new Water Quantity Model Interface 62 1603 scenario layout by clicking LI Click on the Models
209. heck or uncheck the 4 box to the left of the land cover type To use the changed BMP values click the button To discard the changed BMP Cancel values click the button Delete Best Management Practices To delete the BMP selected in the BMP list click the a button This removes the selected BMP from the BMP list Change Best Management Practices Database To change the BMP database click the button The Database Configuration form will be displayed allowing the user to browse to the Best Management Practices Database Lake Whatcom Water Quality Model Interface 222 2213 2214 2215 2216 2217 2218 2219 2220 2221 2222 2223 2224 2225 2226 2221 2228 2229 2230 2231 2232 94 Database Configuration l xX Please select a Best Management Practices database Microsoft SOL Server Use SOL Server to find the database Server Address Server User ID 0 C Use Trusted Server Password Connection Microsoft Access f Use Access to find the database Please specify the full path to the MDB file containing the database Database Path C Program Files WRIA 1_DSS 055_ Data go Test Connechon s Save Changes To browse to a Microsoft Access Best Management Practices Database click the l button An open file dialog will be displayed The default location for the Best Management Practices is C Program Files WRIA 1_DSS DSS_Data Model Manager Databases BestManagement
210. hecked and active enclosed in a gray box in the Legend frame as shown below WRIA 1I DSS User s Manual 3665 3666 3667 3668 3669 3670 3671 3672 3673 3674 3675 3676 3677 3678 3679 3680 3681 3682 3683 3684 165 Legend E EW Sampling Data wf Water Quantty Control Modes 10 Habitat Sites 2D Habitat Sites i Well Graphs bil Well Report Documents wf Veter Rights POW Photos Weather Stations Streamflow Sampling Locations He Ags oo Temperature Probes k Water Quality Sampling Sites a Next use the Zoom R on fel i and Pan W Tools to locate the area of interest on the map Additional Zoom tools are accessed by clicking on the black arrow as shown amp amp Gl S A Previous mn Next al Max Extents S Layer a Selected ag Shape Using the select tool 4 points can be selected by either clicking on individual stations or by clicking and dragging a box around one or several locations Selecting points from the Water Quality Sampling Sites theme will load the available water quality data for those selected locations into the Time Series Analyst form shown above Time Series Analyst Options Many options are available for viewing and analyzing data using the Time Series Analyst The following figure shows the major parts of the working screen and some of the options available in the Time Series Analyst Each of these is described in the following secti
211. hows prediction error residuals between WUA curves derived using the habitat model and calculated using the frequency based approach for each modeled flow normalized by the MAF at the study site Tenmile and Hutchinson creeks were excluded from this analysis Available habitat for spawning was over predicted at low flows and had low prediction errors at high flows for all fish species except kokanee salmon and rainbow trout for these two fish species prediction errors were extremely high at Whatcom and Squalicum Creeks at higher flows due to reasons discussed above Available habitat for the fry life stages were on average over predicted at low flows and under predicted at high flows Habitat for juvenile and adult life stages was on average over predicted at all flows Steelhead fry coho juvenile and rainbow winter were the life stages predicted with the highest error also shown in Table C1 3 WRIA 1 DSS User s Manual 6528 6529 6530 6531 6532 6533 6534 6535 307 100 A 80 4 4 60 R A L A og 404 m a 2 P o z 204 a o o 2 s 3 L oke x oO Xe ex a 7gp e D yg r x j X T a a a amp Aie 7 er A K noe m 5 TAn Sag He rae TE k m pg ee bie TE oT ma AA O Gly Rg SPE KE 3 eee S a are fe eg Wigan ie r mk ag w a ee ea mR pak X j aX A 3 208 f Tf tit fie a SR e A Ae S fgets h 74 Ka penn RT we ak Fao ak x a 7 x z x gy ge BE XS x T
212. ick the button Save Best Management Practices To save the BMP s displayed in the BMP list click the 1 button This saves the BMP s displayed in the BMP list for the Water Quality Model in the current scenario layout Edit Best Management Practices To edit the BMP selected in the BMP list click the vA button The Edit BMP Values form will then be shown for the BMP selected in the BMP list WRIA 1 DSS User s Manual 2191 2192 2193 2194 2195 2196 2197 2198 2199 2200 2201 2202 2203 2204 2205 2206 2207 2208 2209 2210 2211 93 Hl Edit BMP Values q O x Watershed Layer bsnwrial_v shp Drainage dustin Beaver Best Management Practice Riparian Eufter BMP Parameters BMP Parameters Land Cover Types Affected BMP Application Parameter Total Nitrogen NH3 NH4 6 HOZ NO3 N Total Phosphorus BOD Fecal Coliform Bacteria Information regarding the default list of BMPs and their associated load reductions can be found in the technical documentation for the surface water quality models Reset Values To change a value for the BMP click on the PPametes tab To change a particular value for the BMP enter a number between 0 and 100 into the text box to the right of the value you wish to edit To change whether a land cover type is affected by the BMP click on the Land Cover Types Affected tab To change whether a particular land cover type is affected by the BMP c
213. iew and Disclaimer Drainage Summary Drainage Locator Map Overview and Description Social and Economic Indicators Economic Actyity by Sector Aggregation of4ll Places Zoning Distribution Zoning Map Map of Political Boundaries Land Cover Land Cover Distribution Land Cower Map Fish Species and Habitat Fishenes Map Enown and Historical Fish Species Fish Periodicity Map of Habitat Restoration Projects and Priorities Fish Management Notes and Restoration Priorities Climate and Weather Climate and Weather Monthly Box Plots Climate Data T ables Surface Water Hydrology wt Cancel Save Changes Using this window you may select which sections are going to be generated for and appear in the report You cannot uncheck some of the boxes some of these are required such as the Report Overview and Disclaimer Most of the time when you cannot uncheck a box it s because the box represents a major section heading These appear and disappear automatically depending on whether any minor sections appear in that major section Ensure that you ve checked the sections you want in the report and unchecked those you don t want then click Save Changes You will then return to the Launch Report screen Finally select the format that you wish the report to be saved as by clicking the down arrow 7 to the right of Destination Format and selecting the desire output format as shown below Destination Format Adobe Acrobat PDF y Ad
214. iewer Editor Options Several options are available on the Periodicity Viewer Editor form This form 1s quite large and is best viewed when maximized The various options are described in the following sections Periodicity Viewer Editor Plug In 2818 2819 2820 2821 2822 2823 2824 2825 2826 2827 2828 2829 2830 2831 2832 2833 2834 2835 2836 2837 2838 2839 2840 2841 2842 2843 2844 122 Node Selection Users can select from the list of available locations by using the Node ID pull down box near the top right hand section of the Periodicity Viewer Editor form as shown below Periodicity Viewer Editor File Edit Once a Node ID has been selected the drainage and reach information will be displayed in the boxes as shown below Node ID il Drainage ID 113 Name Nooksack River Delta Reach ID 24 Mame Nooksack Aier Delta Below the drainage and reach information the periodicity data is displayed for the selected node Hame Distribution Feriadicity Species Lifestage Curent Curent Presumed Jan FEB MAR APR May JUN JUL AUG SEP oct Noy DEC known Presumed Historic Potential Spring Chinook Spawning Stream Mo Ho No ee a aa Spawning River Mo Ho Ho a Re e Se a Spawning Large River Mo Mo No FALET Holding No No No fe et Juvenile No No No SESS SSSaSSS SSS eaas Fry No No No EEE ECEE Viewing Distribution and Periodicity Data
215. ight of the graph The red line represents where the habitat suitability for Species 1 is greater than the habitat suitability of Species 2 The green line shows where the habitat suitability for Species 2 1s greater than the habitat suitability of Species 1 The blue line shows where the habitat suitability for both species is equal The magenta line shows the habitat suitability for Species 2 only and the tan line shows the habitat suitability for Species 1 only Note that if the same species is selected for Species 1 and Species 2 only the blue line equal will appear The example below shows Chinook Juvenile compared to Coho Juvenile at cross section at Bell Creek Physical Stage Discharge Longitudinal Profile HSC Habitat Reach WUA Species Comparison Discharge Comparison Surface Plot Species 1 CHINOOK JU Species 2 Kunn Species To Species Comparison CHINOOK JUV To COHO JUV Bell Creek Cross Section 1 Habitat Suitability Effective Habitat ff 2 1000 fh 0 0 2 5 5 0 45 10 0 12 5 15 0 Discharge cfs 1D Habitat Viewer Plug in 4756 4757 4758 4759 4760 4761 4762 4763 4764 4765 4766 4767 4768 4769 4770 4771 471712 4773 4774 A775 4776 4111 4778 222 Discharge Comparison The Discharge Comparison tab plots the Effective habitat for the selected species starting at the predicted discharge flow value is changed to the selected Starting Discharge value The black v
216. ild Connection Test Connection The default location for the Periodicity database is given below C Program Files WRIA 1_DSS DSS_Data Model Manager Databases mwPhabTS Model Periodicity mdb If the data was not installed in the default location this link should be automatically updated for the correct location If the link is not updated or to select a different Periodicity Database press the browse button to the right of the Periodicity Database pathfile box Once a database has been selected the connection string should be built automatically If not press the Build Connection button Once the Connection String has been built press the 18st Connecton button to test the connection If the connection is successful the following message will appear PhabSim 2D Viewer X _ Connection successful After a successful periodicity database connection has been made and the proper shapefile and Node ID have been selected press 4 onthe Data Connection form to continue The Periodicity Nodes will be added to the layers and displayed on the map similar to the image shown below _ Water Quantity Control Nodes U 1D Habitat Sites _ 20 Habitat Sites de yy manag til _ Well Graphs _ Vell Report Documents Water Rights POW _ Photos Weather Stations Streamflow Sampling Locations dy Temperature Probes L C water Quality Sampling Sites E Political Features County B
217. ilder you must connect the model to the StattLecation and the FinishLocation nodes in the scenario layout Water Quality Scenario oe Q stop i Start Location x Finish Location iG Lake Whatcom Water Luality Model First click on the StatLocation node Then click and hold the mouse on the blue box in the center of the node s icon While still pressing the mouse button drag the mouse to the WRIA Wide Water Quality Model node in the scenario layout WRIA Wide Water Quality Model Interface 104 Water Quality Scenario Start Locator Finish Location Af o E E 1B Water ality Model 2422 _ 2423 2424 Repeat the previous step by again clicking the blue box in the center of the WRIA Wide D 2425 Water Quality Model dragging the mouse to the FrishLecaion node 2426 Water Quality Scenario FN a Start i Finish Location Lake Whatcom Water Quality Model 2427 2428 2429 The WRIA Wide Water Quality Model is now ready to be run in the DSS Scenario 2430 Builder To edit the WRIA Wide Water Quality Model settings double click on the 2431 WRIA Wide Water Quality Model node in the scenario layout 2432 Water Quality Scenario Start Locator Figi 2433 2434 WRIA 1 DSS User s Manual 2435 2436 2437 2438 2439 2440 2441 2442 2443 2444 2445 2446 2447 2448 2449 2450 105 The WRIA Wide Water Quality Model settings form will be displayed as seen
218. ile wl Cancel If the Periodicity Nodes layer has been added to the current project it will appear in the From loaded layers list as shown above If it has not been added select the From file button and press the browse button to navigate to the proper location Once the desired shapefile has been selected press __ _ to continue Once the shapefile has been selected the Node ID field must be selected Use the down arrow to the right of the Node ID filed box to select the desired field as shown below Shapetile Path for the Model Output Nodes Point Shapetile Ic Program Files WwAIA 1 OS54055 Data GlS_Data t Node ID Field Database Penodicity Database Connection Sting WAIA Name For the Periodicity Nodes shapefile the Node ID Field 1s Node_ID as shown above Selecting the Periodicity Database Once the path for the Model Output Nodes Point Shapefile has been successfully specified the Periodicity Database connection must be made This is done using the Database section of the Data Connection form as shown below WRIA I DSS User s Manual 2747 2748 2749 2750 2751 2152 2753 2754 2755 2756 2757 2758 2759 2760 2761 2762 2763 2764 2765 2766 2767 2768 2769 2770 2711 119 Databaze Periodicity Database C Program Files AlA 1_DS545055 DataModel Manager Dat Connection String Provider Microsoft Jet OLE DB 4 0 D ata Source C Program Files A Bu
219. ile bet Hy Chinook Spawn LangeRiy H 20 DataQS 2D Data New Datasti Whatcom S pecies Files ChinookS pawnLarge Chinook Spawn River H 20 DataQ5420D Data New Data 01 WhatcomS pecies Files ChinookS pavwnAyver bet i 4 Import Species Data Importing Species Done File O 5992 5993 5994 5995 Click the Import Species Data button and the progress will be displayed as the data is 5996 imported Once this finishes each of the output files chs will be written to the output 5997 locations listed from the Source Filename listed in the File list and an entry put into the 5998 database for each of them 5999 6000 Mesh flow and species data should now be written to the selected database for the 6001 selected site To import data for another site select a new site name from the list and 6002 repeat the importing steps 6003 6004 6005 6006 Appendix B Importing 1D and 2D data from PHABWin_2002 282 6007 WRIA 1I DSS User s Manual 6008 6009 6010 6011 6012 6013 6014 6015 6016 6017 6018 6019 6020 6021 6022 6023 6024 6025 6026 6027 6028 6029 6030 6031 6032 6033 6034 6035 6036 6037 6038 6039 6040 6041 6042 6043 6044 283 Appendix C Extrapolation Program User Manual Extrapolation Program Introduction The program extrapolates instream flow recommendations IFR and or weighted usable area WUA curves from 37 study sites 20 intensive IFIM sites and 17 rapid as
220. ime Series Model Settings The inputs for the Habitat Time Series Model include the following Habitat Database Daily Flow Database Scenario Run Model Nodes Shapefile Node ID Field Name and Select Nodes Each of these options may be edited in the Inputs section of the Habitat Time Series Model Parameters form How to edit each of these options is discussed in the following section titled Edit Habitat Time Series Model Inputs The output options for the Habitat Time Series Model consist of selecting and output database The output database can be selected using the Outputs section of the Habitat Time Series Model Parameters form More information about this process is given in the section titled Edit Habitat Time Series Model Outputs Edit Habitat Time Series Model Inputs The Inputs section of the Habitat Time Series Model Parameters form allows the DSS user to edit the inputs for the Habitat Time Series Model Inputs Habitat Database C Program Files WAIA 1_ 0554055 Data Model Manager Databases mwPhabl SModel Penodicity mdb Daily Flow Databaze Water uantityS treamF low c Scenaro Run Current Hodel Nodes Shapetie C Program Files AI4 1 DS54055 Data GlS Data Shapetles ModelWodes PenodicityNodes shp HodelD FieldName ip Select Hodes Selected Hodes Default All Modes Method B Select Habitat Database The first option listed in the Inputs section allows the user to select the Habitat Database
221. in the scenario layout 3308 J start Lgcation E Finish Location a Temperature and DO Flags Model 3309 3310 First click on the StatLocation node Then click and hold the mouse on the box in the center 3311 ofthe node s icon While still pressing the mouse button drag the mouse to the 3312 Temperature and DO Flags Model node in the scenario layout 3313 WRIA 1 DSS User s Manual 3314 3315 3316 3317 3318 3319 3320 3321 3322 3323 3324 3325 3326 3321 3328 3329 147 Start Location o l Finish Location E l Tempefature and DO Flags Model E Repeat the previous step by again clicking the box in the center of the Temperature and 2 DO Flags Model dragging the mouse to the FrishLossion node Start Location stop p Location Temperature and DO Flags Model The Temperature and DO Flags Model is now connected properly to be run in the DSS Scenario Builder The model will not run successfully without the proper settings To edit the Temperature and DO Flags Model settings double click on the Temperature and DO Flags Model node in the scenario layout as shown below E eZ e E Temperatu and DO Flags F odel The Temperature and DO Flags Model settings form will be displayed as seen below Temperature and Dissolved Oxygen Flags Model Interface 3330 3331 3332 3333 3334 3335 3336 3337 3338 3339 3340 3341 3342 148 Temperature DO Fl
222. ine any of these fonts At the bottom of the tab a sample of the selected text style will be displayed Time Series Data Analyst Plug in 4005 4006 4007 4008 4009 4010 4011 4012 4013 4014 4015 182 WWU95 DH 3 Drayton Harbor Customization General Plot Subsets Avis Font Color Style Main Title Comic Sane MS W bold italic i underline Sub T itle Arial bold kW italic underline Subset Point Asis Labels Arial if bold italic underline sme AaBbCcDdEeF fGq OF Cancel Apply Help Export Maximize The tab titled Color allows the user to change the colors of the plot Notice the Apply button is not active for this tab as all color changes are automatically applied to the plot WWU95 DH 3 Drayton Harbor Customization M BR General Plot Subsets Avie Font Color Style pica TITE C Desk Background Bi PB MRE Shadow Col NES Quick Styles Graph F d raph Foregrour Bitmap Gradient Styles Light Medium Dark C Inset C Inset C Inset C Shadow C Shadow C Shadow C Line C Line C Line C Ao Border f Ao Border f MHo Border A m C Graph Background e e OK Cancel Help Export Maximize The tab titled Style allows the user to modify the plot styles used for each subset by selecting the point type line type and colors WRIA I DSS User s Manual 4016 4017 4018 4019 4020 4021 4022 4023 183 0500
223. io Builder s internal database A scenario can be saved by clicking on the floppy disk icon circled in red below File Elements 0 eg The scenario is also saved automatically whenever it is executed Scenario Builder Model Manager 924 925 926 927 928 929 930 931 932 933 934 935 936 937 938 939 940 941 942 943 944 945 ey A scenario can be opened again by choosing the File menu then Open or alternatively by clicking the yellow folder icon located to the left of the save button circled in red below amp DSS Scenario Builder Fie Elements View Pun DEM Running the Scenario A scenario may be executed in one of two ways selecting the Run menu then select Run All Elements or by clicking the Play icon circled in red below DSS Scenario Builder Fie Elements View Run AO Notice that there is also a Selected option in the Run menu this will run the currently selected scenario element only ignoring all other elements in the scenario This option should be used with caution as scenario elements often rely on data produced by other elements in the scenario Once a scenario has started running the screen will appear as shown below Notice the outline around the element that is currently running and the progress message and progress bar at the bottom of the screen F DSS Scenario Builder Fie Elements View Pun eS 01401 1990 12731 1999 El New S
224. iption etc is linked to a geographic 4317 coverage showing the locations at which the photographs were taken To access this tool 4318 press the ESI button on the DSS toolbar If this button is not shown on the toolbar go 4319 to the Plug ins menu and select Photo Viewer The following is an example of the Photo 4320 Viewer form 4321 i Photo Viewer View Selected Photographs Locations aS Attributes of Current Photograph selected Locations 4 Motes Mone View Comments Add Location Date 10200 Direction Downstream M Photos Available Photographs Cornell Creek looking downstream form Mt Bak View the entire photograph without ecroll bars View Comments Add Photo Eney ae Ciparu Luse 4322 4323 4324 WRIA 1 DSS User s Manual 4325 4326 4327 4328 4329 4330 4331 4332 4333 4334 4335 4336 4337 4338 4339 4340 4341 4342 4343 4344 4345 4346 4347 4348 4349 201 Viewing Photographs The available photographs in the watershed can be viewed by either clicking on and selecting a Photo Viewer point or group of Photo Viewer points from the map or by clicking on the Photo Viewer Toolbar button Eci Selecting points from the map loads the available photographs for the selected locations into the Photo Viewer whereas clicking on the Photo Viewer toolbar button loads all available photographs in the entire database into the Photo Viewer Selecting Photo
225. is simply tells you what program is about to installed and gives you the opportunity to cancel Select the Next button on this screen Welcome to the InstallShield Wizard for WRIA 1 DSS Final Deliverable Standard The InstallShield Py Wizard will install WRIG 1 055 Final Deliverable Standard on your computer To continue click Next WORKING This program is protected by copyright law and international treaties You will then be asked to choose a destination for the installation files To use the default locations press Next ie WRIA 1 DSS Final Deliverable Standard InstallShield Wizard Destination Folder Click Next to install to this Folder or click Change to install to a different Folder Install GIS DATA in location programs must be installed in C Program Files Ci Progran FilestWwRIA 1_D551 InstallShield WRIA 1 DSS User s Manual 331 332 333 334 335 336 337 338 339 340 341 342 343 344 345 346 347 348 349 Setup Type If you are installing the Standard edition of the WRIA 1 DSS you may skip this section For the Standard edition of the DSS clicking Next on the previous window will have started the installation process see Installing If you re installing the Administrative edition of the WRIA 1 DSS you will see the window below This gives you the opportunity to select which components you would like to install Choosing Typical will install the same software as the Sta
226. ish to add or edit stations edit the appropriate Stations table WRIA 1 DSS User s Manual 259 ji Water Quality Data Station S Se re Data for Station az Station Agency Code Date Depth Parameter CL Value Comment Co QA 0o03 10EPACOP 82271971 0 450 27 51 null nul mooy 10EPACOP 8 2 1971 163 450 29 02 null nul 0003 10EPACOP 8 9 1971 163 760 1 rill nul moz 10EPACOP 829 1971 163 760 1 rill nul 0003 10EPACOP 8 9 1971 163 760 1 rill nul mooz 10EPACOP 829 1971 327 760 1 rill nul M003 10EPACOP 829 1971 327 760 1 rill nul mooz 10EPACOP 829 1971 327 760 1 rill nul 0003 10EPACOP 8 9 1971 0 760 0 rill nul moon 10EPACOP 8 9 1971 0 760 0 null nul 0003 10EPACOP 7 26 1971 O 760 1 rill nul moon 10EPACOP 722671971 O 760 1 null nul 0003 10EPACOP 7 26 1971 O 760 1 rill nul mooz 10EPACOP 8 21971 0 760 0 null nul 0o03 10EPACOP 8 2 1971 163 760 0 rill nul 0003 10EPACOP 82271971 0 760 0 null nul 7 nian 10F PAC CAE mE F Le F 162 FEN Prilli m To Delete Click to the left of the record and press Delete on the keyboard Tah Ead zm 5440 To Add Scroll to the bottom of the grid and begin entering new data me 5441 5442 G As the instructions at the bottom of the screenshot state you may delete a 5443 record by clicking in the grey area of the record to highlight it then press 5444 delete on the keyboard To add a record scroll to t
227. ist file should be in a specific format FlowValue Source Filename csv Output Filename chs Following is an example file ChinookFry txt Notepad File Edit Format View Help 4 ESAD DatalS 2D Datastey Data01UhatcomSpectes FilesSource Files Chinook FryQ i4 cav C Program Files 2DInp A I DatalS 2D Datastey Data01UhatcomSpectes Files Source Files Chinook Fry l cav C Progran Files 2DInp A I DatalS 2D Datastev Data 01UhatcomSpectes Files Source Files Chinook FryQ 28 cav C Progran Files 2DInp H 420 DatalS 2D Data tey Data01UhatcomSpectes FilesSource Files Chinook FryQ 3 cay C Program Files 2DInp 2 EAD DatalS 2D Datastey Data 01 UhatcomSpecies FilesSource Files Chinook FryQ 42 cav C Program Files 2DInp H 420 DatalS 2D Datastey Data01UhatcomSpectes FilesSource Files Chinook FryQ 49 cay C Program Files 2DInp A I DatalS 2D Datastey Data01UhatcomSpectes FilesSource FilesChinook Fry b cav C Program Files 2DInp A I DatalS 2D Detastev Data01 UhatcomSpecies Files Source Files Chinook FryQ cev C Program Files 2DInpo H 20 DatalS 2D Datastey Data01UhatcomSpectes FilesSource Files Chinook FryQ 6 cay C Progran Files 2DInp A I DatalS 2D Datastev Data 01 UhatcomSpectes FilesSource Files Chinook FryQ li cav C gt Progran Files 2DIn Appendix B Importing 1D and 2D data from PHABWin_2002 5982 5983 5984 5985 5986 5987 5988 5989 5990 5991 280 After choosing the appropriate file the window
228. izer 10 Hab MI arm il JE maag rid Wizard 2695 2696 2697 This will add the Periodicity Viewer button to the toolbar When the toolbar button is 2698 clicked the following form will appear 2699 Periodicity Viewer Editor File Edit Node ID il Fa gl Restore Defaults Penodicity Kep Drainage ID 113 Name Nooksack River Delta C _ Reach ID 24 Mame Nooksack River Delta Present Absent Peak Name Distribution Periodicity a Species Litestage Cunent Current Presumed jay cee man apn may JUN sut aua sep oct novi known Presumed Historic Potential Spring Chinook Spawning Stream Mo Ho Ho ae a ee ee Spawning River Moa No No Spawning Large River Mo No No Holding Wo No No Juvenile Mo No No F Alo MHo MHo spawning Yes Ho No TARE Spawning No Ho KORRE Juvenile No No Dee it a es Lee Ke ase Epon AA e 2700 2701 2702 Configuring the Data Connection 2703 2704 Ifthe input and output data for the Periodicity Viewer Editor has not been configured or 2705 has been configured incorrectly the following screen will appear before the Periodicity 2706 Viewer Editor will open as shown below 2707 WRIA 1 DSS User s Manual 2708 2709 2710 2711 2112 2713 2714 2715 2716 2717 2718 2119 2720 2721 2122 2123 2124 2123 2726 212 117 Data Connection Shapetile Path for the Model Output Nodes Point Shapetile Mode
229. j lk e M Photo Locations Le Sinead Gages a J amp Water Quaity Stations amp D Benet Compheance Syst Elk Hydrogrograghy ET HHD eter Bodes P D HHD River Reach Fie Ay EO Roads LCT mejor foarta k as295 99 Y 53a O p You can change the way the Preview Map is displayed by turning on off layers in the legend zooming the Map view to the desired extents and then right clicking inside the Preview Map and selecting Update Preview Upon being updated the Preview Map will mimic whatever is being displayed in the Map view Select Feature Tool The select feature tool is used to select one or more features of the active layer To use this tool click on the Select Feature button o To select one or more features either point and click with your mouse hold down the SHIFT key to select more than one feature or draw a box surrounding the features The feature s will turn yellow when selected MapWindow Watershed Information System 554 555 556 557 558 559 560 561 562 563 564 565 566 567 568 569 570 571 572 573 574 575 576 577 578 579 580 581 582 583 584 585 586 587 588 589 16 Zoom Tools The tool bar contains several zooming tools The following tool buttons are available w The Pan button allows you to drag your view in any direction without changing the scale of the map HX To zoom to a smaller area click the Zoom In button and then click on the map The Ma
230. l Documentation The Habitat Time Series Model HabitatTimeSeriesInput mdb database is provided with the program If the user chooses to output habitat values into individual csv files separate for each node comma delimited files with predicted habitat values will be saved in the PredictedHabitat_Nodes folder If the folder already exists the user will be asked to either replace the folder or to enter a different folder name If the user chooses to output habitat values into the database the user will be prompted to open the database If the user chooses to predict habitat at a single node the program will display a window with the choice to either enter the node number or to see the map Figure 7 If the entered number 1s not a valid node number the user will be asked the reenter the node number If the entered node has a MAF of more than 130 cfs the user gets a message Figure 8 and is asked to enter another node number w Output Choice E m Ed Would you like to save Predicted Habitat in the C Habitat Database Figure 10 Predicted habitat output choice WRIA 1 DSS User s Manual 6295 6296 6297 6298 6299 6300 6301 6302 6303 6304 6305 6306 6307 6308 45 4h 49 5 Il 42 43 54 39 16 19 ae ol ap 0s 64 Figure 11 First few records of the Nodes csv file Habitat_ Prediction 295 Mean Annual Flow at a site can not be higher than 130 cfs Some of the nodes have MAF higher
231. l Log Data Viewer Toolbar Button As an alternative to selecting points using the map clicking the Well Log Data Viewer toolbar button opens the Well Log Data Viewer and loads the entire database of well report documents into the Well Log Data Viewer as shown above Users can browse the entire database of well report documents without interacting with the map However because the Well Log Data Viewer toolbar button is also used to access well graphs the Well Report Documents theme must be active before clicking on the toolbar button Well Report Document Viewing Options Well report documents can only be viewed one at a time The viewer window refreshes automatically as well ID numbers are selected from the list Viewing Entire Well Report Document Image W View the entire Image without scroll bars When checked ge the entire document is shown in the viewing window as shown above The number of well report documents available for viewing is shown in the section below the well report document window Well ID numbers for the sites loaded into the Well Log Data Viewer are listed in the Well ID window WRIA 1I DSS User s Manual 5239 5240 5241 5242 5243 5244 24 3540 5247 5248 5249 5250 5251 5252 5253 5254 3233 5256 247 Viewing Enlarged Image of Well Report Document When the box Wiew the entire photograph without scrollbars is left unchecked the image is shown larger than actual size
232. l black window as shown below Inside this window you Il see Restoring Database FlowData followed by Restoring Database ClimateData and so on for four databases No action is required on your part here simply wait for the process to complete These databases are very large so this step may take a few minutes E C Program Files WRIA 1_DSS SDEDATABASES restoredb exe Installation Complete After the window above finishes yov ll be returned to your Windows desktop Now the installation 1s complete you may use the DSS The following sections contain detailed descriptions of the functions used within the DSS It is not a systematic example of specifically what data to use but rather an explanation of how the DSS works Consequently some windows may not display identical information for every possible option Installing the WRIA 1 DSS 430 431 432 433 434 435 436 437 438 439 440 44 442 443 444 445 446 447 448 449 450 10 MapWindow Watershed Information System The MapWindow Watershed information system WIS is an extensible GIS based toolset that provides geospatial and temporal data visualization and analysis to aid watershed managers and decision makers The WIS can be used for data visualization and analysis associated with Total Maximum Daily Load TMDL development analysis source water protection programs and to aid watershed council members or other stakeholder groups
233. l form Select Best Management Practice To select a Best Management Practice choose a Best Management Practice from the drop down list to the right of Bet Management Practice in the Best Management Practices Tool form To add the Best Management Practice specified in the drop down list click the ence button The Best Management Practice for the selected drainage will be added to the Best Management Practice list Create New Best Management Practices To create a new set of BMP s click the button You will be asked to confirm whether you would like to start with new BMP s discarding any that may currently be displayed in the BMP list Click the L button to clear existing BMP s Click the _ button to keep the current list of BMP s Opening Existing Best Management Practices To open a set of previously defined BMP click the El button The Select Scenario form will be displayed allowing the DSS user to select a set of BMP s associated with a DSS Scenario Run ID OF Cancel Ai WRIA 1 DSS User s Manual 2922 2923 2524 2525 2526 2321 2528 2529 2530 2531 2552 2533 2534 2535 2536 2537 2538 2539 2540 2541 2542 109 To open the BMP s contained in the selected scenario click the button To cancel opening a set of BMP s from a previous scenario click the Cacai button Save Best Management Practices To save the BMP s displayed in the BMP list click the 4 button
234. l see a progress meter with an estimated time remaining Microsoft SOL Server Desktop Engine qLal Please wait while Windows configures Microsoft SQL Server eo Desktop Engine Time remaining 18 seconds Cancel Reboot After the Microsoft SQL Server Desktop Engine has finished installing or after you ve clicked OK on the Instance Name is Invalid message you ll see the screen below asking you to reboot your computer You must restart your computer to finish the installation of the WRIA 1 DSS You can click No to restart later if you wish but you must restart your computer before attempting to use the DSS i WRIA 1 DSS Final Deliverable Standard Installer You must restart your system For the configuration changes made to WRI4 1 055 Final Deliverable Standard to take effect Click Yes to restart now or Mo iF you plan to restart later WRIA 1I DSS User s Manual 401 402 403 404 405 406 407 408 409 410 411 412 413 414 415 416 417 418 419 420 421 422 423 424 425 426 427 428 429 Restoring Databases After your computer reboots you may need to log back in with your username and password Please log in as the same user who began the installation 1 e don t log in as Bob to start the installation then after rebooting log in as Joe When your computer starts back up you will not immediately see your familiar Windows desktop First you ll see a smal
235. last option provides the user with control over the 3900 dimensions of the exported plots These dimensions can be set to the desired image size 3901 for pasting into a document to avoid needing to resize them after they are pasted into the 3902 document tt Options Summary Plot Options f Automatic f User Select Update AMIS Minimum Fa 4 1972 816i Maximum 12 19 1977 9 54 Steps 250 Y Axis Minimum Doo Maximum 0293F H Steps Ba 00 L Change plot line thickness Y h a L Change plot point size Y image metafile dimensions in width 6 Height 4 3903 3904 3905 The Notes tab opens a screen into which a user may type any notes pertaining to analysis 3906 The screen is populated with NONE until a user supplies notes If notes extend 3907 beyond the original screen length a vertical scroll bar will appear along the right side of 3908 the window so the entire length of notes can be accessed 3909 i Options Summary Plot Options Plot Enhancements Data Sources Motes NONE 3910 3911 WRIA 1 DSS User s Manual 3912 3913 3914 3915 3916 3917 3918 3919 3920 3921 3922 3923 3924 3925 3926 3927 3928 3929 3930 3931 177 Additional plot customization options can be accessed by positioning the pointer on the plot window clicking the right mouse button and selecting Customization Dialog as shown below viewing Style Border Style Font Size an y Show
236. layed with LandCover shown Click the button To save the land cover grid that has been selected click the button To discard the Cancel land cover grid that has been selected click the button Select Polygon Shapefile To select a polygon shapefile click the button to the right of 77m WRIA 1I DSS User s Manual 1515 1516 1517 1518 1519 1520 1521 1522 1523 1524 1525 1526 1527 1528 1529 1530 1531 532 1533 1534 1535 59 Select Input Land Cover Grid Poligon Shapetile Polygon ID Field z Polwgon Mame Field X The Select Shapefile form will then be displayed d Select Watershed Shapefile 5 fx Select Data Layer f From loaded layers US Forest Service National Parks National Recreation Areas Listed Water Grid Cells Marine Waters Shellfish Harvesting Activities Water Bodies Comprehensive Plan Zonin Municipal Boundaries State C From Base Data Add ToView IN one Selected E C From file E l Drainage ID Field BSNWRIATA Drainage Mame Field DRAIN_NAME ka Cancel To select a shapefile loaded in MapWindow s view click the gt then select the name of the shapefile layer in the layer list radio button From Bas Data To select a shapefile from the DSS base data click the radio button then click the button A base data form will be displayed with Drainages shown Click the button To select a sha
237. le Cutthroat Spawning Coho Fry Rainbow Winter Chinook Fry Pink Spawning Coho Juvenile Chinook Holding Steelhead Fry Native Char Spawnin Appendix C Extrapolation Program User Manual 6505 6506 6507 6508 6509 6510 6511 6512 6513 6514 6515 6516 6517 6518 6519 6520 6521 6522 6523 6524 6525 6526 6527 306 Table C1 3 RMSEs calculated for WUA curves habitat model and HV curves proposed technique for small sites within WRIA1 Hutchinson Creek and Tenmile Creek were excluded from the analysis Fish Life Stage RMSE Fish Life Stage RMSE Chinook Spawn Stream Rainbow Adult Steelhead Spawning Cutthroat Spawning Coho Spawning Mountain Whitefish Juvenile Mountain Whitefish Adult Steelhead Juvenile Cutthroat Adult Rainbow Winter Fall Chum Spawning Pink Spawning Sockeye Spawning Rainbow Juvenile Native Char Adult Native Char Juvenile Coho Fry Chinook Fry Rainbow Spawning Chinook Holding Chinook Juvenile Kokanee Spawning Cutthroat Juvenile Coho Juvenile Native Char Spawning Steelhead Fry When a comparison was made between WUA curves calculated using 2d hydraulic and habitat models and WUA curves calculated using 1d hydraulic and habitat models for the same study sites average RMSE was 10 5 median RMSE 8 1 when WUA curves calculated using 2d models were compared to Habitat Values calculated using frequency equations an average RMSE was 15 2 median RMSE 13 4 Figure C1 5 s
238. le of Contents 264 265 266 267 268 269 270 271 212 29 274 275 276 211 278 279 280 Installing the WRIA 1 DSS Starting the Installation To begin the installation close all other programs Insert the first CD labeled Disk 1 If the installation does not start within a few moments double click on the My Computer icon on your desktop In the window that appears double click the CD ROM drive This should start the installation The following screen will appear once installation has successfully started InstallShield Wizard Preparing to Install WRILA 1 055 Final Deliverable Standard Setup is preparing the InstallShield Wizard which will guide You through the program setup process Please wat Configuring Microsoft R WET Framework LALLLLLLLLLLLLLLL Cancel Installing the WRIA 1 DSS 281 282 283 284 285 286 287 288 289 290 291 292 293 294 295 296 297 298 299 300 301 302 303 304 305 306 NET Framework Installation The next step is to install the NET Application Framework Much of the WRIA 1 DSS is based upon this component This next step may not be necessary if your computer already has this component installed If the installation determines this step to be necessary you will see the screen below If you see a different screen skip to the section labeled Installation Welcome At this screen browse through the License Agreement if you wish then
239. lection click Uk Number Distribution and Time Distribution plots are automatically updated to display data only for the selected parameters Time Series Data Analyst Plug in 192 Parameter List Parameter M 1 1 1 2 TETRACHLOROETHANE WHOLE WATER UG L 1 1 1 TRICHLOROETHANE TOTWUG L H 1 1 2 2 TETRACHLOROETHANE TOTWLG AL E 1 1 2 TRICHLORO 1 2 2 TRIFLUOROET WHOLE WATER UGL E 1 1 2 TRICHLOROETHANE TOTWUG L E 1 1 DICHLOROETHANE TOTWUG L E 1 1 DICHLOROETHYLENE TOTWLUGL 1 1 DICHLOROPROPENE HOLE WATER UG L 1 2 3 4 TETRACHLOROBEN ENE IN FISH WET WOT MG KG 1 2 3 TRICHLOROBENZENE WHOLE WATER UGL 1 2 3 TRICHLOROPROPANE WHOLE WATER UG L 1 2 3 TRIMETHYLBEN ENE WHOLE WATER UGL H 1 2 4 TRICHLOROBENZENE DRY WGTBOTUG EG F 1 2 4 TRICHLOROBENZENE TOTWUG L 1 2 4 TRICHLOROBENZENE WET WOTTISMG EG Al 4 2 A TRIME THY BE RIFE RIE WHAI E ATEA IEA k Check All O Uncheck All OF Cancel 4158 4159 4160 Statistical Summaries 4161 4162 The Parameter Summary Table option activated by clicking on the Parameter Summary 4163 Table toolbar button provides tabular statistical summaries for data at selected water 4164 quality stations The following figure shows an example tabular statistical summary 4165 Ei Summary Table File Edit view 4 ggi Range Of Mean Median Standard Deviation Geometric Mean Minimum Maximum 1972 541 COLIFORM TOT MEMBRA
240. lmage System Drawing Bit FointSize 1 FontStyle ptUserDetined TransparentColor B 0 0 711 Hame The name digplayed in the legend The Legend Editor contains five sections Coloring Scheme Display Properties Layer Properties Legend Properties and Map Bitmap Each section has a list of one or more properties To change a property click on its corresponding box at the right A pull down menu or dialogue box will become available that will allow you to make changes FontColor k Fointlma Custom web System r PointSizd En E EE Transpa im a E E H a EE Sees LLL EEE __ EEHEEHE E Soo You can collapse a section by clicking its corresponding minus sign box at the extreme left of the form You can expand a section by clicking on the corresponding plus sign box WRIA 1 DSS User s Manual 533 534 535 536 537 538 539 540 541 542 543 544 545 546 547 548 549 550 551 552 553 15 Preview Map The Preview Map allows you to change the extents of the Map view The red rectangle in the Preview Map shows the extents of the current Map view in relation to the overall project extents To change the current extents via the Preview Map click in the center of the red rectangle in the Preview Map and drag it to the desired position Your Map view will automatically zoom to the updated extents Fle Edt Pugins ShapefieEdtor Hep Dga Gt BHi5 T4 48 E8 eaia i ee an E
241. lots either by clicking the Show Control Lines option to uncheck the box on the Plot Options tab or by clicking on the Add Remove Control Line button selecting the control line you wish to delete in the Add Control Line Form and then clicking the button to delete it 12203550 WHATCOM CREEK AT BELLINGHAM 12203550 WHATCOM CREEK AT BELLINGHAM i r D r 7 i r 7 F r 1 7 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 ETT EO ETTET ee tet ee eet oe foe On ee ee toe Pe ee ne ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee oo a a 3 i g LASP 0 05 mgl 4024 B E MG TOTAL MG L AS P p TOTAL ee ee ee ee ee a aS SS ee PHOSPHORUS PHOSPHORUS j S O ONN OONN N N SOONE OS SOENS O SN SN O A A SM MO 1973 1974 1975 1976 1977 Date Cumalative Frequency Stated Value The Plot Enhancements tab shown below provides users with further ability to customize the plot in the plot window On this tab the user can control the scale of the X and Y axes by clicking on the User Select option and changing the associated values in the X Axis and Y Axis boxes Click Update to implement the changes in the plot window In addition the user has control over the thickness of the plot line and the size Time Series Data Analyst Plug in 176 3897 ofthe points shown on the plot Click on the up or down arrow to increase or decrease 3898 plot line thickness or plot point size as desired Changes to these aspects appear in the 3899 plot window immediately The
242. lyst Plug in to the DSS allows users to view and analyze available surface water quality data climate data streamflow data and water temperature data for the watershed Databases of water quality climate streamflow and water temperature data are linked to a geographic coverage showing the locations at which the data have been collected Analysis capabilities include a variety of data plotting options and statistical analyses For the purposes of this manual the Water Quality Database will be used to demonstrate the functions of the Time Series Analyst The same data viewing and analysis procedures may be followed with any of the other databases listed Viewing Water Quality Data The available water quality data in the watershed can be viewed by either clicking on the Time Series Analyst toolbar button 2 and selecting Water Quality from the list of databases shown below or by clicking on a water quality station from the map using the Select Shapes o button vA Select a database rey Water Quality Wi aterG uality Climate Data ClimateD ata Streamflow FlowD ata water Temperature Water Temperature Cancel Selecting a point from the map loads the available water quality data for the selected station into the Time Series Data Analyst Water Quality henceforth referred to as Time Series Analyst whereas clicking on the Time Series Analyst toolbar button and selecting the Water Quality database loads data from all water quality st
243. milar to the save button if the user selects Text using the down arrow the export text dialog shown above is opened However when the Export button is clicked the data are copied to the clipboard rather than saved to a text file The print button on the toolbar opens a dialog so that you can specify a printer to which the current plot will be sent for printing and the options available for that printer This dialog is shown below WRIA 1 DSS User s Manual 3744 3745 3746 3747 3748 3749 3750 3751 3752 3753 3754 3755 3756 3757 3758 3159 3760 3761 3762 3763 3764 3765 3766 3767 3768 169 Printing 12203550 WHATCOM CREEK AT BE Printer EMRG Room Printer on IP_129 123 9 81 Orientation Paper Size Letter Landscape Source Automatically Select Printing Style Cancel Setup Help Color C Monochrome C Mono plus Symbol Plot Types Tabs The Plot Types tabs allow the user to view several different types of plots for the water quality data The different plot types are viewed by clicking on the tab for the desired plot type at the top of the plot window Time Series Probability Histogram Monthly B ox whisker Seasonal Box whisker Yearly Bos Whisker Overal Bos Whisker Plot types currently available via the plot types tabs in the Time Series Analyst include l Time series 2 Probability 3 Histogram 4 Monthly Box Whisker 5 Seasonal Box Whisker 6 Yearly Bo
244. mments er The Flow Frame Index shows the frame associated with each flow in cfs and cms WRIA 1I DSS User s Manual 5008 5009 5010 5011 5012 5013 5014 5015 5016 5017 5018 5019 5020 5021 5022 5023 5024 5025 5026 5027 5028 5029 5030 5031 5032 235 Frame Flow Index Intensive Site Name 17 SFNooksack Lower Flow R 3 Flow m3 1000 00 1200 00 1400 00 1600 00 1800 00 2000 00 II When the AVI is opened it will automatically play To stop or replay use the z buttons near the bottom left hand portion of the screen To view PDF files Adobe Reader must be installed PDF files are not available at all sites To view a PDF file for the selected site choose PDF from the Media Type selector as shown below The PDF will open in Adobe Reader If Adobe Reader is not installed the PDF will not open Adobe Reader can be downloaded free at www adobe com Photographs taken at the selected site are available by selecting the Photograph option from the Media Types selector Photographs are available at most sites but not all If more than one photograph is available at the selected site the Filename selector window will become active Clicking on the photograph filename will load the selected photo Filename Ds log jam on tver left shot from SFBOS River Lett Upstream boundary from mwer right Run between log jame looking OS from middle of US logjam SFBO1 looking ds SFBO1 looking us SFE
245. model to the StatLecation and the FirishLecation nodes in the scenario layout i Start Location m Habitat Time Senes Model Q Finish Location First click on the StatLocation node Then click and hold the mouse on the box in the center of the node s icon While still pressing the mouse button drag the mouse to the Habitat Time Series Model node in the scenario layout Habitat Time Series Model Interface 2946 2947 2948 2949 2950 2951 2952 2953 2954 2955 2956 2957 2958 2959 2960 2961 128 Stark Location Finish Location E E g E Q E Habitat Time 7 5 eres p odel 7 Repeat the previous step by again clicking the box in the center of the Habitat Time Series Model dragging the mouse to the Fitish Location node h Location Start Location Habitat Time Seres Model The Habitat Time Series Model is now connected properly to be run in the DSS Scenario Builder The model will not run successfully without the proper settings To edit the Habitat Time Series Model settings double click on the Habitat Time Series Model node in the scenario layout as shown below Habitat Time g 2enesModel z The Habitat Time Series Model settings form will be displayed as seen below WRIA 1 DSS User s Manual 2962 2963 2964 2965 2966 2967 2968 2969 129 Habitat Time Series Model Parameters Inputs Habitat Database C Program FilessWAl4 1 DSS4055 DatasModel Manage
246. n 3932 3933 3934 3935 3936 3937 3938 3939 3940 394 3942 3943 3944 3945 3946 3947 3948 3949 3950 3951 3952 3953 3954 3955 3956 3957 3958 3959 3960 3961 3962 3963 178 The Apply button allows the user to preview the selected options without accepting them Pressing Help will bring up a help window allowing the user to find more information on these options The Maximize button will resize the plot window to occupy the entire screen To return the plot to the previous size press the Esc button or click on the title bar at the top of the plot window Pressing the Export button allows the user to export the plot using the options shown below Exporting WWU95 DH 3 Drayton Harbor Export MetaFile C BMP C JPG C PNG C Text Data Only Esport Destination f Clipboard C File ET C Printer f Mo Specific Size C Milimeters C Inches C Points Cancel Width 1000 76 Units 7 elp The user can choose the file type for the exported plot using the top set of radio buttons These file types include MetaFile BMP JPG PNG and Text Data Only options Using the next set of radio buttons users can select the destination for the exported plot If the ClipBoard option is selected the plot will be copied to the clipboard and can then be pasted into documents or reports If the File option is selected the Browse button will be activated allowing the user to navigate to the desired location and give th
247. n of the form as shown below WRIA 1 DSS User s Manual 3167 3168 3169 3170 3171 3172 3173 3174 3175 3176 3177 3178 3179 3180 3181 3182 3183 3184 139 Select the Nodes to Model Weighted Usable Area WUA Data Extrapolation Method f Method B tC Method C Available Nodes Selected Nodes 1 2 3 4 p E Fi g J w Select All Remove All Select Nodes From Map OF Cancel Once all the desired nodes have been selected and are listed in the Selected Nodes box and the desired extrapolation method has been selected press o to accept the selections and return to the Habitat Time Series Model Parameters form The user must select at least one node to model or the following error will occur mwP hab lime eriesModel Ed No Nodes Ore Selected Please select at least 1 mode to Model To return to the Habitat Time Series Model Parameters form from the Select the Nodes to Model form without selecting any nodes or an extrapolation method press the Cette button The default options will then be used to model Edit Habitat Time Series Model Outputs The Outputs section of the Habitat Time Series Model Parameters form located near the bottom of the form allows the DSS user to edit the outputs for the Habitat Time Series Model Habitat Time Series Model Interface 3185 3186 3187 3188 3189 3190 3191 3192 3193 3194 3195 3196 3197 3198 3199 3200 3201 140
248. nd the database Server Address Inooksack Server User ID Co wi Use Trusted Server Password Connection Microsol Access f Use Access to find the database Please specify the full path to the MDE file containing the DSS database Database Path C Program Files WRIS 1_DSS4 055_ Data g5 Test Connections Save Changes The database can be either an SQL Server database or a Microsoft Access database Enter the server information if it is an SQL Server or click the folder icon to browse for the Access database When you have filled in the proper information click the Test Connection s button You will see the message below Success a 1 Connection Successful Press Lk and then 72 Lhanges to continue Placing a Scenario Inside of another Scenario Scenario Builder Model Manager 38 1069 An entire scenario can placed within another scenario This is best illustrated by 1070 example as below 1071 DSS Scenario Builder Fie Elements View Pun ie p gt oijo1j1990 12 s1f1999 Models Filters Data Editors Other Loop Control Node Test Scenario 1072 1073 Test Scenario Scenario Start Location g Land Cover Summarizer Scenario Test Scenario Finish Location 1074 When the scenario shown above runs the Land Cover Summarizer will run first then the 1075 scenario Test Scenario will run starting with the Go icon and ending at t
249. ndard edition except that you will have access to the administrative tools in the DBMS also known as LaunchPad Choosing Complete will install everything from Typical as well as the source code to the DSS components and the Technical Documentation After selecting which setup type you would like click the Next button iz WRIA 1 DSS Final Deliverable Standard InstallShield Wizard Setup Type Choose the setup type that best suits your needs Please select 4 setup type Typical Base GIS Data Databases D55 Binaries and User Documentation Everything From Typical plus 055 Source Code and Technical Documentation Installing the WRIA 1 DSS 350 Installing 351 352 At this point the installer will begin to actually install the software This step may take 353 some time given the sheer volume of software and data being installed You will see a 354 meter in the center of the window this does not indicate overall progress but indicates 355 the progress of the current step The window you will see during the actual installation is 356 shown below 357 358 You will probably be prompted during this step to insert the next CD When this appears 359 insert the next CD and click OK on the message window 360 361 WRIA 1 DSS Final Deliverable Standard InstallShield Wizard E O Installing WRI4 1 DSS Final Deliverable Standard The program Features you selected are being installed Please wait
250. ned in the Land Cover Summary Database To WRIA 1 DSS User s Manual 2569 2570 2571 2512 2573 2574 2913 2576 2577 2578 2579 2580 2581 2582 2583 2584 2585 2586 2587 2588 2589 2590 2591 2592 111 access this form select the button to the right of Land Cover Summary Scenario on the Inputs tab of the Water Quality Model Inputs form This will bring up the Land Cover Summary Scenario form as shown below Hil Select Land Cover Summary Sce Ioj x f Previous Scenario Land Cover Summary Scenario 0 Curent Scenario Land Cover Summary w a To select a previous scenario click the E radio button then select a scenario from the drop down list To select the current DSS scenario meaning the Land Cover Summary is contained in the same scenario layout as the Water Quality Model click the Curent Scenario Land Cover Summary radio button To save the scenario that has been selected click the button Select Land Cover Database The Database Configuration form allows a DSS user to select a Land Cover Summary To access this form select the button to the right of Land Cover Database Path on the Input tab of the Water Quality Model Inputs form This will bring up the Database Configuration form as shown below Database Configuration E x The Water Quality Model needs a land cover summary database Microsoft SOL Server Use SOL Server to find the database
251. ng folders Aerial View AVI PDF Photos o WUA 2D Database The existing database is named Phabs m2DData mdb and is located in the 2D Data folder This database can be used to add new data to the 2D Viewer Any data added to this database will be appended to the bottom of the database following the existing data To use a new database copy the Blank mdb database from the 2D Data folder and rename it with the desired name Fill in initial data in the database this must be done before using the importer e Input the Station information in tblStations Appendix B Importing 1D and 2D data from PHABWin_2002 5601 5602 5603 5604 5605 5606 5607 5608 5609 5610 S611 5612 5613 5614 5615 5616 5617 5618 5619 5620 5621 5622 5623 5624 5625 5626 5627 5628 5629 5630 5631 5632 5633 5634 5635 5636 5637 5638 5639 5640 5641 266 Station_Name The name of the Station you are working on Flow_Direction The flow direction of the water The possible values are NW North West N North NE North East E East SE South East S South SW South West or W West Just use the 1 or 2 letter value e For each station input the follow data into the database o Flow info into tblFlows do one row for each flow value Station ID The value from the Station_ID field in tblStations that corresponds with the station that you are currently working with Flow_cms This is the flow value in m
252. nochrome or monochrome with symbols Printing Effective Habitat Surface Plot Printer Onientatiors Landscape Size Letter Source Automatically Select Printing Style Cancel Setup Help f Color f Monochrome Export Button The export button allows a user to export the current graph to the clipboard or to a file in one of several formats When the export button is clicked the following form appears WRIA 1I DSS User s Manual 4528 4529 4530 4531 4532 4533 4534 4535 4536 4537 4538 4539 211 Exporting Effective Habitat Surface Plot Export MetaFile C BMP JPG C PNG Test Data Only Export Destination f ClipBoard File rs O Printer f No Specific Size C Milimeters C Inches Paints Cancel Wf ith i O00 i 554 Units a elp Metafile format is best for publication quality reports JPG or PNG are best for use on web sites If the data underlying the plot is needed then use the Text Data Only option al a amp aN Clicking on the arrow next to the Export button Save As will give the user the option to copy or save the currently displayed graph Database Connection Button This button is used to display the database connection information for this plug in When the button is clicked the following form is displayed 1D Habitat Viewer Plug in 4540 4541 4542 4543 4544 4545 4546 4547 4548 4549 4550
253. ns for the Temperature and DO Flags Model consist of selecting the Output Temperature and DO Database WRIA 1I DSS User s Manual 3343 3344 3345 3346 3347 3348 3349 3350 3351 I2 3353 3354 3355 3356 3357 3358 3359 3360 3361 3362 149 Temperature Flags and Warnings Shapefile and DO Flags and Warning Shapefile These outputs can be selected using the Outputs section of the Temperature and DO Flags Model Parameters form More information about this process is given in the section titled Edit Temperature and DO Flags Model Outputs Edit Temperature and DO Flags Model Inputs The Inputs section of the Temperature and DO Flags Model Parameters form allows the DSS user to edit the inputs for the Temperature and DO Flags Model Inputs Stream Response Model Output Folder C Program Files Al amp 1_ OS S4 Model os Aun StreamResponge vy orking ww ALAM idelnputs sLoads oe ee Hodel Output T ext Fike C Program Files Ala amp 1_ 0554 Model oa Aune Stream esponsew orking yy Ala idel utputs Coarse utput txt Hodel Nodes Shapefie LP rognam Files ALA 1 DS54055 Data GlS Data Shapetiless Temp DO Nodes Temperature OO c Kiades hn Hode ID FieldName STATION Select Nodes Selected Nodes Default All Nodes Select Stream Response Model Output Folder The first option listed in the Inputs section allows the user to select the foleder containing the output text files from the waterbody
254. oaded gt False Grid Filename gt Use File gt False Use Base Data gt False Shapefile Filename gt Reading this error message it is visible that the error was caused by the Land Cover Data Editor Scanning through the error message notice the Results Summary which says Failed to identify polygon shapefile layer This suggests the need to check the configuration of the model element by double clicking the element in the scenario builder to ensure that all of the selected polygon shapefiles actually exist and are the proper files Scenario Run Log When a scenario has finished running the following window will appear Scenario Builder Model Manager 34 View Log The scenario run has completed Would you like to view the log For this scenario run Yes Mo 969 970 971 The scenario run log is saved for each individual execution of the scenario The log 972 contains information about the user running the scenario the computer used to run the 973 scenario and the elements involved in the scenario Each element run contributes a 974 segment to the run log including details about input and output files and what actions 975 the element took 976 977 An example scenario log viewer is shown below 978 Scenario Log Viewer View Logs for Scenario Hew Scenario id 5 View Scenario Run 1 171272007 8 39 48 PM run id 15 Ho Scenario Aun Selected Scenario Information Scenario Aun ID
255. obe Acrobat PDF Microsott Word POC Rich Text ATF Screen WRIA 1 DSS User s Manual 5378 5379 5380 5381 5382 5383 5384 5385 5386 5387 5388 5389 5390 5391 5392 5393 5394 5395 255 Enter a filename and destination for the report using the box to the right of Destination File You may click the browse button to navigate to the desired output destination for the report Destination File l Once you have selected all the options you desire click the Execute Report button While the report is generating you ll see a progress bar similar to the one shown below Please Wait Calculating Data Curent Operation Preparing Map Generator Overall Report Generation Progress Stay On Top z You may also see maps being created similar to those shown in the window below Generating Report When the report has finished being generated it will be displayed MapWindow may then be closed Watershed Characterization Report Generator 256 5396 5397 Appendix A 5398 5399 Importing Data into the Master Server 5400 5401 Data is edited directly on the master server using the methods outlined below This data 5402 is propagated to user computers when the user clicks the Check for Updates button on 5403 the DBMS then selects the link indicating that database updates are available 5404 5405 The data changes are then downloaded to the user s machine
256. ocation use the Browse button next to Appendix B Importing 1D and 2D data from PHABWin_2002 5901 5902 5903 5904 5905 5906 5907 5908 5909 5910 5911 5912 5913 5914 5915 5916 274 the Mesh Filename textbox Once these two steps have been properly performed the Impait Habitat Data button will be enabled and the screen will look similar to the screen shown below 2D Mesh Data Importer Sil Site Name Site 1 Habitat Information Source Meshpoints Filename Cell Area Fieldname AR Ey H 420 DataUS 20 Data New Catal hatcomsMesh Habitat Fieldname HABITAT Mesh Filename C Program Files4 2Olmporter 2D Dat Bed 2 Value Fieldnane z Substrate veg Code Fieldname SUBID Substrate veg Desc Fieldname SUBSTRATE Import Habitat Data Importing Habitat Done 0 Flow Information source Meshpoints Filename co New Flow Filename Importing Flow 4 Done 0 File Species Information Source Meshpoints Filename Importing Species Done UX File To import the data click the Import Habitat Data button A progress update may appear but it is more likely that the application will become unresponsive for a few minutes while this process is completed due to the complexity of the operation being performed When the program returns to operation the file will have been created and an entry created for it in the database WRIA 1I DSS User s Manual
257. odel Interface 3053 3054 3055 3056 3057 3058 3059 3060 3061 3062 3063 3064 3065 3066 3067 3068 3069 3070 3071 3072 3073 3074 3075 3076 3077 3078 3079 3080 308 1 3082 3083 134 To test the connection to the database and to verify that the database is available press the Test Connection button If a successful connection is made to the database listed the following message will appear Success Lai Y Connection Successful If the database cannot be found the following error will be displayed mwP hab limeSeriesModel Invalid Database Database does not exist in the SOL Server at Address local Once a successful database connection has been made to the desired database press the save Changes button to continue Once a database has been selected the user must specify which Water Quantity scenario in the Daily Flow Database the Habitat Time Series Model should use This is done by clicking the down arrow to the right of the Scenario Run box as shown below Scenanohun Bier The user may select any of the Water Quantity scenarios contained in the Daily Flow Database or choose to use the data from the Water Quantity model contained in the current scenario Thus the Current option only works when the current scenario contains a Water Quantity model Select Model Nodes Shapefile The default Model Nodes Shapefile location is shown below Hodel Nodes
258. odel Manager Databa rea E 2105 2106 2107 To save the changes to the settings that have been made in the input form click the 2108 button To cancel the changes to the settings click the _ Canea button 2109 2110 Select Best Management Practices 2111 2112 The Best Management Practices Tool allows the DSS user to select Best Management 2113 Practices BMP for multiple drainages to be used by the Water Quality Model as an 2114 input To access this tool press the button to the right of Best Management 2115 Practices on the Input tab of the Water Quality Model Inputs window as shown below 2116 A Water Quality Model Inputs G x Input Output Best Management Pracices BhiPs Selected a X Land Cower Grid luk_ca5 bgd El 2117 ube eae ie cen canta ee 2118 2119 This will bring up the Best Management Practices Tool as shown below Lake Whatcom Water Quality Model Interface 2120 2121 2122 2123 2124 2125 2126 2127 2128 2129 2130 2131 2132 2133 90 HE Best Management Practices Tool ioj xj Fie Edit Help F El zj P g Watershed Layer bsnwrial_v7 shp a Drainage Austin B eaver bi Best Management Practice Riparian Buffer Add BMP Best Management Practice Select Watershed Layer To select a Watershed Layer click the button to next to the E box The Select Layer form will then be displayed JE Select Watershed Shapefile Ioj x Select
259. of that scenario element in the same scenario each element is configured independently so for instance a scenario could have several land cover summarizer elements each configured to summarize from a different land cover grid WRIA 1I DSS User s Manual 897 898 899 900 901 902 903 904 905 906 907 908 909 910 911 912 913 914 915 916 917 918 919 920 921 922 923 31 Setting the Date Range Some model elements will require a date range for processing for example a model analyzing stream flow data may need to know what date range of samples should be examined Not all scenario elements use this those that don t use this information will simply ignore it Setting the scenario date range is done by clicking on the date values and typing in new values as shown below Also the date ranges can be modified by clicking on the down arrow to the right of the text fields with dates in them as shown in the image below circled in red The leftmost date is the starting date and the rightmost date is the ending date Clicking on the arrow will cause the calendar to appear which can be used to select a new date DSS Scenario Builder File Elements View Pun Oea Sun Mon Tue Wed Thu a 4 5 6 10 iil iz 15 i4 15 16 17 16 19 20 fl 2 235 4 25 76 7 eo 29 SO Sl 11 12 2007 Saving the Scenario Scenarios are not saved to a file on disk but rather are saved to the Scenar
260. of the Water Quality Model Inputs form This will bring up the Select Water Quality Model Output Directory form as shown below The default location for the Water Quality Model output is C Program Files WRIA 1_DSS Model Runs O x HE Select Water Quality Output Di t E C Program Files WwfAILA 1 DS S4 Model Runs Water uantityModel Scenariot To move up a directory level click the TE button To change the drive to browse for folders click the 17 button To select a folder as the desired directory click on the folder s name To open a folder double click the folder s name To save the selected directory click the button Run WRIA Wide Water Quality Model The DSS Scenario Builder allows the DSS user to run the Water Quality Model WRIA 1 DSS User s Manual 2666 2667 2668 2669 2670 2671 2672 2673 2674 2675 2676 2677 2678 2679 2680 268 1 2682 2683 2684 2685 115 g DSS Scenario Builder B x gt File Elements view Run Heap _ 1ofo1j1965 10 05 1990 Elements Water Quality Scenario Models Fitters Data Editors Other WRIA Wide Water Quality Model oC Lake Whatcom Water Quality Model Start Location Finish Location o Water Quantity Model WALA Wide Water Quality Model Before the Water Quality Model can be run the start and end dates need to be specified in the Scenario Builder To change the start and end date
261. olution The user is able to use scroll bars along the bottom and side of the view window to scroll from side to side and top to bottom to view the entire photograph WRIA I DSS User s Manual 4375 4376 4377 4378 4379 4380 4381 4382 4383 4384 4385 4386 4387 4388 4389 4390 4391 4392 4393 4394 4395 4396 4397 203 Location Selection Users can select from the list of available locations by using the location pull down box in the Locations section of the Photo Viewer window The location pull down box contains a list of all selected locations for which photographs are available The number of selected locations is shown next to the location pull down box If points were selected from the map the pull down box will list the selected locations only If the Photo Viewer was launched by clicking on the Photo Viewer toolbar button the location pull down box will list all of the photographic locations in the database Locations Selected Locations 4 view Comments Add Location Photograph Selection When more than one photograph was taken at a location the pull down box in the Photos section of the Photo Viewer window allows the user to select from all photographs available for a location The number of available photographs for the selected location is shown next to the pull down box Photo Viewer Plug in 4398 4399 4400 4401 4402 4403 4404 4405 4406 4407
262. olved Oxygen Flags Model to a DSS scenario layout first open the DSS Scenario Builder by choosing the Scenario Builder option under the DSS menu Create a new scenario layout by clicking k Click on the Models tab in the Elements window of the Scenario Builder and double click on the Temperature and DO Flags Model highlighted in red below DSS Scenario Builder File Elements View Pun je p a1 o1 1990 1213171999 E Models Filters Data Editors Other p e WRIA wWide Water Quality Model w Lake Whatcom Water Quality Model TE amp Habitat Time Series Model TE fe Water Quantity Model p ae F Temperature and DO Flags Model n Temperature and Dissolved Oxygen Flags Model Interface 146 3301 The Temperature and DO Flags Model will be added to the scenario layout as shown 3302 below 3303 DSS Scenario Builder File Elements View Pun oe ep 01401 1990 12 31 1999 Mew Scenaro 6 Models Filters Data Editors Other t WRIA Wide Water Quality Model J j Lake Whatcom Water Quality Model Start Location t Habitat Time Series Model 6 Finish Location Water Quantity Model Temperature and DO Flags Temperature and DO Flags Model Model HT 3304 3305 3306 To prepare the Temperature and DO Flags Model to be run in the Scenario Builder you 2 3307 must connect the model to the 5tatLocation and the Firish Location nodes
263. on of water quality for a 4130 given parameter on a given date and give users an idea of the temporal distribution of the 4131 available water quality data 4132 WRIA 1 DSS User s Manual 4133 4134 4135 4136 4137 4138 4139 4140 4141 4142 4143 4144 4145 4146 4147 4148 4149 4150 4151 4152 4153 4154 4155 4156 4157 191 4 Parameter Gages COLIFORM TOT MEMBRANE FILTER IMM ED M ENDO MED 350 COLOR LATINUMACO BLT UM ITS amp NITRATE MITROGEN TOTAL MGL 25 M J P g 4 4 o 4 oo NITRITE NITROGEN TOTAL MGL AS M a NITROGEN AMMO HIA TOTAL MGL aS M OXYGEN DESOLYVED MG L PH ETANDARD UNT S B B B B PHOSPHATE ORTHO MGL aS POY PHOSPHORUS DESOLYWED ORTHOPHOSPHATE MEL a5 Fy PHOSPHORUS TITAL MEL Os Fy SPECIFIC CONDUCTANCE WU MHOSC HA 250 TEMPERATURE WATER EG REES C ENTIG RAD E e 8 gd ew OF ws g t fr EBE 4d x amp O F fF ek Ff OP 4 y fF O F FF 8 amp ag Pel Ff 8 a Ff 8 a L a a L a m L m E TURBIOMY HAC PSOH CANDLE UNTS Data Selection Date Range Option Include Month Range Enable Subset St t a F Station 12203550 WHATCOM CREEK AT BELLINGHAM at 1972 January Colors End 1 qr4 r December r Update The Date Range pull down boxes show the range of dates represented in the plo
264. ons Time Series Data Analyst Plug in 3685 3686 3687 3688 3689 3690 3691 3692 3693 3694 166 Toolhar Ruttons Time Series Data Analyst Water Quality Mox File view Options Help Plot Types Tabs a p SERPEFH gt S2Qa Time Series Probability Histogram Monthly Box Whisker Seasonal Box Whisker Yearly Box Whisker 0 4 gt q 12203550 WHATCOM CREEK AT BELLINGHAM eee ee ee CEEE EEEEEEEEI CLT Ne ee eee eee pM Se ee eee COLIFORM TOT MEMBRANE FILTER IMMED M ENDO MED 35C M Data Selection Plot Parameter COLIFORM TOT MEMBRANE FILTER IMMED M ENDO MED 35C Station 12203550 WHATCOM CREEK AT BELLINGHAM m Date Range Options Plat Enhancements Data Sources Notes Summary Plot Options T Y Axis in Log Scale A Time Series Plot C Line Point Both F Show Control lines E T Statistical F Use Averaging Period Summary C Houi Monho Ill DETE ENSIO eres eee Plot Options E o and Plot I Show Data Gaps Enhancements a Probability Plot MV Show Best Fit Line Show Control lines Box Whisker Plots amp Connect Means Connect Medians Include Month Range Start 1972 January End fi 977 December v Parameter and Station Selection Plot Window Date Range Restriction The plot window shown in the figure below displays a plot of
265. or certain fish species throughout the entire WRIA 1 watershed Since this data is for the entire watershed the Site selector option is not available To select a species to display click on the arrow to the right of the Species selector as shown below WRIA I DSS User s Manual 4968 4969 4970 4971 4972 4973 4974 4975 4976 4977 4978 4979 4980 4981 233 Physical WIA HSC Bull Trow Bull Trout Chinook Churn Coho Dolly Varden _ Kokanee 4 Pink Trout Rainbow Trout P Fish Distribution ETE Species Once the desired species has been selected the graph window will update to display the selected information The user may also select the type of distribution to display by clicking on the arrow to the right of the Type selector as shown below Tope EPLE Curent Known a Curent Presumed Presumed PotentialHistoric Once a distribution type is selected the graph window will update to show the selected data A legend showing the selected species and distribution type is shown in the bottom right corner of the graph window Phabsim 2D Intensive Site Viewer Units US Customary 4 4 al Xa AA SAS N aa Intensive Site Name BRU eRe f Metric Physical WUA HSC Fish Distribution Miscellaneous Data Species v Type EMENI gt x Ma sae TAOS Legend Bull Trout ewe Current Presumed County Boundary CI WRIA 1 Watershed Boundary 2
266. or clicking the Close button will close the new window WRIA 1 DSS User s Manual 6195 6196 6197 6198 6199 6200 6201 6202 6203 6204 6205 6206 6207 6208 6209 6210 6211 6212 6213 6214 291 Single Hydrogroup Sel Unimodal Left Group with Narrow Second Peak Colors represent different subgroups Enter Node Number Figure 14 Example of Uln hydrogroup The next steps are the same as described in the Enter the Node Number Option Figures 9 to 12 If extrapolating WUA curves the user will be asked whether to output extrapolated values into a single csv file or into the Habitat database Figure 7 as described in Extrapolate to All 300 nodes Extrapolation of the WUA curves section Other Extrapolation Options If the user would like to extrapolate WUA curves to a number of nodes and use different source sites from those provided in the Source Target_337nodes csv file the user can do it by either running the model for each node separately or by making corresponding changes in the Source_Site column of the Source Target file replacing existing source sites with the new source sites When the program is finished running the user gets the message Extrapolation 1s finished Appendix C Extrapolation Program User Manual 6215 6216 6217 6218 6219 6220 6221 6222 6223 6224 6225 6226 6227 6228 6229 6230 6231 6232 6233 6234 6235 623
267. ort the scenario run click the button to cancel the scenario run When the scenario has completed the DSS user will be asked if they would like to view the scenario run log a text file containing messages output by the elements contained in the scenario that has just been run e gt The scenario run has completed p would you like to wiew the log For this scenario run Yes Mo WRIA 1I DSS User s Manual 3576 3577 3578 3579 3580 3581 3582 3583 3584 3585 3586 3587 3588 3589 3590 3591 3592 3593 3594 161 To view the log for the scenario run click the button To decline viewing the scenario log at this time click the e button The scenario run log is saved for each individual execution of the scenario The log contains information about the user running the scenario their computer and the elements involved in the scenario Each element that runs contributes a segment to the run log including details about input and output files and what actions the element took An example scenario log viewer is shown below Scenario Log Viewer View Logs for Scenario View Scenario Run 1 1 12 2007 8 39 48 PM run id 15 Ho Scenario Aun Selected Scenario Information Scenario Run ID Aun Date Username Start Date End Date Mapw indow Versions DS5 Version OS Name amp Versions Sistem AAM System Speed System Other Scenario Run Log New Scenaro id 5 15
268. ory C Program Files WAl4 1_ DSS 4Model Runs ater WaterG uantityModel Scenariol To move up a directory level click the button To change the drive to browse for folders click the 17 button To use a directory that will be created when the current scenario is run check the Use Curent Scenario Directoy box To select a folder as the desired directory click on the folder s name To open a folder double click the folder s name To save the selected directory click the button Select Water Quality Parameters Database The Database Configuration form allows a DSS user to select a Water Quality Parameters Database To access this form press the button to the right of Water Quality Lake Whatcom Water Quality Model Interface 2295 2296 2297 2298 2299 2300 2301 2302 2303 2304 2305 2306 2307 2308 2309 2310 2311 98 Parameters Database on the Input tab of the Water Quality Model Inputs window as shown below E Water Quality Model Inputs loj x Input Output Best Management Prachce BhiPs Selected A Land Cover Grid luke_calS bgd l Lake Whatcom Grids Input Directory C Program Fies wAlA 1 DS54055 Data GlS Data Gnde wate Water Quantity Output D wectory C Program Files W RlA A 1 554055 Dste w ater Quantity Toohet Water Quality Parameters Database CiProgram Fies wila 1 0555055 Data Model Manaoe Databa ome This will bring up the Database Configur
269. osoft Access database as the Output Habitat Time Series Database the user can select the Use Access to find the database option Micrazolt Access f Use Access to find the database Please specify the full path to the mdb file contaming the database Database Path C Program Files WWRIG 1 OS5S4055 DatatModel The user must then enter the complete pathname in the box to the right of Database Path or use the browse button ra to navigate to the desired database To test the connection to the database and to verify that the database is available press the Test Connection button If a successful connection is made to the database listed the following message will appear Success Ld 1 j Connection Successful If the database cannot be found the following error will be displayed mw hab TimeSeriesModel Invalid Database Database does not exist in the SQL Server at Address local Once a successful database connection has been made to the desired database press the save Changes button to continue Once all the input and output parameters have been set using the Habitat Time Series Model Parameters form press o to accept the changes and return to the DSS Habitat Time Series Model Interface 3228 3229 3230 3231 3232 3233 3234 3235 3236 3237 3238 3239 3240 3241 3242 3243 3244 3245 3246 3247 142 Scenario Builder window To return to this window without accepting th
270. ot appear in the Plug ins list you do not have 793 the Model Manager installed 794 Creating a New Scenario 795 796 When the scenario builder is first started you will be presented with an empty screen as 797 shown below 798 DSS Scenario Builder File Elements View Pun E gt 01 01 1990 12 31 1999 Models Filters Data Editors Other WRIG Wide Water Quality Model Lake Whatcom Water Quality Model Habitat Time Series Model Water Quantity Model 799 800 801 In order to create a new scenario click the white paper icon _ or select the File menu 802 then the New option After creating a new project you will see the screen below 803 WRIA 1I DSS User s Manual 804 805 806 807 808 809 810 811 812 813 814 815 816 817 818 819 820 821 822 Zz amp DSS Scenario Builder Fie Elements View Pun eS gt 01 01 1990 12 31 1999 2 New Scenario Models Filters Data Editors Other BO WRIA Wide Water Quality Model a stop E Lake Whatcom Water Quality Model Start Location Finish Location y Habitat Time Series Model Water Quantity Model Adding Elements Next you may select any of the tabs to the left the Element Toolbox Here you will see model elements also called scenario elements listed You may add one of these to your project either by double clicking on the scenario element or by dragging it from the toolbox into the sc
271. oundaries HC Major Roads Asoo Periodicity Viewer Editor Plug In 2112 2113 2774 2715 2716 2171 2778 2779 2780 2781 2782 2783 2784 2785 2786 2787 2788 2789 2790 2791 2792 2793 2794 2195 2796 120 Viewing Periodicity Data Periodicity data can be viewed by either clicking on and selecting a Periodicity Node point or group of points from the map or by clicking on the Periodicity Viewer toolbar button Selecting points from the map loads the available periodicity data for the selected locations into the Periodicity Viewer Editor first followed by all the other nodes in numerical order Clicking on the Periodicity Viewer toolbar button loads all available periodicity data in the entire database into the Periodicity Viewer Editor in numerical order Selecting Photo Viewer Points from the Map Make sure that the Periodicity Nodes theme is turned on checked and active selected FM Sampling Data PeriodicityModes Water Quantity Control Modes amp 1D Habitat Sites eT 2D Habitat Sites es Vell Graphs m Vell Report Documents Vater Rights POW E Next use the Zoom on on w and Pan W Tools to locate the area of interest on the map Additional Zoom tools are accessed by clicking on the down arrow as shown below R Jak S a A Previous a Next w Max Extents Laver o Selected T Shape Using the select tool 4 points can be selected by either clicking on individual
272. ow shows the Normalized Curves for four species lifestages The legend 4728 to the right of the plot lists which species are selected 4729 Physical Stage Discharge Longitudinal Profile HSC Habitat Reach LA Species Comparison Discharge Comparison Surface Plat W Normalized Curves WUA Reach Bell Creek CHINOOK HOLDING Adult CHINOOK SPAWN LARGER CHUM SPAWN FALLWIN TOHO JUV O RAINBOW SPAWN O RAINBOW JUVADLILT CI STEELHEAD JUW CJ STEELHEAD SPAWN CJ TROUT_STEEL FRY L Chinook Fry CJ Chinook FryGen CJ Coho Fry Ti a a iy _ a Z m L _ I a 4 m LPa I Ti a 44 L 5 z TS 10 0 Discharge cts 4730 4731 4732 As many as 12 species lifestages can be displayed simultaneously using this tool WRIA 1I DSS User s Manual 4733 4734 4735 4736 4737 4738 4739 4740 4741 4742 4743 4744 4745 4746 4747 4748 A749 4750 4751 4752 4753 4754 4755 221 Species Comparison The Species Comparison plots the Effective Habitat for the comparison of two species To select the species to compare select the first species from the Species dropdown combo box Then select the second species for comparison from the Species 2 dropdown combo box The X axis values are the Predicted Flow values in cubic feet per second cfs The Y axis is the Effective Habitat values for the given predicted flow The line colors and meanings are shown in the Legend on the r
273. p down list WRIA 1 DSS User s Manual 5887 5888 5889 5890 5891 5892 5893 5894 5895 5896 5897 5898 5899 5900 273 2D Mesh Data Importer Site Name IMET Eeee Habitat Information 16 Maplelreek 1 SFAMooksack Lower Source Meshpoints Filename te MutchinesaC cele 19 4 ustin Upper 19 4 ustin Lower U Squalicum Upper Mesh Filename Squalicun Lower Substrate eg Desc Fieldname Importing Habitat Done O Flow Information Source Meshpoints Filename New Flow Filename Importing Flow Done 0 File UO Species Information Source Meshpoints Filename Importing Species Done OX File OU Note that only sites contained in the database just selected will be available Before using a new blank database this information must be entered as explained in the previous section titled How to Import 2D Data Importing Habitat Data To begin importing habitat data either specify the data path or push the Browse button next to the Source Meshpoints Filename textbox to select your source point shapefile Once a valid file has been selected the drop down lists at the right and the Mesh Filename textbox and Browse button will become active Next select the appropriate field names from the drop down lists at the right Finally specify the filename for the output mesh file The file may be named as desired but it must have a shp extension To select a specific l
274. p scale will be adjusted and the view will be centered at the point on which you clicked In addition you may click and drag a rectangle on the map and the map will be zoomed to the selected rectangle S To zoom to a broader area click the Zoom Out button and then click on the map The scale will be adjusted and the view will be centered at the point on which you clicked If you click on the magnifying glass portion of this button circled in red the map will zoom to the maximum extents of all visible layers Clicking on the arrow portion of this button located to the right of the magnifying glass a list of options will become available E E Previous a Mest al Max Extents S Layer og Selected Eg Shape e Zoom to Previous changes the Map view extents to those of the previous zoom extents e Zoom to Next changes the Map view extents to those of the next view only available if you have clicked Previous e Zoom to Max Extents changes the Map view extents so that you can view each layer in your project completely it doesn t matter if the layers are on e Zoom to Layer zooms to the extents of the active layer e Zoom to Selected zooms to the feature s you have selected in the active layer e Zoom to Shape allows you to select a shape index from the active layer to which to zoom WRIA 1 DSS User s Manual 590 591 592 593 594 595 596 597 598 599 600 601 602 603 604 605 606 17
275. pawning Current Known distribution Coho Spawning eM Change the Fish Distribution Juvenile yes Fry es Species Coho Fink a lt J5 eee No Lifestage p awnng Sockeye Distribution Spawning Yes Rainbow Current Known Spawning Mo Juvenile No fe Yes Present Adult No ae No f No Absent Winter Steelhead Fry Yes Spawning Yes Juvenile res Cutthroat anad Spawning Yes WARNING IF you click Apply the changes will be applied and sawed in the database alsoll To change the distribution value click on the radio buttons in the Distribution section of the Change Fish Distribution form next to Yes Present or No Absent To apply the change and save it to the database press ppl Note that pressing this button will apply the changes to the on screen view and will also change the Distribution database To return to the Periodicity Viewer Editor form without changing the distribution data Cancel press ME Editing Periodicity Data To edit Periodicity Data for a given species and lifestage at the selected Node double click on the box representing the desired time period and species This will bring up the Edit Periodicity Data form as shown below The example below shows the Edit Periodicity form for the second half of October for species Spring Chinook and lifestage Spawning Stream Periodicity Viewer Editor Plug In 2872 2873 2874 2875 2876 2877 2878 2879 2880
276. pefile from file click the radio button then click the button An open file dialog will be displayed Browse to a polygon shapefile and click open To save the polygon shapefile that has been selected click the button To discard Cancel the polygon shapefile that has been selected click the button To select the shapefile field containing the ID for the polygons in the shapefile select a field name in the drop down list to the right of To select the shapefile field Land Cover Change Scenario Element 1536 1537 1538 1539 1540 1541 1542 1543 1544 1545 1546 1547 1548 1549 1550 1551 1552 1553 1554 1555 1556 1557 1558 1559 60 containing the name of the polygons in the shapefile select a field name in the drop down list to the right of Pager Meme Field Run Land Cover Change Scenario Element Once all the elements have been configured the Land Cover Change Scenario is ready to be run DSS Scenario Builder File Elements view Run O g D jovjorjise0 x 12131 1999 l bi New Scenario Models Filters Data Editors Other Land Cover Summarizer Start Location x E E Land Cover f Summarizer a a 4 Change Land a Coyer a D Finish Location Running all Elements in New Sce Applying land cover changes C MEADE TENN To run the scenario click the P button If you would like to abort the scenario run click the button to cancel the scenario run
277. r 5 20 Data O Site 1 GB Mesh G Habitat O Species G Adobe Make New Folder O ok The Output Filename value will be changed to reflect the newly selected directory It will now look like the form below Select your Source Flow and Plotfile Flow Value jo 4 File Information Source Filename H 420 DataJ5 20 Data New Data 01 WhatcomFlow Plotties 014_plothle Output Filename C Program Files 2D i mporten 2D Data Site 1THesh Foeni 4 plothlez cht OF Cancel Repeat this process until there is an entry to the File list for every flow value At this point the screen will look as it does below Appendix B Importing 1D and 2D data from PHABWin_2002 5953 5954 5955 5956 5957 5958 5959 5960 5961 5962 5963 5964 5965 278 2D Mesh Data Importer Site Name Site 1 Habitat Information Source Meshponts Filename Cell 4rea Fieldname Habitat Fieldname Mesh Filename Bedr Yalue Fieldname Substrate eg Code Fieldname Pp sUbstrateeg Desc Fieldname Importing Habitat Done 04 Flow Information Source Meshpoints Filename Mnooksack Nooksack IFIMSProcessed_Data 01 whatcomCreek Meshpoint Source Filename HAD DataS 2D Data New Data 01 Whatcom Flow Plottiles 042 plotfile C Program Files 20 mp HAD DataQS 20 Data New Data0l Whatcom Flow Plottiles 043_plotile C Program Files 20 mp H 20 DataQS 2D Data New Data0 Whatcom Flow Plo
278. r Add A Location To The Shapefile Sele Location Mame GIS Coordinates CC i eu Cancel Note The check box at the bottom of the form allows the user to specify whether the new location is already in the Photo Viewer database Photo Viewer is designed so that it is possible to have locations in the Photo Viewer database that are not in the geographic coverage of locations Users can add photos to the database even if they don t have GPS coordinates or a shapefile of the locations at which they were taken The above form can be used to specify the coordinates of the location so that it will be added to the geographic coverage of photograph locations Enter the new location name in the Location Name window and the rest of the form will become activated X and Y coordinates 1 e GPS coordinates can be entered manually or they can be entered automatically by clicking on the map If coordinates are to be specified by using the map click on rome The map window in the DSS interface will appear Click on the map location of the photograph and the X and Y coordinate fields will be populated automatically Click to add the new location to the database and to the geographic coverage of photograph locations The Add a Photo to the Database form described in the following section will appear so that a photo can be added to the new location that was just created Add Photo The Photo Viewer Plug in
279. r DatabasesimwPhabT SModel Penodicity mdb Daily Flow Database WaterluantityS treamFlow Scenano Run Curent Hodel Nodes Shapefie LoyProgram Fest AIE 1 DS54055 Data GlS_Data Shapetiles ModelN odes Fer indicitikl ades shn Hode ID FieldName Q Select Hodes Selected Nodes Default All Hodes Method B Outputs Output Habitat TimeS ernes Database Mone ra OF Cancel The size of this from can be increased by clicking on the bottom right hand corner of the form and dragging This is useful when attempting to view the pathnames for the various input files The form below has been expanded to show the entire pathname of all the files Habitat Time Series Model Parameters Inputs Habitat Database C Program Files WfAl4 1 0554055 DatatModel Manager Databases muPhabT SModel Penodicity mdb Daily Flow Databaze Water uantityS treamFlouw Scenaro Run Current Hodel Nodes Shapetie C Program Files ALA 1 DSS4055 DataGlS Data Shapetiles ModelNodes PenodicityNodes shp Node ID FieldName O Select Nodes Selected Nodes Default All Nodes Method B Outputs Output Habitat TimeSernes Database Phabl imes eres Cancel Habitat Time Series Model Interface 2970 2971 2912 2973 2974 2913 2976 2977 2978 2919 2980 2981 2982 2983 2984 2985 2986 2987 2988 2989 2990 2991 2992 2993 2994 2995 2996 130 Edit Habitat T
280. r Plug In sereoo E 116 Conmi surmise the Data COnnecHON sersaisesiis iiei E A Aea 116 Selecting the Model Output Nodes Point Shapefile sssssnnennnesessssseeenssssssssseerees 117 Selecting the Periodicity Database cccccccccsssesssecceceeceaaeeeseecceeeeeeaeeeneeeeeeeeeeaaas 118 Newa Poode Da ea e e E 120 Selecting Photo Viewer Points from the Map ccccccsssseeseeececeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeaaas 120 Viewing Periodicity Data via the Periodicity Viewer Toolbar Button 121 Periodicity Viewer Editor Options sesseeeeessssssssssssssseeeeeeereesssssssssssssseeeeererereesssssssss 121 WRIA 1 DSS User s Manual 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 14 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 168 169 170 171 172 111 Node Ee ON e a E E E A E EE E 122 Viewing Distribution and Periodicity Data ccccccssesesseeeeeceeeaaeeeseeeceeeeeenaas 122 ato Distribution Dat ose eeccreai sides atsnvcteau nee cauasandoeat seeusanapianegi seb E nesses 123 PE Oe Penodicity Dala sesso nnen oan n e EEEE ea E ae 123 Restoring Database Valles ecesas E NEE 124 Copy Save the Distribution and Periodicity Grid cc ceeeccececeececeeeeeseeeeeeeeeenaes 125 Habitat Time Series Model Interface ssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssses 126 Add Habitat Time Series Mo
281. r Quality Parameters Database C Program Files RIA 1 0554055 Cata Model Manager Databa rea E To save the changes to the settings that have been made in the inputs form click the button To cancel the changes to the settings click the Ece button Select Best Management Practices The Best Management Practices Tool allows the DSS user to select Best Management Practices BMP for multiple drainages to be used by the Water Quality Model as an input To access this tool select the l button to the right of Best Management Practices on the Input tab of the Water Quality Model Inputs form This will bring up the Best Management Practices Tool form as shown below Hil Best Management Practices Tool 5 ioj x File Edit Help E El zj d al Sh Watershed Layer bsnwrial_v shp ne Drainage Austin B aver r Best Management Practice Riparian Puffer Add BMP Best Management Practice WRIA 1 DSS User s Manual 2466 2467 2468 2469 2470 2471 2472 2473 2474 2475 2476 2477 2478 2479 2480 2481 2482 2483 2484 2485 2486 2487 2488 2489 107 Select Watershed Layer To select a Watershed Layer click the button to next to the pecs ay box in the Best Management Practices Tool form The Select Layer form will then be displayed as shown below dr Select Watershed Shapefile Ioj x Select Data Layer From loaded layers FromBaseData Add To view iN one Selected ey
282. ra pow ie WEDL aNG Re LEA a imi eA ai vo napkah a e 145i 11k ae oe Ten wd ow aes z hea Fo wa Lidl ITER Olti rae re mor ar r aL Lorik Or Bhare e Tl ee ate pata ee ee io 4 T manea airs r a WFH a yaa won it ri Lv al ieee Vets li neha Sa wee Bs hr a Fij A He MOFFA u is ablated ie IEP T AEA ETET a OA ee ee spa ura l krk pra bre De ae Han ree Ree een TF ST Vide aL it echo oo ee u ee ee le well ID i View the entire Image Cywithout scroll bars Selecting Well Report Document Points from the Map Copy to Clipboard Close 245 fel First make sure that the Well Report Documents theme is turned on checked and active selected Well Log Data Viewer Plug In 246 Legend EW Sampling Data Water Quantity Control Mo amp 1 Habitat Sites fn 2D Habitat Sites en Vell Graphs m k el Report Documents G oO Water Rights POY Photos Ezi Weather Stations Th Streamflow Sampling Loca F Temperature Probes Water Quality Sampling Sit Py Next zoom on the map to the area of interest using the pan and zoom R ATA o us E oca tools Using the select tool locations can be selected for viewing by either clicking on individual points or by clicking and dragging a box around several locations Selecting Well Report Document points from the map will load the well report documents for those selected locations into the Well Log Data Viewer shown above Viewing Well Report Documents via the Wel
283. rate data are predefined for each watershed the report generator is used with data comes from the MapWindow project that is currently loaded Therefore in order to use the Watershed Characterization report a specific project file with the proper data must be loaded into MapWindow Once the Watershed Characterization generator has loaded the user may select which drainages should be included in this report Maps generated will cover only the selected regions and data will be collected only for these drainages Once the desired drainages have been selected the user needs only to click Launch Report and wait while the report is created Opening a Map Window Project Since the Report Generator relies on GIS data defined in a specific project file first ensure that the proper project file has been opened Do this by clicking the File menu then Open as shown below File Edit O55 Plug ir Close el ave Save a5 Project Settings Recent Projects Print Exit k You may also open a project by clicking on the open button located on the toolbar An Open dialog box will appear as shown below allowing you to choose a project WRIA 1 DSS User s Manual 5284 5285 5286 5287 5288 5289 5290 5291 5292 5293 249 Look im B WRIA 1_DSS e E 9055_Data tek Model Runs My Recent MSDEDATABASES Documents User Documentation f O Water Quality Files z Water Quantity TopMet Files Desktop wrial dss mwprj
284. re nearly identical to the Temperature Flags and Warnings Shapefile described above A default DO Flags and Warnings shapefile exists and should be used for all model runs The data in this shapefile is overwritten each time the model runs The shapefile is named DO_Flags_Warnings shp To select this shapefile press the browse button oe to the right of the DO Flags and Warnings Shapefile pathname box This will bring up the screen shown below Select A DO Flags and Warni Select Data Layer From loaded layers Water Aights POW Wall Report Documents Well Graphs 2D Habitat Sites 1D Habitat Sites Water Quantity Control Nodes Temperature DO Nodes Temp Flags Warnings ags Warnings C From file Bl Cancel If the DO Flags and Warnings shapefile has already been added as a layer it can be selected from the loaded layers list as shown above Otherwise click the From file radio button and enter the pathname or press the browse button a to bring up the Open Point Shapefile form as shown below WRIA I DSS User s Manual 3543 3544 3545 3546 3547 3548 3549 3550 3551 3332 3553 3554 3555 159 Open Point Shapefile lt OO Flags Warnings shy e Temp _Flags Warnings K My Recent Temperature DO Nodes shp Documents My Network File name DO_Flags_ Wamings shp Me Places Files of type ESRI shapetiles shp Cancel Again this same shapefile should be used every time
285. rent plot Time Series Data Analyst Plug in 3718 3719 3720 3721 3 22 3723 3724 3725 3726 3727 3728 3 29 3730 3731 3732 3733 3734 3735 3736 3737 3738 3739 3740 3741 3742 3743 168 Bo MetaFile JPEG Text In addition to exporting the plot as an image the user may select Text in which case a text file containing the data used to generate the plot can be created Selecting Text will allow the user to specify a location and filename for the data and will then open a dialog in which the user can specify export options for the text file as shown below Export 12203550 WHATCOM CREEK AT BELLINGHAM Select Subsets and Points Export Yrhat C Data Selected Data Data and Labels Data to Export o Subsets to Export Export Style List C Table Delimited Row vs Column Points to Export C Tah e C Comma fo Numeric Precision Current Precision C Maximum Precision Cancel Help To export the file with the specified options press the Export button To discard the file and return to the previous plot window press Cancel For help with these options press Help The copy button on the toolbar H allows the user to copy the current plot to the clipboard Once copied plots can be pasted into documents for reporting and printing purposes By clicking on the small down arrow next to the copy button the user can specify the format of the copied plot jpeg metafile or text Si
286. response model The text files in this folder must be named NodeTS txt where the represents the node number of the output file Habitat Database used Press the browse S button to the right of the Stream Response Model Output Folder pathname This will bring up the Browse for Folder form as shown below Temperature and Dissolved Oxygen Flags Model Interface 3363 3364 3365 3366 3367 3368 3369 3370 3371 3372 3373 3374 150 Browse For Folder Navigate to File Folder EJ Desktop i My Documents Y Lee a My Network Places j Recycle Bin C CDRom Data C Hocker Post EHMTest 9 Hocker _PreConstruction C Setupssoo TEST Make New Folder Select the correct folder containing the waterbody response model output files and press Select Watershed Loadin Output Text File This section allows the user to select the waterbody loading output text file Press the browse button to the right of the Watershed Loading Output Text File pathname This will bring up the Open File form as shown below Open File Look in E Program _Datay ewer Mu Recent Documents mi La Desktop My Network Places 2 mwTempborlags 9 shapefile O WaterbodyResponse 2 WaterQualityData_old FileList txt g Nodes ToModelList txt E NodesToModelList_3nodes txt E Output Existing txt 2 Water QualityNodes text File name Files of type Text Files
287. ror average RMSE 15 13 and 15 1 respectively whereas juvenile and fry habitat relationships derived from the frequency based approach have somewhat higher prediction errors 18 1 and 21 65 respectively Substrate was a contributing factor in misrepresenting available habitat for rainbow and kokanee spawning at Whatcom creek at high flows the two higher points Figure C1 3 The shapes of available habitat versus discharge curves were similar to those shown in Figure C1 2 for both approaches The Hutchinson Creek site was treated as an outlier throughout the analysis The stream is characterized by a very distinctive main channel and adjacent relatively flat gravel WRIA 1I DSS User s Manual 6377 6378 6379 6380 6381 6382 6383 6384 6385 6386 6387 6388 6389 6390 299 bars The water begins to overtop the gravel bars in some places starting with relatively low flows and then spreads out more with increasing flows gradually The main channel usually serves as good habitat for these life stages at low to medium flows When the flows increase further velocities within the main channel become too high for fry and juvenile use at the same time shallow waters over gravel bars or vegetation outside of the main channel become available which is highly suitable for these two life stages Bertrand Creek Chinook Salmon Habitat Model 100 80 60 40 20 Percent of Maximum Habitat 0 0 0 0
288. s Models Filters pata Editors other i Land Cover Summarizer Start Location Change Land Cover New Scenario 45 Finish Location Land Cover Summgarizer To prepare the Land Cover Change Scenario Element to be run in the Scenario Builder stop you must connect the elements to the StatLocaion and the Finish Location nodes in the scenario layout i Stari Lgcation m Change Lard over Finigh Locahon Land Covei Summarizer First click on the StatLocation node Then click and hold the mouse on the box in the center of the node s icon While still pressing the mouse button drag the mouse to the Change Land Cover node in the scenario layout Land Cover Change Scenario Element 1235 1236 1237 1238 1239 1240 1241 1242 1243 1244 1245 1246 1247 1248 1249 1250 1251 1252 1253 1254 755 46 D Stari Location Frugh Locair a 4 a a a K a L Change Land Land Cove m Coger S UMM aliZer Next click and hold the mouse button down on the box in the center of the Change Land Cover node dragging the mouse to the Land Cover Summarizer node Finally click and hold the mouse button down on the box in the center of the Land Cover D Summarizer node dragging the mouse to the FrishLeestion node Shae Location Finth Location J of 4 poo Change Land Land Covei Lower Summaz Q The Land Cover Changer Scenario is now ready to be run in the DSS Scenario B
289. s Data Editors Other Land Cower Summarizer Stark i pe Land Cover Summarizer Change Land Cover Finish Location 851 852 853 Viewing Properties and the Scenario Tab 854 855 Each scenario has properties associated with it such as the scenario author title and notes 856 or descriptions The scenario properties may be viewed and edited by either double 857 clicking on the tab above the scenario or by selecting the View menu then Scenario 858 Properties 859 860 A Scenario Properties screen is shown below Any of the fields may be edited here and 861 the scenario can be password protected Click _ _ to continue or to abandon 862 any changes 863 A Scenario Properties New Scenario Sia m Properties Author Title Hew Scenario Last Modified 117 1272007 8 30 35 PM Notes Descrptiors Comments go here Password Protected Cha J 864 865 Scenario Builder Model Manager 866 867 868 869 870 871 872 873 874 875 876 877 878 879 880 881 882 883 884 885 886 887 888 889 890 89 892 893 894 895 896 30 The tab that displays the name of the scenario will often have an asterisk after the scenario name this signifies that the scenario has not yet been saved or has been modified since it was last saved Several scenarios may be open at once each open scenario will have its own tab Switching between scenarios is done by clicking the ta
290. s If Match Exact Date is selected paired observations are included only if they share the same date and time If Match within a Day is selected data pairs are selected if they share the same date Correlation f batch Exact Date F Match within a Dap The Correlation Analysis form also includes the save copy print and undo zoom buttons for exporting the correlation plots The function of these buttons is identical to those on the main Time Series Analyst form Multiple Time Series Analysis Click on the Multiple Time Series tab to view the sites and parameters chosen for the correlation plot as separate time series on the same plot as shown below Notice that in the example all paired sites are from before 1974 There is insufficient data for more correlative pairs Time Series Data Analyst Plug in 4062 4063 4064 4065 4066 4067 4068 4069 4070 4071 4072 4073 4074 186 Py Correlation Plots H A Correlation Multiple Time Series m Correlation Statistics Intercept 0133 Slope ho R Squared 0 963 Pairs 23 002 CO Options l Log Scale 12203550 WHATCOM CREEK AT BELLINGHAM WS 12203000 WHATCOM CREEK NEAR BELLINGHAM Le L 12203550 12203000 Correlation ra r eM Time Series C Line Both C Point Add Remove Control Line 3 w o wn w w c D Ww 0O gt cr w 3 Ww x pm g w Q WO wO paed Qa oN 2 Station 12203550 WHATCOM CREEK AT BEL
291. s click frojorjis6s froyosjise0 z The start date is the date listed to the left and the end date is the date listed on the right To run the scenario click the P button If you would like to abort the scenario run click the button to cancel the scenario run When the scenario has completed the DSS user will be asked if they would like to view the scenario run log a text file containing messages output by the elements contained in the scenario that has just been run viewtoa x The scenario run has completed C J Would you like to view the log For this scenario run To view the log for the scenario run click the J button To decline viewing the scenario log at this time click the _ button WRIA Wide Water Quality Model Interface 116 2686 2687 Periodicity Viewer Plug in 2688 2689 The Periodicity Viewer Plug in to the DSS allows users to view and edit the species 2690 periodicity information used in the Habitat Time Series Model To access this tool press 2691 the Periodicity Viewer toolbar button on the DSS toolbar If this button is not 2692 available on the toolbar click on the Plug ins menu on the menu bar and select 2693 Periodicity Viewer Editor from the list as shown below 2694 File Edit O55 Plug ins Time Series Reports Help C co al watershed Characterization Report egend mssssen Periodicity viewer Editor AL Sampling Well Log Data viewer n C Water dfw Land Cover Summar
292. s Section SSS Cross Section Geometry 20 4 uoneasjg cL fi mm A ak T T i Distance ft In the example shown above the tan line is the cross sectional profile The other colored lines correspond to the colors in the boxes next to the checkbox for each Predicted Flow 1D Habitat Viewer Plug in 220 4711 On the right hand side are checkboxes for each of the Predicted Flows To have the line 4712 drawn for a certain Predicted Flow the checkbox for it must be checked To turn off the 4713 line simply uncheck the checkbox The default is for all of the checkboxes to be 4714 checked this means that a line for each of the Predicted Flows will be drawn The plot is A715 automatically updated when a checkbox is checked or unchecked 4716 Reach WUA 4717 4718 The Reach WUA tab displays the weighted usable area WUA for all predicted flows at 4719 the selected reach The X axis displays the discharge in cfs and the Y axis shows the 4720 WUA in square feet per 1000 feet of reach ft 2 100ft By checking the M4 Normalized Cumes o 4721 ee option located above the Species list on the left hand side of the 4722 window the user can view the plots normalized as a percent of the maximum habitat 4723 value 4724 4725 This option is useful when comparing several species which can be done by checking 4726 and unchecking the boxes next to the species and lifestages listed in the Species window 4727 The example bel
293. s are Species_Name For all Background layers enter the value ALL Since the background layers are for all species FD_FileType The type of background layer that it is i e If it is a Hillshade then the entry Hillshade If it is a Watershed Boundary then the entry Watershed Boundary FD_Filename The location filename of the background layer that you are working on relative to the database i e if the database is located Appendix B Importing 1D and 2D data from PHABWin_2002 5686 5687 5688 5689 5690 5691 5692 5693 5694 5695 5696 5697 5698 5699 5700 5701 5702 5703 5704 5705 5706 5707 5708 5709 5710 S711 5712 5713 5714 5715 5716 5717 5718 5719 5720 5721 5722 5723 5724 5729 268 in c 2D Data database mdb and the background layer that you are working on is located in c 2D Data Fish Distribution Background Layers layerfilename shp then the entry Fish Distribution Background Layers layerfilename shp Copy the Fish Distribution shapefile layers into the Distribution Layers folder located inside the Fish Distribution folder see folder structure above Input the Fish Distribution Layers information into the database Make an entry for each Fish Distribution Layer in the tbIFishDistribution table The order of these files does NOT matter The data to be entered for the database fields are Species_Name The name of the fish species that the distribution shapefile layer is for
294. s have been selected the DSS user is ready to create polygons specifying the boundaries for land cover changes to be performed on the land cover grid The figure below shows a Change Land Cover element with no polygons added yet Land Cover Change Scenario Element 1433 1434 1435 1436 1437 1438 1440 144 1442 1443 1444 1445 54 ov a Cae PokoonD Polvoon Mame t F P iaz ny T r pam F1 T clas Aai at yi Be i F ae i l a es le a To draw a custom polygon on MapWindow s view the user can click on the E button The Change Land Cover form will be minimized allowing the user to draw on MapWindow s view as shown below log MORE OU WE ee Se i a as Poe pperisroctum fies 2 alk as ero R a F LS r iri k 2 EE s miea Tah _ se ia G am Ue The user can add a point to the polygon being drawn by clicking on the map with the left mouse button and can remove the last added point by clicking on the map with the right mouse button When the user has added all of the desired points to the polygon being drawn they can finish the polygon by clicking on the first point in the polygon with the left mouse button as shown in the following figure WRIA 1 DSS User s Manual 1446 1447 1448 1449 1450 1451 1452 1453 1435 1456 1457 55 Res south acme aves ae 3 er ee ha When the user has finished drawing the polygon the Select New Land
295. s to select nodes from a shapefile other than the one entered in the Model Nodes Shapefile section and error will occur To select nodes the user must use the Select Shapes tool o In the example shown below nodes from the Periodicity Nodes layer are being selected Habitat Time Series Model Interface 3153 3154 3155 3156 3157 3158 3159 3160 3161 3162 3163 3164 3165 3166 138 Je WRIA 1 Watershed DSS wrial dss mwprj Fie Edit O55 Plug ins Time Series Reports Help oe Ose amp 6 BHim amp Perr Sampling Data 1D Habitat Sites 2D Habitat Sites Yell Graphs Yell Report Documents Water Rights POW Photos Weather Stations Streamflow Sampling Loca dE p Maad Temperature Probes Water Quality Sampling Sit OW Political Features County Boundaries Major Roads FeeaAabsaaaam O ng i 534644 487 m Yi D47636 216 m Lin 2 859 mi Once a node has been selected the Select the Nodes to Model form will reappear and the selected node will be listed in the Selection Nodes section of the form Additional nodes can be selected by pressing the select Nodes From Map button and clicking on another node The user may also select multiple nodes at once by clicking and dragging the mouse to create a rectangle around the desired nodes This will select all nodes that lie within the rectangle as shown below el ee mae The four selected nodes have now been added to the Selected Nodes sectio
296. s using the map clicking the Well Log Data Viewer toolbar button opens the Well Log Data Viewer and loads the entire database of well log data into the Well Log Data Viewer as shown above Users can browse the entire database of well log graphs without interacting with the map However because the Well Log Data Viewer toolbar button is also used to access well report documents the Well Graphs theme must be active before clicking on the toolbar button Well Graph viewing options The Well Log Data Viewer can display data for one well or several wells on one graph Options and features of the Well Log Data Viewer pertaining to well graphs are discussed in the following sections WRIA 1I DSS User s Manual 5163 5164 5165 5166 5167 5168 5169 5170 5171 5172 5173 5174 5175 5176 5177 5178 5179 5180 5181 5182 5183 243 Viewing a Single Well Graph A single well graph can be displayed in the graph window by selecting one Well ID from the window The scroll bar on the right side of the window allows the user to look through all the available well graphs The number of wells available for viewing is shown to the left of the Well ID window Number of Welle gt 2523 Well ID Once a well is selected from the list the data is plotted on a bar graph and a color coded key for the graph is displayed to the right of the graph in the adjacent window as shown above in the Viewing Well Graphs section Viewing
297. sed approach 6486 6487 Figure C1 4 Comparison of habitat vs discharge relationships for fry life stage for Tenmile Creek 6488 WRIA 1 DSS User s Manual 6489 6490 6491 6492 6493 6494 6495 6496 6497 6498 6499 6500 6501 6502 6503 6504 305 Table Cl 1 Life stages of target fish species most sensitive to substrate and cover conditions RMSEs were estimated for WUA curves calculated using habitat model when substrate and cover were taken into consideration and WUA curves calculated using habitat model without inclusion of substrate and cover Hutchinson Creek was excluded from the analysis Fish Species Life Stage RMSE Kokanee Spawning Coho Juvenile Trout steelhead Fry Chinook Fry Coho Fry Pink Spawning Cutthroat Spawning Native char Spawnin Rainbow Spawning Table C1 2 Life stages of target fish species that have narrow ranges of optimum parameters RMSEs were estimated for WUA curves calculated using habitat model without inclusion of substrate and cover and HV curves predicted using frequency equations Hutchinson Creek was excluded from the analysis Fish Life Stage RMSE Fish Life Stage RMSE Sockeye Spawning Chinook Juvenile Coho Spawning Cutthroat Adult Cutthroat Juvenile Rainbow Spawning Mountain Whitefish Adult Mountain Whitefish Juvenile Native Char Adult Native Char Juvenile Fall Chum Spawning Kokanee Spawning Steelhead Juvenile Rainbow Adult Rainbow Juveni
298. selecting the radio button next to the desired extrapolation method Since by default all the nodes are selected they are listed in numerical order on the right hand side of the form in the Selected Nodes window To remove a node from the Selected Nodes window click on the node number with the mouse to highlight that node then press the remove button This will remove the selected node from the Selected Nodes window This node will now be available and will be listed in the Available Nodes window on the left hand side of the form To remove all the nodes in the Selected Nodes window press the Remove All button This will remove all the nodes from the Selected Nodes window and they will be displayed in the Available Nodes window To select a node from the Available Nodes click on the node number with the mouse to highlight that node then press the add button gt to move the selected node to the Selected Node window Multiple nodes can be selected for addition or removal by holding down the Ctrl key while using the mouse to select the desired nodes The user may also select specific nodes from the map by pressing the select Nodes From Map button This will minimize all other windows allowing the user to view the map To select a node from the map the desired node shapefile layer must be active and selected This layer must be the same shapefile entered in the Model Nodes Shapefile section described above If the user attempt
299. sessment sites to the additional 300 nodes within the Nooksack watershed General guidelines when extrapolating IFR or WUA curves 1 Choose a USU intensive study site over a Rapid Assessment study site 2 Choose a USU study site located geographically closer to the site of interest e g Hutchinson USU intensive study site should be used for extrapolation within subcluster 3 Hydro Cluster 7 however Deer Creek rapid assessment site should be used for extrapolation within drainage 180 or Choose a USU study site with MAF closer to that of the site of interest 4 Caution should be exercised when extrapolating IFRs or WUA curves from the study sites that were not modeled over the entire range of flows 10 to 90 exceedence flows due to modeling constraints Maple Creek Kendall Creek Lynden Bell Creek Canyon Lake Creek Lower Ruth Creek Porter Creek since no detailed information is available on the behavior of the curves at higher flows 09 A more detailed description of the method can be found in Saraeva 2006 http www engineering usu edu uwrl inse nooksack Saraeva Dissertation pdf chapter 2 p 9 Program Setup The program asks for an input of the Source Target file The file should be comma delimited and should have 8 columns Node DrainId Cluster Subcluster MAF cfs 60 exeed_cfs Source _Site Site_Type and 338 rows 337 node records and a header The file provided with the program is Source Targe
300. ships based on the frequency based approach are usually predicted with the lowest error average RMSE 15 13 and 15 1 respectively whereas juvenile and fry habitat relationships derived from the frequency based approach have somewhat higher prediction errors 18 1 and 21 65 respectively Substrate was a contributing factor in misrepresenting available habitat for rainbow and kokanee spawning at Whatcom creek at high flows the two higher points Figure C1 3 The shapes of available habitat versus discharge curves were similar to those shown in Figure C1 2 for both approaches The Hutchinson Creek site was treated as an outlier throughout the analysis The stream is characterized by a very distinctive main channel and adjacent relatively flat gravel bars The water begins to overtop the gravel bars in some places starting with relatively low flows and then spreads out more with increasing flows gradually providing more and more areas with depth and velocity suitable for all life stages of fish so the available habitat for all target fish at this site increases with increasing flows The frequency equations for depth work well for a regular shaped channel but they are not able to reflect additional lower depths when the river overflows its active channel and inundates large flat areas As a result RMSEs for the majority of fish species and life stages for Hutchinson Creek were in the range between 35 and 45 Figure C1 3 The hydraulic
301. simply check the checkbox next to the Log of Data option 1099 Data To view the selected plot type in a linear scale simply un check the checkbox The default is to have the Log of Data checkbox unchecked This means that the data will be displayed in a linear scale WRIA 1 DSS User s Manual 4642 4643 4644 4645 4646 4647 4648 4649 4650 4651 4652 4653 4654 4655 4656 4657 4658 4659 4660 4661 4662 4663 4664 217 Longitudinal Profile The Longitudinal Profile tab plots the longitudinal profile for the observed and predicted data sets The X axis shows the distance between the Cross Sections where cross section l starts at O feet The Y axis is the Elevation in feet The user may specify which discharges they wish to display using the Discharge Selector box along the right hand side of the window and is labeled in the example below There is a check box for each of the Predicted Flows Physical Stage Discharge Longitudinal Profile HSC Habitat Reach WUA Species Comparison Discharge Comparison Surface Plat Data to View n W View Observed Data Blue Lines w View Predicted Data yellow Aed Lines Mecharge selertor Discharge cts Longitudinal Profile F at Observed and Predicted Water Surface Elevations Bell Creek 0 80 I Thalweg EE Stage Zero Flow HG Cbhserved Data 151 M 221 M 251 3 61 431 5 01 M 571 641 i 711 7 81 M 851 M 921 CALE M 1061 M 11 31 Y 1201 Y 1271 E
302. sponds to one of the USU study sites the user will get a message asking to enter another node number Figure 9 Extrapolation The Target Site You Selected is Gustincreek Study Site Choose Another Target Site Figure 9 The message the user gets if the entered node number is one of the USU study sites The user will be asked if they would like to use the default source site for extrapolation or choose a new source site Figure 10 If the user chooses to use the default extrapolation site they will be prompted to enter the file name to save the output If the user chooses to select another source site for extrapolation the next window will show a list of USU study sites belonging to the same hydro group as the target site Figure 11 If the chosen target and source sites have significantly different flow magnitude e g one site is a small creek and the other site is a river the user will get a message showing flow magnitudes for both sites Figure 12 The user has a choice to either continue with the selected source site or choose another source site for the extrapolation WRIA 1I DSS User s Manual 6160 6161 6162 6163 6164 6165 6166 6167 6168 6169 6170 6171 6172 6173 6174 6175 6176 6177 6178 6179 289 The user will then be asked to save the output file Extrapolation The Default Source Site For This Node is Ferndale Would You Like to Use This Site For Extrapolation w Source Sites
303. ss Server User ID i Use Trusted Server Password Connection Microsoft Access f Use Access to find the database Please specify the full path to the MDEB file containing the database Database Path C Program Filess WAlA 1_DSSS 05S Data 2 Test Connection s Save Changes To browse to a Microsoft Access Land Cover Summary Database click the button An open file dialog will be displayed To save the selected database location click the Save Charges button Select Land Cover Grid To select a land cover grid click the button to the right of t in the Land Cover Summary Settings form Land Cover Change Scenario Element 1495 1496 1497 1498 1499 1500 1501 1502 1503 1504 1505 1506 1507 1508 1509 1510 1511 1512 1513 1514 58 Select Input Land Cover Grid Polygon Shapefile Polygon ID Field r Polwgon Name Field The Select Land Cover Grid form will then be displayed 4 Select Land Cover Grid Seles Select Data Laver f From loaded layers LandHillshade C From Base Data None selected eal CO From Curent Scenario t From file i l Cancel f From loaded layers To select a grid loaded in MapWindow s view click the radio button and then select the name of the grid layer in the layer list To select a grid from the DSS base data click the eee radio button then click the button A base data form will be disp
304. t Users can limit this date range by selecting a new starting year and month and or a new ending year and month This allows users to identify water quality stations having data within specified time periods It also provides users with information on the number of observations available within specific time periods The Update button forces the plot to re draw ensuring that the plot represents the current settings in the Station and Date Range pull down boxes The Parameter Summary Plots form also includes the save copy and print buttons for exporting the plots that are generated The function of these buttons 1s identical to those on the main Time Series Analyst form refer to Plot Saving Exporting and Printing section above An additional option at the bottom right of the form Enable Subset Colors allows the user to toggle between color and black amp white symbols on the Time distribution plot A complete set of plot options can be accessed by positioning the pointer on the plot window and clicking the right mouse button By default all parameters for a station are shown in the above plots The Select Alpi Parameters button at the top of the form allows the user to select a subset of water quality parameters from the list of all parameters in the water quality database Select Alpi HF to access the form shown below Use the check boxes to select deselect the parameters of interest for the chosen station When finished making se
305. t a JA Hydrogrography Fe NHD Water Bodies J NHD River ReachFie vy jam Roads Major Roads N J Wetershed Boundaries O DAR Subweatersheds O I Poltical Boundaries Non Forested Renge Lan Forest Uplands __ Riparian and Wetland Are Barren Land E Alpine Meadow _ Snow Ice Cloud or Clou Hl No Data EM Topography H Mete Bie 1 0 tesinnad Etniniinn K S21298 553 311469 062 0 i You can change your view layout to either docked or floating The view is docked when each frame is separate no overlapping The view is floating when one or more frames float above another frame or frames m i R oon Tae ee Se ee a D ee i a AA m ESE a Docked Frames Fle ating Frames To resize a frame move your mouse pointer to an edge of the frame and then click and drag the boundary until the frame is the desired size WRIA 1 DSS User s Manual 624 625 626 627 628 629 630 631 632 633 634 635 636 637 638 639 640 641 19 Feature Identifier and Shape Labeler Plug in Feature Identifier The Feature Identifier tool allows you to click on a feature in the selected layer and view attribute information for the given feature To use the Feature Identifier tool first you must turn on and activate the layer for which you would like information recall that a theme is active when it is gray and a box surrounds it and on when it is checked
306. t_337nodes csv Figure 1 shows the first few records of the file Intensive IFIM study sites should have Intensive Site in the Site_Type column rapid assessment study sites should have 1D Site in the Site_Type column Appendix C Extrapolation Program User Manual 6045 6046 6047 6048 6049 6050 6051 6052 6053 6054 6055 6056 6057 6058 6059 6060 6061 6062 6063 6064 6065 6066 6067 6068 284 Hode DrainId Cluster Subcluster HAF cfs 68 exeed cfs Source Site Site Type 166 79 8 6 23 8 7 9 AndersonCreek Drainage Outlet 167 79 8 6 21 4 7 2 Andersontreek Streamflow Gage 168 798 6 77 1 5 8 Aandersontreek streamflow Gage 169 79 8 6 15 7 5 4 A ndersonCreek Intensive Site 256 56 8 6 22 8 7 7 AndersonCreek Drainage Outlet 2f2 200 8 6 3 4 1 1 AndersonCreek Drainage Outlet 290 167 8 3 3 2 1 2 AustinCreek Drainage Outlet 291 118 8 3 2 1 0 9 AustinCreek Drainage Outlet Figure 1 First 8 records of the Source Target_337nodes csv file Four folders must be in the same directory as the executable program file 1 2 3 4 Historic_337exceedences WUAinput IFRinput Pictures Historic_337exceedences Folder Historic_337exceedences folder contains 337 comma delimited text files with exceedence tables for the 337 nodes Figure 2 shows an example of the file for the node 1 The Node 4 folder with all the files is provided with the program Exceedance
307. tab in the Elements window of the 1604 Scenario Builder and double click on the Water Quantity Model highlighted in red below 1605 Elements Models Fitters Data Editors Other J WRIA Wide Water Quality Model iG Lake Whatcom Water Quality Model oC Habitat Time Series Model red Water Quantity Model 1606 1607 1608 The Water Quantity Model will be added to the scenario layout 1609 amp DSS Scenario Builder KEk File Elements View Run O b jooo izjaiji9e9 Elements ai water Quantity Scenario niie Filters Data Editors Other Sn em WRIG Wide Water Quality Model stop E Lake Whatcom Water Quality Model Start Location he Habitat Time Series Model water Quantity Model Finish Location Water Quantity odel 1610 1611 1612 To prepare the Water Quantity Model to be run in the Scenario Builder you must connect 2 1613 the model to the StatLocation and the Firish Location nodes in the scenario layout 1614 WRIA 1 DSS User s Manual 63 Ge Start Location m s Water Quantity Model Finish Location 1615 1616 1617 First click on the StatLocation node Then click and hold the mouse on the box in the center 1618 of the node s icon While still pressing the mouse button drag the mouse to the Water 1619 Quantity Model node in the scenario layout 1620 slart Lagat Finish Location a E Mapel E 1621 1622 1623 Repeat the previous step b
308. tatModel Manager Databases E sisting aterm anagement mdb Scenaro SML File C Program FiestwWwAlA d_0555055_DatasModel Manager Databases OScenario sml Edit Scenario SML File Adjust Scenario Impervious Fraction kd Edit 4 ater Managment Allocate By Availability EE E Ce oC A E Select WRIA I Drainages Shapefile To select the WRIA 1 Drainages Shapefile click the button next to WRIA 1 Dramages shapefile The Select Drainage Shapefile form will then be displayed Water Quantity Model Interface 1662 1663 1664 1665 1666 1667 1668 1669 1670 1671 1672 1673 1674 1675 1676 1677 1678 1679 1680 1681 1682 1683 1684 1685 1686 66 ar Select Drainage Shapefile A Eg Select Data Layer f From loaded layers Marne Waters Shellfish Harvesting Activities Water Bodies Comprehensive Plan Zonin Municipal Boundaries State i From Base Daa Add To View IN one Selected El i From file C Drainage ID Field Drainage Name Field MaA eerie Cancel To select a shapefile loaded in MapWindow s view click the Fmleadedlavers radio button then select the name of the shapefile layer in the layer list To select a shapefile from the DSS base data click the 8224 radio button then click the button A base data form will be displayed with Drainages shown Click the button To select a shapefile from file click the F radio button then click the button An open
309. tershed C Program Files AIA 1 DSS5055 Data GlS_Data Shapetiles atershed b To Delete Click to the left of the record and press Delete on the keyboard i To Add Scroll to the bottom of the grid and begin entering new data pami ale HEISE Navigate to the desired location and press Upen The new location will appear in the table on the screen The FileID data name or DataType can be edited by clicking in the field and directly editing New data items can be added by clicking the __Add button To delete a data item click in the grey area to the left of the record highlighting the row then press the Delete key on your keyboard to delete it WRIA I DSS User s Manual 1047 1048 1049 1050 1051 1052 1053 1054 1055 1056 1057 1058 1059 1060 1061 1062 1063 1064 1065 1066 1067 1068 37 None of these changes will be saved until the __ Save button is pressed at which time all changes that have been made will be saved permanently Configuring the DSS Database The Scenario Builder uses an internal database to store scenarios and base data information The location of the database that the Scenario Builder is using may be changed by clicking on the File menu then selecting Database Configuration The screen will appear as shown below Database Configuration The 055 uses a database called 055Data Please specity where to find this database Micrasott SQL Server f Use SOL Server to fi
310. tfiles 056_plotile C Program Files 2D imp H 20 DataQ5 20 Data New Data 0l hatcomsFlow Plotfiles O70_plottile C Program Files 20 mp H 20 DataQS 2D Data New Datas01 WhateomFlow Plottiles 035_plotfile C Program Files 20 imp HOP Daka 0B OP Di akat Aiea Dakai 0T Aath akeas Plena Plethilee 17 elesbile Det Braarara Files OM lear i gt Importing Flow Done O02 File Species Information Source Meshpoints Filename rel Importing Species Done O24 File To import the flow data click the Import Fow Data button The progress will be displayed as the data is imported Once this finishes each of the output files chf will be written to the output locations listed in the File list and an entry put into the database for each of them Importing Species Data Importing the Species data is very similar to importing the Flow data To begin click the Browse button next to the Source Meshpoints Filename and select the appropriate source shapefile Again this is the same source mesh file that was used when importing the Habitat and or the Flow data Also as when importing the Flow data the File list and Add Remove buttons will enabled once the source mesh file has been selected WRIA 1 DSS User s Manual 5966 5967 5968 5969 5970 D971 5972 5973 5974 5975 5976 5977 5978 5979 5980 5981 279 Next add the Species and the Species List source files To do this click the Plus icon
311. th data that corresponds to the feature you selected WRIA 1I DSS User s Manual 660 661 662 663 664 665 666 667 668 669 670 671 672 673 674 675 676 677 678 2i Feature Identifier Water Qu Seles Shape Index kd a57 Field Name Field alue STATION Nooksack 20 DATABASE 1 STATION Na Boulder Creek at Mount AGENCY Nooksack LOCATION STATE Washington Whatcom 0 0 oF 0957 56 In the example above we clicked on a feature in the map and then viewed its attribute information in the Feature Identifier window This tool can also locate features on a map based on user defined specifications The user can activate a layer click the Feature Identifier tool and then select several features of the layer EW Sampling Data Streamflow Sampling Locations amp 7 Temperature Probes 4 iw Water Quality Sampling Sites gh When more than one feature 1s selected with the Feature Identifier tool only one feature s attributes will appear in the Feature Identifier table The feature that appears in the table will change color in the Map View The other selected features will remain unchanged The Feature Identifier table includes two fields at the top of the window in which you can perform queries on the selected features In the right box you can select an attribute In the left you can select a corresponding attribute value MapWindow Watershed Information System 22
312. the X axis displays the Channel Index codes Again a description of these codes can be found by clicking on the blue Channel Index link to the right of the Plot Type selector menu The X axis for the Depth SI is the depth in feet or meters and the Velocity SI has units of feet per second ft s or meters per second m s depending on which units are selected Phabsim 2D Intensive Site Viewer Intensive Site Marne MIRSA steed pert Physical Wl HSC Fish Distribution Miscellaneous Data Units Plot Type Channel Index SI Channel Index Chinook Spawn Stream LC Chinook Spawn River CL Chinook Spawn LargeRiver L Chinook Holding Chinook Juvenile L Chinook Fry CJ Fall Chum Spawning Coho Spawning CJ Coho Juvenile L Coho Fry L Fink Spawning C Sockeye Spawning CT Rainbow Spawning Q Rainbow Juv dult LC Rainbow Winter C Trout steelhead Fry CJ Steelhead Spawning CL Steelhead Juvenile C Cutthroat Spawning C Cutthroat JuveAdult Q Native char Spawning Q Native char Juv dult Kokanee Spawning C Mountain whitefish Juvenile C Mountain whitefish Adult Fish Distribution Suitability Index SN Channel Index SI E lt MMU e My y i SE E E Moo MO Wooo T5 100 5 co J S m a in co fa 50 Channel Index f OS Customary Bele C Metric Chinook Spawn Stream The Fish Distribution tab allows the user to view the fish distributions f
313. the model is run since it is updated with the DO data for the selected nodes The shapefile used must have the same formatting as the DO_Flags_Warnings shp file or the model will not run successfully Once all the input and output parameters have been set using the Temperature and DO Flags Model Parameters form press o to accept the changes and return to the DSS Scenario Builder window To return to this window without accepting the changes made to the Temperature and DO Flags Model Parameters form press a Temperature and Dissolved Oxygen Flags Model Interface 3556 3557 3558 3559 3560 3561 3562 3563 3564 3565 3566 3567 3568 3569 3570 3571 3572 3573 3574 3575 160 Run Temperature and DO Flags Model The DSS Scenario Builder allows the DSS user to run the Temperature and DO Flags Model DSS Scenario Builder Fie Elements View Pun je a1 o1 1990 12 31 1999 mimin x New Scenario 6 e WRIS Wide Water Quality Model Lake Whatcom Water Quality Model Habitat Time Series Model Start Lacaton a Location a Temperature and DO Flags Mode Water Quantity Model Q Q 4 o Temperature and DO Flags Model Once the model inputs and outputs have been configured the model can be run The Temperature and DO Flags Model does not use the date range selectors so it is not necessary to enter a date range To run the scenario click the P button If you would like to ab
314. to contain the changed land cover grid created by the Change Land Cover element click the button to the right of 2 Pt Lend Cover Grid Directory Browse For Folder Select the location of the Folder to contain the scenario s changed land cover grid Desktop i i My Documents Ho My Computer i a My Network Places Browse to the directory to contain the changed land cover grid and then click the button Click the button to discard the directory selected Select Land Cover Change Polygons Once you have finished with the Change Land Cover Changer Settings the Change Land Cover form will appear This form allows the DSS user to select the changes in land cover for the specified input land cover grid Change Land Cover Sele Polygon IO Polygon Hame Add Changed Land Cover Grid To View Settings Cancel WRIA I DSS User s Manual 1332 1333 1334 1335 1336 1337 1338 1339 1340 1341 1342 1343 1344 1345 1346 1347 1348 1349 1350 1351 1352 1353 1354 1355 1356 1357 1358 1359 1360 1361 1362 1363 1364 1365 1366 1367 1368 1369 5I Add Land Cover Change Polygon To create a change in the land cover grid specified in the Change Land Cover Settings form you must create a polygon containing specific changes in land cover Add Shape from Polygon Shapefile To select a shape in the polygon shapefile specified in the settings click the 4 button The Change Land Cover form
315. ttings form will be displayed as seen below lel Water Quality Model Inputs 0 x Input Output Best Management Prachces BMPs Selected ie Land Cover Grid lulc_ cal bgd ne Lake Whatcom Grids Input Directon C Program Files tw AIA 1 D55055 Data GlS DatasGrideww aterki Water Quantity Output Director C Frogram Files RIA 1 D55055 Data ater Quantity Toohet Water Quality Parameters Database C Program Filestw RIA 1 D55055 Data Model Manager Databa rea E Edit Lake Whatcom Water Quality Model Settings The Lake Whatcom Water Quality Inputs form allows the user to edit view the settings for the model To edit view the input settings click the tab To edit view the output settings click the tab Edit Lake Whatcom Water Quality Model Inputs The input tab allows the user to view edit the input settings for the Lake Whatcom Water Quality Model To change the settings for a particular input select the button to the right of the input setting WRIA 1 DSS User s Manual 89 Hi Water Quality Model Inputs 4 iol xi Input Output Best Management Practices BMPs Selected P Land Cover Grid lulc_cal6 bgd E Lake Whatcom Grids Input Director C Program Files A lA 1 D55055 Datasbls DatasGrideww aterl Water Quantity Output Director C Program Files RIA 1 D55055 Datatwater Quantity Took et Water Quality Parameters Database C Program Files RIA 1 0554055 Cata M
316. two methods for rotating the view of the graph The first method is to double click the plot This will cause the graph to begin to rotate It will continue to do so until it is double clicked again at which point it will stop The number in the top left corner of the plot indicates the current degree of rotation The second method is to use the scroll bars located at the bottom of the plot When the scrollbar is at its left most position the degree of rotation is 0 0 As you move it to the right it rotates the picture The degree of rotation is updated in the top left corner of the plot When the scrollbar is at its right most position the degree of rotation is 359 0 The default position for the scrollbar is the left most position or 0 0 degrees of rotation The scrollbar located on the right hand side of the plot is to change the perspective of the graph As the scrollbar is moved upward the user will see the plot from the underside of the wire frame looking up from the bottom on the plot If the scrollbar is at its top most position the user will see the underside of the wire frame plot As the scrollbar is moved downward the user will see the plot from the top of the wire frame looking down on the plot If the scrollbar is at its bottom most position the user will see the top side of the wire frame plot Physical Stage Discharge Longitudinal Profile HSC Habitat Reach WUA Species Comparison Discharge Comparison
317. txt Cancel WRIA 1I DSS User s Manual 3375 3376 3317 3378 3379 3380 3381 3382 3383 3384 3385 3386 3387 3388 3389 3390 3391 3392 3393 3394 3395 3396 3397 151 Once the desired file has been selected press Oren Select Model Nodes Shapefile To change the Model Nodes Shapefile used in the Temperature and DO Flags Model click the browse S button to the right of the Model Nodes Shapefile pathname The following form will appear allowing the user to select a different shapefile from the loaded layers or from file Select A Model Nodes Shape Select Data Layer f From loaded layers Weather Stations Photos Water Rights POW Well Report Documents Well Graphs 20 Habitat Sites 10 Habitat Sites Water Quantity Control Modes Temperature DO Nodes C From file wl Cancel To select a Model Nodes Shapefile from the layers currently loaded in the DSS select the From loaded layers option and select a layer from the list as shown above To select a Model Nodes Shapefile from file select the From file option and enter the Ei entire file pathname in the box below or press the browse button desired file location to navigate to the f From file C Program FilestwAlA 1_ D55405 Once a layer or file has been selected press o to accept the shapefile and continue To return to the m ad DO flags form without selecting a new Model Cancel
318. uantity Model C lO x is E Use Curent Scenario Directory C Program Files WALG 1_ DSS 4M ater Quantity Top To move up a directory level click the button To change the drive to browse for folders click the 7 button To use a directory that will be created when the current scenario is run check the Use Curent Scenario Directoy box To select a folder as the desired directory click on the folder s name To open a folder double click the folder s name y p To save the selected directory click the button Select Water Quality Parameters Database The Database Configuration form allows a DSS user to select a Water Quality Parameters Database To access this form select the l button to the right of Water Quality Parameters Database on the Input tab of the Water Quality Model Inputs form This will bring up the Database Configuration form as shown below WRIA 1 DSS User s Manual 2625 2626 2627 2628 2629 2630 2631 2632 2633 2634 2635 2636 2637 2638 2639 2640 113 Database Configuration q xj The water Quality Model needs parameters from database WRIA Wide Parameters mdb Microsoft SOL Server Use SOL Server to find the database Server Address Server User ID sss E Use Trusted Serer Password Connection Micrasott Access f Use Access to find the database Please specify the full path to the MOB file containing the database Database
319. uilder Edit Land Cover Change Scenario Element Settings The Land Cover Change Scenario is made up of the Change Land Cover element and the Land Cover Summarizer element The Land Cover Change Scenario s settings are changed by editing the settings of these two individual elements To edit the Change Land Cover element s settings double click on the Change Land Cover node in the scenario layout WRIA 1 DSS User s Manual 1256 1257 1258 1259 1260 1261 1262 1263 1264 1265 1266 1267 1268 1269 Q Start Location 47 stap 4 Locahon The Change Land Cover Changer Settings form will be displayed as seen below Land Cover Changer Settings M Inputa Input Land Cover Grid Filepath a Use Boundaries From Polygon Shapetile Polygon Shapetile Filepath Output fo Output Land Cover Grid Directory C Program Files WRIA 1_0554055 Data Gl5 Data _ Select Input Land Cover Grid To select a land cover grid click the OF Cancel button to the right of Input Land Cover Gnd Filepath in the screen shown above The Select Land Cover Grid form will then be displayed as shown below Land Cover Change Scenario Element 1270 1271 1272 1273 1274 1275 1276 1277 1278 1279 1280 1281 1282 1283 1284 1285 1286 1287 1288 1289 1290 1291 1292 48 dE Select Land Cover Grid ax Select Data Layer f From loaded layers Land Cover C From B
320. urface Elevation Ft Flow t 3s EEE D 29 2717 5 B 29 5046 59 D 29 7375 59 my 29 9705 of g0 2034 Ol 4903 ea oa al ri 4904 4905 Once a flow is selected the graph window will be updated to show the selected data 4906 Other options such as Depth Suitability Index Velocity Suitability Index 4907 Substrate Vegetation Suitability Index and Combined Suitability Index allow the user to 4908 view data at different flows and for different species The flows are selected in the same 4909 manner as shown above To select a certain species and or lifestage the user can select 4910 the arrow button to the right of the Species Lifestage Selector option as shown below 2D Habitat Viewer Plug in 4911 4912 4913 4914 4915 4916 4917 4918 4919 4920 4921 4922 4923 4924 4925 4926 4927 4928 4929 4930 230 Species Litestage i Chinook Fry Chinook Fry Chinook Holding Chinook Juvenile Chinook Spawn Langer Chinook Spawn River Chinook Spawn Stream Coho Fry Coho Juvenile Once the desired species lifestage has been selected the graph window will be updated to display that information WUA The WUA tab displays the weighted usable area WUA for all predicted flows at the selected reach The X axis displays the discharge in cfs and the Y axis shows the WUA in square feet per 1000 feet of reach ft 2 100ft if U5 Customay is selected or square By checking the Leo option located above the
321. user must specify which field in the selected Model Nodes shapefile is to be used using the Node ID FieldName box as shown below Hode lD FieldName Habitat Time Series Model Interface 3107 3108 3109 3110 3111 3112 3113 3114 3115 3116 3117 3118 3119 3120 3121 3122 3123 136 If more than one Field Name exists in the selected Model Nodes shapefile it can be selected from the list by pressing the down arrow lto the right of the Node ID Field Name box as shown above Select Nodes To select the Nodes to be modeled in the Habitat Time Series Model press the electNodes button as shown below manana Selected Nodes Default All Nodes Method B Note that if this button is not pushed the model will use the default of all nodes selected and will use WUA calculation method B Pressing the __ SelectNodes button brings up the following form Select the Nodes to Model Weighted Usable Area MUA Data Extrapolation Method f Method E C Method C Available Nodes Selected Nodes bl Remove All Select Modes From Map OF Cancel WRIA 1I DSS User s Manual 3124 3125 3126 3127 3128 3129 3130 3131 3132 3133 3134 3135 3136 3137 3138 3139 3140 314 3142 3143 3144 3145 3146 3147 3148 3149 3150 3151 3152 137 Again the default is to model all the nodes and to use Method B The user can select either WUA data extrapolation method B or C by
322. value and then click Browse to locate the source plotfile The Select Your Flow Source Plotfile Filename window will appear as shown below LE Select your Source Flow and Plotfile Flow Value gt File Information Source Filename a F 2 Select Your Flow Source Plotfile Filename Output Filename Aye Soeg er T My Recent 1416_plotfilez 028_plotfilez Documents E 035_plotfilez 3 042_plotfilez 3 049_plotfilez 3 056_plotfile E 070_plotfile E 085_platfile E 113_plotfile 141_plotfile My Network File name i Places Files of type Flow Files Cancel File Information Source Filename H 420 Datal5i D Data New Datathi whabcomsF low Plothles 014_plothle a Output Filename H 420 DataUS 2D Data New Data 01 hatcom Flow Plothles014_plothile A Uk Lancel To change the directory where the output files will be written click the second browse button by Output Filename A form titled Browse For Folder will appear as below WRIA 1 DSS User s Manual 5942 5943 5944 5945 5946 5947 5948 5949 5950 5951 5952 2711 JS Select your Source Flow and Plotfile Fowvaue 014 File Information Source Filename H 420 Data05 2D Data New Data whatcom iow Plotiles01 4_plothile Output Filename Browse For Folder G Program Files 3 2 2DImporte
323. venile life stages depends greatly on substrate conditions and availability of cover which are not taken into consideration when calculating available habitat using the frequency equations Figure C1 2 shows a comparison of the habitat curves for fry for Squalicum Creek The frequency based predictions of available habitat for fry fit quite well at the lower flows while deviating more at higher flows where substrate and cover become important factors contributing to estimated habitat using the two dimensional habitat model The main channel usually serves as good habitat for these life stages at low to medium flows When the flows increase further velocities within the main channel become too high for fry and juvenile use at the same time shallow waters over gravel bars or vegetation outside of the main channel become available which is highly suitable for these two life stages These results show that when substrate and or cover represent an important component of habitat availability greater caution and expert judgment should be exercised when interpreting the frequency derived estimates of available habitat Figure C1 3 shows the RMSEs calculated by comparison of the two dimensional habitat model and frequency based results for all small study sites for spawning fry juvenile and adult life stages of selected fish species Spawning and adult habitat relationships based on the frequency based approach are usually predicted with the lowest er
324. w 1 ReturnFlowd 0 Return Flow Amount 1 0 05 ReturnFlowd 1 RetumFlow 2 Return Flow Type 1 2 Ground Water ReturnFlow 3 lial Return Flow Location 1 ReturnFlowd 6 ReturnFlow 7 Waste Water Treatment Plant ID 1 ReturnFlowd amp ReturnFlowd 4 RetumnFlow20 Flow 2 ReturniF low Return Flow Amount 2 AReturnF low Return Flow Hame Return Flow Type 2 Return Flow Location 2 Waste Water Treatment Plant ID 2 OF Cancel To edit the return flow name edit the text in the text box to the right of FetumFlowName To edit the number of returns select a number from the drop down menu to the right of Number of Return Flows To edit the return flow units select a unit from the drop down menu to the right of Festum Flow Units There are two possible locations associated with a return flow Each has a separate set of inputs To edit the amount of flow edit the text in the text box to the right of Return FlowAmount Note that amount refers to the return flow units above which may be fractional so amount does not in general have units To edit the flow type for the associated return amount select a type from the drop down menu to the right of Return Flow Type 1 To edit the flow location for the associated return amount select a location from the drop down menu to the right of Festum Flow Location To edit the wastewater treatment plant associated with the flow amount select a WWTP from the drop down list to the right of
325. ween the 5491 column names and dragging You may also resize the window itself 5492 Appendix A Importing Data into the Master Server 5493 5494 5495 5496 5497 5498 5499 5500 5501 5502 5503 5504 5505 5506 5507 5508 5509 5510 5511 5512 5513 5514 5515 5516 5517 5518 262 J Data Import Preview First 10 Records Only Station Agency Cor Date Depth Parameter Value Comment OC WAQC Code Data Code Source _D 12273095 11 2wWAD 1715 1974 10 B4 NE Legacy 5 12213095 11 2wWAD 1 15 1974 6 15700 NE Legacy 51 12273095 oW4WAD 1715 1974 fal 140 NE Legacy 5 12213095 11 wWAD 1 15 1974 a0 120 NE Legacy 5 12273095 11 2wWAD 1715 1974 95 p3 NE Legacy 5 127213095 AWAD 1715 1974 300 123 NE Legacy 51 12213095 AWAD 1715 1974 400 Ta NE Legacy 51 12213095 AWAD WATS 19 4 610 0 36 NK Legacy 51 12213095 oWAWAD 1715 1974 B30 0 35 NK Legacy 51 12213095 AWAD W519 F4 660 0 03 NK Legacy 51 G After returning to the import window click the Import button The progress meter will show the progress through the text file When the process completes the Import window will show the number of records imported below the progress bar and the window shown below will appear DBMS Import successfully completed H If an error is found in the file an error message will appear The system will do its best to help describe the error or at least what line in the file the error occurs at Common things to
326. wer Cite Wnderson Creek Sample MA 1 Benthic m Raw Data Size Distribution Density Sample Information f Show count for full sample Subsample expanded f Show percentage of macroinvertebrates Anderson Creek MA 1 Benthic F E fa ai E di 2 ti f 5 F E Size of Macroinvenebrates WRIA 1I DSS User s Manual 239 5080 Macroinvertebrate Density Plots 508 1 5082 Click on the Density tab to view the density of macroinvertebrates in a sample Select 5083 Total to view a plot of the total density of macroinvertebrates in the sample Choose 5084 SizeClast to view a plot of the density of macroinvertebrates in each size class Select 5085 Species to view a plot of macroinvertebrate density by species as shown below 5086 1 Macroinvertebrate Data Viewer DER Gite Anderton Creek Sample MA 1 Benthic Raw Data Size Distribution Density Sample Information C Total C Size Class f Species Anderson Creek MA 1 Benthic HT T ENRE T nan T il rp wewty Acute O fT m j J Caddisty Aduts o A E g t m E H E rr C a ae Miles ard Spiders uF Brais h f Aquatic worn Midge Lar ac BMN hliced Diptera Adus _ Widge Pupae m Ca ded isl hy eae Po o Boctlos hii Wide Pupae a Sonar Acuils Black Fh Lamar mE A quale Morine 1 Wisccl arouse m lisg elarenus Rath arid Sliorelk Landi lh Howry ard
327. while the InstallShield Wizard installs WRIG 1 D55 Final Deliverable Standard This may take several minutes Statys 362 WRIA 1 DSS User s Manual 363 364 365 366 367 368 369 370 371 3 2 373 374 a 376 377 378 InstallShield Portion Complete When the InstallShield portion of the installation has finished you ll see the screen below Click the Finish button to proceed to the next step The InstallShield Wizard has successfully installed WRIG 1 O55 Final Deliverable Standard Click Finish to exit the wizard Microsoft SQL Server Desktop Edition Installation Microsoft SQL Server Desktop Edition is the database server utilized by the WRIA 1 DSS This stores the main databases used by the Time Series Analyst and other plug ins When you click Finish on the screen above you ll see the window below which informs you that the Microsoft SQL Server installation is beginning i Windows Installer Cancel Installing the WRIA 1 DSS 379 380 381 382 383 384 385 386 387 WU OOOO OCO 390 39 392 393 394 395 396 397 398 399 400 If the database server is already installed on your computer you will receive the error message below This message may be ignored Simply click OK on the message box and proceed to the next step Reboot Microsoft SOL Server Desktop Engine A The instance name specihed is invalid If the database server is not installed then you l
328. x Whisker 7 Overall Box Whisker The following figures show examples of each of these plot types 12203550 WHATCOM CREEK AT BELLINGHAM eerrrrrrrrrrirrritrirrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrirrrritrrrrrerrrrrrriirtrrtrtrt treet oo 12203550 WHATCOM CREEK AT BELLINGHAM nt a OIG E R E VS E EE P ek oer E be teed ee EE EE E A ane E O E 475004 on nn nnn nnn nnn nnn nn pen nn nn nn nn enn nn npn nnn n nnn nnn nnnnnofer Taa E EE E echiced E E E E EE E E E E EEE sechas A paceacestevatwend S000 amp ee senna e e e a Meer a aeaa boa aiana nenn a 4 4 0000 TATTI ee eee ee eee a ae J abona n a A A E e A A A A TA E AEA PEDERE sakes sdavcdews boetenLc bode cit do lt cclwcckoccodicbeccscecbiccttencs 5 mda n r E RAE EEEE AT IAEE EEA AE NE EE EAE EEIE E I EEEE E EA EEEE TEE EE 5000 50004 b 7 f ee fee b hy pe ef e eee f 9 E 2500 ee See eee ee eee ee ee ees ee ee ee ee ee es ee ee ee ee ee ee ee et a a ae E E Le eee en eee me ty eee eee Be 8 o Oct Jan 73 Apr Jul Oct 1972 Date Cumalative Frequency Stated Value 9 1 Time Series 2 Probability Time Series Data Analyst Plug in 170 3769 3770 12203550 WHATCOM CREEK AT BELLINGHAM EAE a DL e a a r e mcssesse ne EREE O O E E E E seeecemaas E aee SE II e S E EE A E E g 54 ME E 0 ee ee et eee eee Sa oo RSs opera a enone E orreaer we 8 co 31 S E jie g
329. y again clicking the box in the center of the Water Quantity 1624 Model dragging the mouse to the FitishLocation node 1625 o F N Pa NEOe SIE Finish Location Water Lluantity Model 1626 1627 1628 The Water Quantity Model is now ready to be run in the DSS Scenario Builder Water Quantity Model Interface 64 1629 Edit Water Quantity Model Settings 1630 1631 To edit the Water Quantity Model settings double click on the Water Quantity Model 1632 node in the scenario layout 1633 4 Start Locatign 1634 1635 1636 The Water Quantity Model settings form will be displayed as seen below 1637 Water Quantity Model Settings Input Output WRAIA 1 Drainages Shapefle C Program Files WfAI4 1 DS54055 DataGlS Data Shapetles atershed bsrnianial_vi shp TopHet Input Directoy C Program Files WwfAlA 1 DSS rater Quantity TopNet Files ModellnputFilesE sisting Land Cover Summary Database C Program Files WAl4 1 0554055 DatatModel Manager Databases LandCoverSummary mdb Land Cover Scenario Selecton Scenario 2 Water Management Database C Program Files WfAl4 1 DS54055 DatatModel Manager Databases E sisting aterm anagement mdb Scenario SML File C Frogram Files WwfAl4 1 0554055 DatatModel Manager Databases Scenario sml Edit Scenaro ML File Adjust Scenario Imperious Fraction Edit ater Managment Allocate By Availability 4 EA E A E 1638 1639 1640 The water quantity model takes input from files in
330. y also display the background image for the selected site by checking the box next to View Background Image M iew Background Image Once the image loads it will be displayed underneath the map view data Check the box next to View Fish Observation Overlay Wiew Fish Observation Overlay G to view any fish observation overlays at the selected site Once this box is checked a window will pop up allowing the user to choose which of the available fish observations to view Use the arrow to the left of the filename to access the entire list of fish observation files as shown below Select The Fish Observation File to view Aala Filename MUE a coho what 20010910 coho juv what 20070910 trout juyv what_ 2007097 0_trout_juyb what_ 20010910 trout juve what 200171025 coho adult E what 20011025_trout_2 what 20071025 trout juy what 20011025 trout juvb Once the desired fish observation has been selected press o oven to add it to the graph window To exit the Select Fish Observation window without adding anything to the graph window press eae Adding fish observations and background images may take a few seconds To select a different fish observation file to view press the ob button to the right of the View Fish Observation Overlay option This will bring up the Select Fish Observation window again and allow the user to select another file for viewing Only one fish observation can be viewed at a time The exampl
331. y as 12 species lifestages can b HSC 231 Ex Metric Units vy US Customary Weighted Usable Area 01 WhatcomCreek Chinook Spawn Stream Chinook Juvenile Coho Juvenile a ae Rainbow JuvAdlt 200 300 Discharge ft 3 s 400 e displayed simultaneously using this tool The HSC tab displays the Habitat Suitability Criteria used to model each species and lifestage This information is used for available The Plot Type selector allows the user all the sites so the Site selector option is not to select a plot of the Channel Index suitability index depth suitability index or the velocity suitably index by selecting the desired option from the pull down menu as shown below Physical Wl HSC Fish Distribution Miscellaneous Data Ea r Species W Chinook Flot Type 9 Channel Index al Depth S Velocity 5 Channel Index Notice the blue underlined link called Channel Index is available to the right of the Plot Type menu when the channel index option is selected Clicking on this link displays a description of the channel index codes 2D Habitat Viewer Plug in 4950 4951 4952 4953 4954 4955 4956 4957 4958 4959 4960 4961 4962 4963 4964 4965 4966 4967 232 The Y axis for all plot types is the Suitability Index SI on a scale from 0 0 completely unsuitable to 1 0 suitable The X axes depend on the plot type selected For Channel Index

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

SERVICE MANUAL  Operators Manual    Rencontres des entreprises Services à la  Tech 5 Part 2 Section 4 - MSA Gallet F1XF Firefighters Helmet  MANUALE UTENTE  Bruksanvisning  Braun Silk-épil 5 5280  PDF file  

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file